Contents

Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 Software Operating Manual PDF

1 of 380
1 of 380

Summary of Content for Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 Software Operating Manual PDF

GT SoftGOT1000 Version3

Operating Manual for GT Works3

GOT1000 COMPATIBLE HMI SOFTWARE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these precautions before using this equipment.)

Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual

carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.

The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product.

In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances.

Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.

Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING Depending on some failures of the personal computer, interface board, or cable, GT SoftGOT1000

may keep the outputs on or off.

An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a

serious accident.

Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

Do not use GT SoftGOT1000 as the warning device that may cause a serious accident.

An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device

that displays and outputs serious warning.

Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.

When programs or parameters of the controller (such as a PLC) that is monitored by GT

SoftGOT1000 are changed, be sure to restart GT SoftGOT1000 at the same time.

Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

Configure safety circuits external to the PLC to ensure that the entire system operates safely even

when a fault occurs in a personal computer.

Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

(1)Emergency stop circuits, protection circuits, and protective interlock circuits for conflicting

operations (such as forward/reverse rotations or upper/lower limit positioning) must be

configured external to the PLC.

(2)The station to which the board is installed may be disconnected from the data link due to a data

link error. If this occurs, the data output from the station and written to other stations before the

error will be held until the station is reconnected to the network (until its data link is restarted).

Provide a mechanism for data link status monitoring and error handling for each station that is

connected to the data link system.

WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.

A - 1

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING For the operating status of each station after a communication failure, refer to the manual of the

interface board.

Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident.

When changing data during operation, configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the

entire system will always operate safely.

Configure an interlock circuit in the program, and determine corrective actions to be taken between

the personal computer and CPU module in case of a communication failure.

To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the GOT and the system against

unauthorized access, DoS*1 attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from unreliable

networks and devices via network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private

networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions.

Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving GOT trouble and

system trouble by unauthorized access, DoS attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks.

*1 DoS: A denial-of-service (DoS) attack disrupts services by overloading systems or exploiting

vulnerabilities, resulting in a denial-of-service (DoS) state.

CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring.

Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm (3.94 in.)

apart. Failure to do so can cause a malfunction due to noise.

When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network, the available IP address is restricted according

to the system configuration.

When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network:

Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network.

When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network:

Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the controllers except the GOT in the network.

Doing so can cause the IP address duplication. The duplication can negatively affect the

communication of the device with the IP address (192.168.0.18).

The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system.

Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they

communicate with GT SoftGOT1000.

Failure to do so can cause a communication error on GT SoftGOT1000.

WARNING

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring.

Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions.

A - 2

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]

[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

[PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOTE CONTROL]

CAUTION

Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and

terminal screws in the specified torque range.

Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.

Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

WARNING

Before testing the operation of a user-created screen (such as turning on or off a bit device,

changing the current value of a word device, changing the set value or current value of a timer or

counter, and changing the current value of a buffer memory), thoroughly read the manual to fully

understand the operating procedure.

When testing, never change the data of the devices that control the operation essential for the

system.

Faulty output and malfunction may result in an accident.

WARNING

When power is on, do not touch the terminals.

Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction.

Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all

phases.

Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction.

Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.

Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

WARNING

Remote control is available through a network by using GOT functions, including the SoftGOT-GOT

link function, the remote personal computer operation function, and the VNC server function.

If these functions are used to perform remote control of control equipment, the field operator may not

notice the remote control, possibly leading to an accident.

In addition, a communication delay or interruption may occur depending on the network

environment, and remote control of control equipment cannot be performed normally in some cases.

Before using the above functions to perform remote control, fully grasp the circumstances of the field

site and ensure safety.

A - 3

CAUTIONS FOR USING THIS SOFTWARE

1. Required PC memory

The processing may be terminated by Microsoft Windows on a personal computer of which main memory capacity is less than 128M bytes. Make sure to secure the capacity of 128M bytes or more.

2. Free capacity of hard disk At least 100M bytes of free capacity of virtual memory should be secured within hard disk to run this software.

The processing may be terminated by Windows, if free space of 100M bytes or more cannot be secured within hard disk while running GTSoftGOT1000. Secure enough free capacity of virtual memory within hard disk space in order to run the software.

3. Display of GT SoftGOT1000 and GOT Display of GT SoftGOT1000 may be different from display of GOT. Confirm for actual display of GOT on the GOT.

A - 4

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................................A - 1

CAUTIONS FOR USING THIS SOFTWARE............................................................................................A - 4

INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................A - 5

CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................................................A - 5

MANUALS...............................................................................................................................................A - 10

QUICK REFERENCE .............................................................................................................................A - 12

ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ...........................................................................................A - 14

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL................................................................................................................A - 19

GT SoftGOT1000

1. OVERVIEW

1.1 Features........................................................................................................................................... 1 - 2

SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION OF GT SoftGOT1000

2. SPECIFICATIONS OF GT SoftGOT1000

2.1 Operating Environment.................................................................................................................... 2 - 1

2.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................... 2 - 3

2.2.1 Specifications of the GT SoftGOT1000 ................................................................................ 2 - 3

2.2.2 License key specifications .................................................................................................... 2 - 5

2.3 Functions that Cannot Be Used....................................................................................................... 2 - 6

2.4 Precautions...................................................................................................................................... 2 - 8

2.4.1 Precautions for using the GT Soft GOT1000........................................................................ 2 - 8

2.4.2 Precautions on license key................................................................................................. 2 - 10

3. OPERATION OF GT SoftGOT1000

3.1 Start GT SoftGOT1000 .................................................................................................................... 3 - 1

3.2 Screen Configuration of GT SoftGOT1000...................................................................................... 3 - 4

3.3 Menu Bar ......................................................................................................................................... 3 - 5

3.4 Tool Bar ........................................................................................................................................... 3 - 7

3.5 Environment Setup .......................................................................................................................... 3 - 8

3.5.1 Environment setup dialog box .............................................................................................. 3 - 8

3.6 Communication Setup ................................................................................................................... 3 - 14

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box ....................................................................................... 3 - 15

3.7 Opening the Project ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 21

3.7.1 Open the GT Designer3 Project ......................................................................................... 3 - 21

3.7.2 Open a single file format project of GT Designer3/GT Designer2 file ................................ 3 - 23

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Electric Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi Electric GOT).

Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in

advance to ensure correct use.

CONTENTS

A - 5

3.8 Starting Monitoring......................................................................................................................... 3 - 25

3.9 Monitoring Operation ..................................................................................................................... 3 - 26

3.10 Monitor Stop .................................................................................................................................. 3 - 26

3.11 Exiting from GT SoftGOT1000....................................................................................................... 3 - 27

3.12 Automatic Startup .......................................................................................................................... 3 - 28

3.12.1 Automatic startup settings on Windows(R) 7, Windows(R) 8, Windows(R) 8.1,

Windows(R) 10, or Windows(R) 11 .................................................................................... 3 - 28

3.13 Help ............................................................................................................................................... 3 - 30

CONNECTION BETWEEN GT SoftGOT1000 AND DEVICES

4. CONNECTION

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range........................................................... 4 - 1

4.1.1 Controller that allows monitoring .......................................................................................... 4 - 1

4.1.2 Monitorable controllers ......................................................................................................... 4 - 3

4.1.3 Access range ........................................................................................................................ 4 - 6

4.1.4 System setting examples.................................................................................................... 4 - 30

4.1.5 How to monitor redundant system...................................................................................... 4 - 35

4.1.6 Access range of the data link system (MELSECNET/B, (II)) .............................................. 4 - 61

4.2 Type of PC to Be Used .................................................................................................................. 4 - 63

4.3 Connectable Devices..................................................................................................................... 4 - 63

4.4 Converter/Cable to Be Used.......................................................................................................... 4 - 63

4.5 Bus Connection ............................................................................................................................. 4 - 64

4.5.1 System configurations and connection conditions.............................................................. 4 - 64

4.5.2 GT SoftGOT1000 setting .................................................................................................... 4 - 64

4.6 Direct CPU Connection.................................................................................................................. 4 - 65

4.6.1 System configurations and connection conditions.............................................................. 4 - 65

4.6.2 Connection cable ................................................................................................................ 4 - 66

4.6.3 GT SoftGOT1000 setting .................................................................................................... 4 - 71

4.6.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 4 - 72

4.7 Computer Link Connection ............................................................................................................ 4 - 73

4.7.1 System configurations and connection conditions.............................................................. 4 - 73

4.7.2 Serial communication module, computer link module ........................................................ 4 - 74

4.7.3 Connection cable ................................................................................................................ 4 - 75

4.7.4 GT SoftGOT1000 side ........................................................................................................ 4 - 79

4.7.5 Controller setting................................................................................................................. 4 - 79

4.8 Ethernet Connection ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 82

4.8.1 System configurations and connection conditions.............................................................. 4 - 82

4.8.2 Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card .................................... 4 - 85

4.8.3 Connection cable ................................................................................................................ 4 - 86

4.8.4 Controller setting................................................................................................................. 4 - 86

4.9 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 Connection ........................................................................... 4 - 140

4.9.1 System configurations and connection conditions............................................................ 4 - 140

4.9.2 Network module, interface board...................................................................................... 4 - 141

4.9.3 Connection cable .............................................................................................................. 4 - 142

4.9.4 GT SoftGOT1000 setting .................................................................................................. 4 - 142

4.9.5 Controller setting............................................................................................................... 4 - 142

4.10 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection ................................................................................. 4 - 143

A - 6

4.10.1 System configurations and connection conditions............................................................ 4 - 143

4.10.2 Network module, interface board...................................................................................... 4 - 143

4.10.3 Connection cable.............................................................................................................. 4 - 144

4.10.4 GT SoftGOT1000 setting.................................................................................................. 4 - 144

4.10.5 Controller setting .............................................................................................................. 4 - 144

4.11 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection ......................................................................................... 4 - 145

4.11.1 System configurations and connection conditions............................................................ 4 - 145

4.11.2 Network module, interface board...................................................................................... 4 - 146

4.11.3 GT SoftGOT1000 setting.................................................................................................. 4 - 146

4.11.4 Controller setting .............................................................................................................. 4 - 146

4.12 CNC Connection.......................................................................................................................... 4 - 147

4.12.1 Direct CPU connection ..................................................................................................... 4 - 147

4.12.2 Ethernet connection.......................................................................................................... 4 - 148

4.13 Robot Controller Connection ....................................................................................................... 4 - 153

4.13.1 System configurations and connection conditions............................................................ 4 - 153

4.13.2 Connection cable.............................................................................................................. 4 - 153

4.13.3 Controller setting .............................................................................................................. 4 - 153

4.14 Third Party PLC Connections ...................................................................................................... 4 - 157

4.14.1 OMRON PLC.................................................................................................................... 4 - 157

4.14.2 KEYENCE PLC ................................................................................................................ 4 - 162

4.14.3 TOSHIBA PLC.................................................................................................................. 4 - 165

4.14.4 YASKAWA PLC................................................................................................................ 4 - 168

4.14.5 YOKOGAWA PLC ............................................................................................................ 4 - 175

4.14.6 SIEMENS PLC ................................................................................................................. 4 - 178

4.15 MODBUS(R)/TCP Connection..................................................................................................... 4 - 183

4.15.1 System configuration and connection condition ............................................................... 4 - 183

4.15.2 Ethernet board/card.......................................................................................................... 4 - 183

4.15.3 Connection cable.............................................................................................................. 4 - 183

4.15.4 Controller setting .............................................................................................................. 4 - 184

4.16 Barcode Reader Connection ....................................................................................................... 4 - 186

4.16.1 System configurations and connection conditions............................................................ 4 - 186

4.16.2 Controller setting .............................................................................................................. 4 - 186

4.16.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 4 - 186

4.17 RFID Connection ......................................................................................................................... 4 - 187

4.17.1 System configurations and connection conditions............................................................ 4 - 187

4.17.2 Controller setting .............................................................................................................. 4 - 187

4.17.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 4 - 187

FUNCTIONS OF GT SoftGOT1000

5. FUNCTIONS

5.1 Snap Shot ........................................................................................................................................ 5 - 1

5.2 Print ................................................................................................................................................. 5 - 2

5.2.1 Printing ................................................................................................................................. 5 - 2

5.2.2 Performing print preview....................................................................................................... 5 - 3

5.2.3 Performing page setup ......................................................................................................... 5 - 4

5.2.4 Performing print setup .......................................................................................................... 5 - 4

5.3 Property ........................................................................................................................................... 5 - 5

5.4 Resource Data................................................................................................................................. 5 - 6

A - 7

5.5 Displaying File Information in PLC (QCPU, QSCPU Only).............................................................. 5 - 8

5.5.1 Setting method...................................................................................................................... 5 - 8

5.5.2 Precautions for use............................................................................................................... 5 - 9

5.6 Mail Function ................................................................................................................................. 5 - 10

5.6.1 Mail function overview ........................................................................................................ 5 - 10

5.6.2 Operation flow when using the mail function ...................................................................... 5 - 11

5.6.3 How to set up the mail function........................................................................................... 5 - 12

5.6.4 Sending e-mail.................................................................................................................... 5 - 16

5.6.5 Mail history.......................................................................................................................... 5 - 18

5.7 Keyboard Input .............................................................................................................................. 5 - 19

5.7.1 Keyboard input enabling/disabling procedure..................................................................... 5 - 19

5.7.2 When operating the numerical input function or the ASCII input function

from the keyboard of a PC.................................................................................................. 5 - 19

5.7.3 How to use function keys.................................................................................................... 5 - 20

5.7.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 21

5.8 Full Screen Mode........................................................................................................................... 5 - 22

5.8.1 Full screen mode types....................................................................................................... 5 - 22

5.8.2 Setting method.................................................................................................................... 5 - 24

5.8.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 25

5.9 Popup Menu .................................................................................................................................. 5 - 26

5.9.1 Popup menu ineffective/effective........................................................................................ 5 - 26

5.9.2 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 26

5.10 Starting Up Multiple GT SoftGOT1000 Modules............................................................................ 5 - 27

5.10.1 Startup procedure ............................................................................................................... 5 - 27

5.10.2 Precautions for use............................................................................................................. 5 - 29

5.11 Moving the Window ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 30

5.11.1 Window movement types.................................................................................................... 5 - 30

5.11.2 Setting method.................................................................................................................... 5 - 31

5.12 System Alarm ................................................................................................................................ 5 - 32

5.13 Script Error..................................................................................................................................... 5 - 33

5.14 Object Script Error ......................................................................................................................... 5 - 34

5.15 Application Start-up ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 35

5.15.1 Setting method.................................................................................................................... 5 - 36

5.15.2 Application start-up history ................................................................................................. 5 - 43

5.15.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 44

5.16 Close Menu.................................................................................................................................... 5 - 45

5.16.1 Disabling/enabling the close menu ..................................................................................... 5 - 45

5.17 Interaction with PX Developer ....................................................................................................... 5 - 46

5.17.1 Setting method.................................................................................................................... 5 - 47

5.17.2 PX Developer function call history ...................................................................................... 5 - 52

5.18 Back screen mode ......................................................................................................................... 5 - 53

5.18.1 Setting method.................................................................................................................... 5 - 53

5.19 Scroll Function ............................................................................................................................... 5 - 53

5.19.1 Setting method.................................................................................................................... 5 - 53

5.20 Exit Key.......................................................................................................................................... 5 - 54

5.20.1 Disabling/enabling exit key ................................................................................................. 5 - 54

5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function ......................................................................................................... 5 - 55

A - 8

5.21.1 Project data synchronization .............................................................................................. 5 - 57

5.21.2 Authorization control........................................................................................................... 5 - 60

5.21.3 Control or notification with GOT internal devices ............................................................... 5 - 63

5.21.4 Setting method ................................................................................................................... 5 - 65

5.21.5 Management of GT SoftGOT1000 modules with the SoftGOT-GOT link function

(GT SoftGOT1000 Commander) ........................................................................................ 5 - 72

5.21.6 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 81

5.22 Monitor-only Mode ......................................................................................................................... 5 - 82

5.22.1 Setting method ................................................................................................................... 5 - 82

APPENDICES

Appendix1 Internal Device Interface Function.......................................................................................App - 1

Appendix.1.1 Development environment ..........................................................................................App - 1

Appendix.1.2 Accessible devices ......................................................................................................App - 1

Appendix.1.3 Internal device interface function.................................................................................App - 2

Appendix.1.4 GDev_OpenMapping (Opening and mapping the internal device shared memory)....App - 4

Appendix.1.5 GDev_Read (Reading from the internal device) .........................................................App - 5

Appendix.1.6 GDev_Write (Writing to the internal device) ................................................................App - 7

Appendix.1.7 GDev_CloseUnMapping

(Unmapping and closing the internal device shared memory) ....................................App - 9

Appendix.1.8 Precautions for the internal device interface function..................................................App - 9

Appendix.1.9 Sample program........................................................................................................App - 10

Appendix2 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................App - 12

Appendix.2.1 Error message ..........................................................................................................App - 12

Appendix.2.2 Troubleshooting for license key.................................................................................App - 16

Appendix.2.3 Troubleshooting related to mail transmission............................................................App - 18

Appendix.2.4 Troubleshooting for print ...........................................................................................App - 18

Appendix.2.5 Troubleshooting for file save problems .....................................................................App - 19

Appendix.2.6 GOT error code list ....................................................................................................App - 19

Appendix.2.7 Error code list when using the internal device interface function ..............................App - 19

Appendix3 Applicable Project Data .....................................................................................................App - 20

Appendix4 Unsupported Functions .....................................................................................................App - 20

Appendix5 Open Source Software ......................................................................................................App - 21

Appendix.5.1 OpenSSL toolkit ........................................................................................................App - 21

INDEX

REVISIONS

Intellectual Property Rights

A - 9

MANUALS

The following table lists the manual relevant to this product. Refer to each manual for any purpose.

Screen creation software manuals

Connection manuals

Extended and option function manuals

GT SoftGOT1000 manuals

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product -

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080866ENG

(1D7MB9)

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080867ENG

(1D7MC1)

GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080861ENG

(1D7MB1)

GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080862ENG

(1D7MB2)

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080868ENG

(1D7MC2)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080869ENG

(1D7MC3)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080870ENG

(1D7MC4)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT

Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM

SH-080871ENG

(1D7MC5)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (2 Connection) for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM JY997D39201

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080858ENG

(1D7MA7)

GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080859ENG

(1D7MA8)

GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080863ENG

(1D7MB3)

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080860ENG

(1D7MA9)

A - 10

GT16 manuals

GT15 manuals

GT14 manuals

GT12 manuals

GT11 manuals

GT10 manuals

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080928ENG

(1D7MD3)

GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080929ENG

(1D7MD4)

GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in DVD-ROM

JY997D41201

JY997D41202

(09R821)

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GT15 User's Manual Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080528ENG

(1D7M23)

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GT14 User's Manual Stored in DVD-ROM JY997D44801

(09R823)

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GT12 User's Manual Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080977ENG

(1D7ME1)

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GT11 User's Manual Stored in DVD-ROM JY997D17501

(09R815)

GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in DVD-ROM

JY997D20101

JY997D20102

(09R817)

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GT10 User's Manual Stored in DVD-ROM JY997D24701

(09R819)

A - 11

QUICK REFERENCE

Creating a project

Connecting a controller to the GOT

Transferring data to the GOT

Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

(Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2

Setting available functions on GT Designer3

Creating a screen displayed on the GOT

Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing

Setting details for figures and objects

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

1/2, 2/2 Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action

Setting functions to use peripheral devices

Simulating a created project on a personal computer GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3

Obtaining information of Mitsubishi Electric products applicable to the

GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric

Products) for GT Works3

Connecting Mitsubishi Electric products to the GOT

Connecting multiple controllers to one GOT (Multi-channel function)

Establishing communication between a personal computer and a

controller via the GOT (FA transparent function)

Obtaining information of Non-Mitsubishi Electric products applicable to the

GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi

Electric Products 1) for GT Works3

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi

Electric Products 2) for GT Works3Connecting Non-Mitsubishi Electric products to the GOT

Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer,

MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3 Connecting peripheral devices including a barcode reader to the GOT

Connecting 2 with GOT GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (2 Connection) for GT

Works3

Writing data to the GOT

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

(Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Reading data from the GOT

Verifying a editing project to a GOT project

A - 12

Others

Obtaining specifications (including part names, external dimensions, and

options) of each GOT

GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)

GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual

GT15 User's Manual

GT14 User's Manual

GT12 User's Manual

GT11 User's Manual

GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual

GT10 User's Manual

Installing the GOT

Operating the utility

GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)

GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual

GT15 User's Manual

GT14 User's Manual

GT12 User's Manual

GT11 User's Manual

GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual

GT10 User's Manual

Configuring the gateway function GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3

Configuring the MES interface function GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT

Works3

Configuring the extended function and option function GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option

Functions) for GT Works3

Using a personal computer as the GOT GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3

A - 13

ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS

GOT

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

GOT1000

Series

GT1695 GT1695M-X Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M-XTBD

GT1685 GT1685M-S Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M-STBD

GT1675

GT1675M-S Abbreviation of GT1675M-STBA, GT1675M-STBD

GT1675M-V Abbreviation of GT1675M-VTBA, GT1675M-VTBD

GT1675-VN Abbreviation of GT1675-VNBA, GT1675-VNBD

GT1672 GT1672-VN Abbreviation of GT1672-VNBA, GT1672-VNBD

GT1665 GT1665M-S Abbreviation of GT1665M-STBA, GT1665M-STBD

GT1665M-V Abbreviation of GT1665M-VTBA, GT1665M-VTBD

GT1662 GT1662-VN Abbreviation of GT1662-VNBA, GT1662-VNBD

GT1655 GT1655-V Abbreviation of GT1655-VTBD

GT16 Abbreviation of GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662, GT1655, GT16 Handy GOT

GT1595 GT1595-X Abbreviation of GT1595-XTBA, GT1595-XTBD

GT1585 GT1585V-S Abbreviation of GT1585V-STBA, GT1585V-STBD

GT1585-S Abbreviation of GT1585-STBA, GT1585-STBD

GT157

GT1575V-S Abbreviation of GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD

GT1575-S Abbreviation of GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD

GT1575-V Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD

GT1575-VN Abbreviation of GT1575-VNBA, GT1575-VNBD

GT1572-VN Abbreviation of GT1572-VNBA, GT1572-VNBD

GT156 GT1565-V Abbreviation of GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD

GT1562-VN Abbreviation of GT1562-VNBA, GT1562-VNBD

GT155

GT1555-V Abbreviation of GT1555-VTBD

GT1555-Q Abbreviation of GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD

GT1550-Q Abbreviation of GT1550-QLBD

GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155

GT145 GT1455-Q Abbreviation of GT1455-QTBDE, GT1455-QTBD

GT1450-Q Abbreviation of GT1450-QMBDE, GT1450-QMBD, GT1450-QLBDE, GT1450-QLBD

GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455-Q, GT1450-Q

GT1275 GT1275-V Abbreviation of GT1275-VNBA, GT1275-VNBD

GT1265 GT1265-V Abbreviation of GT1265-VNBA, GT1265-VNBD

GT12 Abbreviation of GT1275, GT1265

GT115 GT1155-Q

Abbreviation of GT1155-QTBDQ, GT1155-QSBDQ, GT1155-QTBDA, GT1155-QSBDA,

GT1155-QTBD, GT1155-QSBD

GT1150-Q Abbreviation of GT1150-QLBDQ, GT1150-QLBDA, GT1150-QLBD

GT11 Abbreviation of GT115 , GT11 Handy GOT,

GT105 GT1055-Q Abbreviation of GT1055-QSBD

GT1050-Q Abbreviation of GT1050-QBBD

GT104 GT1045-Q Abbreviation of GT1045-QSBD

GT1040-Q Abbreviation of GT1040-QBBD

GT1030

Abbreviation of GT1030-LBD, GT1030-LBD2, GT1030-LBL, GT1030-LBDW, GT1030-LBDW2,

GT1030-LBLW, GT1030-LWD, GT1030-LWD2, GT1030-LWL, GT1030-LWDW, GT1030-LWDW2,

GT1030-LWLW, GT1030-HBD, GT1030-HBD2, GT1030-HBL, GT1030-HBDW, GT1030-HBDW2,

GT1030-HBLW, GT1030-HWD, GT1030-HWD2, GT1030-HWL, GT1030-HWDW, GT1030-HWDW2,

GT1030-HWLW

GT1020

Abbreviation of GT1020-LBD, GT1020-LBD2, GT1020-LBL, GT1020-LBDW, GT1020-LBDW2,

GT1020-LBLW, GT1020-LWD, GT1020LWD2, GT1020-LWL, GT1020-LWDW, GT1020-LWDW2,

GT1020-LWLW

GT10 Abbreviation of GT105 , GT104 , GT1030, GT1020

A - 14

Communication unit

*1 A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set

*2 A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set

*3 A8GT-J61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set

Option unit

*1 GT15-CFEX + GT15-CFEXIF + GT15-C08CF set.

GOT1000

Series

Handy

GOT

GT16

Handy

GOT

GT1665HS-V Abbreviation of GT1665HS-VTBD

GT14

Handy

GOT

GT1455HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1455HS-QTBDE

GT1450HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1450HS-QMBDE

GT11

Handy

GOT

GT1155HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD

GT1150HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD

GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000

GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT-A900 series, GOT-F900 series

GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT-800 series

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L,

GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE

RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P, GT15-RS2T4-25P

Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13

MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-75J71LP23-Z*1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z*2

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication

unit GT15-J71GP23-SX

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z*3

Interface converter unit GT15-75IF900

Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M

Connection Conversion Adapter GT10-9PT5S

RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

Printer unit GT15-PRN

Video/RGB unit

Video input unit GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4

RGB input unit GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1

Video/RGB input unit GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1

RGB output unit GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT

Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR

CF card unit GT15-CFCD

CF card extension unit*1 GT15-CFEX-C08SET

External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

A - 15

Option

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

Memory card

CF card

GT05-MEM-16MC, GT05-MEM-32MC, GT05-MEM-64MC, GT05-MEM-128MC,

GT05-MEM-256MC, GT05-MEM-512MC, GT05-MEM-1GC, GT05-MEM-2GC,

GT05-MEM-4GC, GT05-MEM-8GC, GT05-MEM-16GC

SD card NZ1MEM-2GBSD, NZ1MEM-4GBSD, NZ1MEM-8GBSD, NZ1MEM-16GBSD,L1MEM-2GBSD,

L1MEM-4GBSD

Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC

Option function board GT16-MESB, GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M,

GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M, GT11-50FNB, GT15-MESB48M

Battery GT15-BAT, GT11-50BAT

Protective Sheet

For GT16

GT16-90PSCB, GT16-90PSGB, GT16-90PSCW, GT16-90PSGW,

GT16-80PSCB, GT16-80PSGB, GT16-80PSCW, GT16-80PSGW,

GT16-70PSCB, GT16-70PSGB, GT16-70PSCW, GT16-70PSGW,

GT16-60PSCB, GT16-60PSGB, GT16-60PSCW, GT16-60PSGW,

GT16-50PSCB, GT16-50PSGB, GT16-50PSCW, GT16-50PSGW,

GT16-90PSCB-012, GT16-80PSCB-012, GT16-70PSCB-012,

GT16-60PSCB-012, GT16-50PSCB-012, GT16H-60PSC

For GT15

GT15-90PSCB, GT15-90PSGB, GT15-90PSCW, GT15-90PSGW,

GT15-80PSCB, GT15-80PSGB, GT15-80PSCW, GT15-80PSGW,

GT15-70PSCB, GT15-70PSGB, GT15-70PSCW, GT15-70PSGW,

GT15-60PSCB, GT15-60PSGB, GT15-60PSCW, GT15-60PSGW,

GT15-50PSCB, GT15-50PSGB, GT15-50PSCW, GT15-50PSGW

For GT14 GT14-50PSCB, GT14-50PSGB, GT14-50PSCW, GT14-50PSGW

For GT12 GT11-70PSCB, GT11-65PSCB

For GT11 GT11-50PSCB, GT11-50PSGB, GT11-50PSCW, GT11-50PSGW,

GT11H-50PSC

For GT10

GT10-50PSCB, GT10-50PSGB, GT10-50PSCW, GT10-50PSGW,

GT10-40PSCB, GT10-40PSGB, GT10-40PSCW, GT10-40PSGW,

GT10-30PSCB, GT10-30PSGB, GT10-30PSCW, GT10-30PSGW,

GT10-20PSCB, GT10-20PSGB, GT10-20PSCW, GT10-20PSGW

Protective cover for oil GT05-90PCO, GT05-80PCO, GT05-70PCO, GT05-60PCO, GT05-50PCO,

GT16-50PCO, GT10-40PCO, GT10-30PCO, GT10-20PCO

USB environmental protection cover GT16-UCOV, GT16-50UCOV, GT15-UCOV, GT14-50UCOV, GT11-50UCOV

Stand GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, A9GT-50STAND, GT05-50STAND

Attachment GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96,

GT15-60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77, GT15-50ATT-95W, GT15-50ATT-85

Backlight

GT16-90XLTT, GT16-80SLTT, GT16-70SLTT, GT16-70VLTT, GT16-70VLTTA, GT16-70VLTN,

GT16-60SLTT, GT16-60VLTT, GT16-60VLTN, GT15-90XLTT, GT15-80SLTT, GT15-70SLTT,

GT15-70VLTT, GT15-70VLTN, GT15-60VLTT, GT15-60VLTN

Multi-color display board GT15-XHNB, GT15-VHNB

Connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S, GT16H-CNB-42S

Emergency stop sw guard cover GT11H-50ESCOV, GT16H-60ESCOV

Wall-hanging fitting GT14H-50ATT

Memory loader GT10-LDR

Memory board GT10-50FMB

Panel-mounted USB port extension GT14-C10EXUSB-4S, GT10-C10EXUSB-5S

A - 16

Software

License key (for GT SoftGOT1000)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SW DND-GTWK3-E and SW DND-GTWK3-EA

GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series

GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000/GOT900 series

GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000

GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series

GT Designer2 Classic Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series

GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series

iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works

MELSOFT Navigator Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SW DNC-IQWK (iQ

Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works)

MELSOFT iQ AppPortal SW DND-IQAPL-M type integrated application management software

GX Works3 Abbreviation of SW DND-GXW3-E and SW DND-GXW3-EA type programmable controller

engineering software

GX Works2 Abbreviation of SW DNC-GXW2-E and SW DNC-GXW2-EA type programmable controller

engineering software

Controller simulator

GX Simulator3 Abbreviation of GX Works3 with the simulation function

GX Simulator2 Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function

GX Simulator Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT-E(-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software packages

(SW5D5C-LLT (-EV) or later versions)

GX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-GPPW-E(-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW-E type software package

GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SW DNN-VIEWER-E type software package

PX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control

MT Works2 Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2(SW DND-MTW2-E)

MT Developer Abbreviation of SW RNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller Q series

MR Configurator2 Abbreviation of SW DNC-MRC2-E type Servo Configuration Software

MR Configurator Abbreviation of MRZJW -SETUP E type Servo Configuration Software

FR Configurator Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software (FR-SW -SETUP-WE)

NC Configurator Abbreviation of CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator

FX Configurator-FP Abbreviation of parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software packages for FX3U-20SSC-H

(SW D5C-FXSSC-E)

FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool Abbreviation of FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E)

FX Configurator-EN Abbreviation of FX3U-ENET type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5C-FXENET-E)

RT ToolBox2 Abbreviation of robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)

MX Component Abbreviation of MX Component Version (SW D5C-ACT-E, SW D5C-ACT-EA)

MX Sheet Abbreviation of MX Sheet Version (SW D5C-SHEET-E, SW D5C-SHEET-EA)

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Abbreviation of CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

License GT15-SGTKEY-U, GT15-SGTKEY-P

A - 17

Others

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

IAI Abbreviation of IAI Corporation

AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation (former Yamatake Corporation)

OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation

KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION

KOYO EI Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Corporation

JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation

SHINKO Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.

CHINO Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION

TOSHIBA Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION

TOSHIBA MACHINE Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD.

HITACHI IES Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.

HITACHI Abbreviation of Hitachi, Ltd.

FUJI Abbreviation of FUJI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

PANASONIC Abbreviation of Panasonic Corporation

PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX Abbreviation of Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

YASKAWA Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation

YOKOGAWA Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation

ALLEN-BRADLEY Abbreviation of Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.

GE Abbreviation of GE Intelligent Platforms

LS IS Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.

MITSUBISHI INDIA Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd.

SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA

SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG

SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG

RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC.

HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation

MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co., Ltd.

PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller

Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controller manufactured by each corporation

Indicating controller Generic term for indicating controller manufactured by each corporation

Control equipment Generic term for control equipment manufactured by each corporation

CHINO controller Abbreviation of indicating controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION

PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD

GOT (server) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function

GOT (client) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function

Windows font Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows

(Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3)

Intelligent function module Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU, power supply module and I/O module that are mounted

to the base unit

MODBUS/RTU Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial

communication

MODBUS/TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP/IP network

A - 18

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

The following symbols are used in this manual.

The above is different from the actual page, as it is provided for explanation only.

[ ] :

:

:

Shows whether the GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10, and GT SoftGOT1000 are applicable.

: Applicable : Not applicable

Shows the setting item displayed on the software screen or the GOT screen.

Refers to information required for operation.

Refers to information useful for operation.

Shows a chapter, section, relevant manual, or others of relevant information.

(Fundamentals): GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (Functions): GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Shows the operation steps. Operate the steps from the step 1.

Black: Applicable Gray: Not applicable

Shows whether the GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10, and GT SoftGOT1000 are applicable.

A - 19

A - 20

GT SoftGOT1000

1. OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

1. OVERVIEW

This manual explains the system configuration, specifications, screen structure, and operating method of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 (hereinafter abbreviated as GT SoftGOT1000). GT SoftGOT1000 is the software that has the same functions as the GOT1000 series and is used to display lamps, data, and messages on personal computers and panel controllers. When applying the following program examples to the actual system, make sure to examine the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems.

POINT

Described contents in this manual

This manual describes the operation method for GT SoftGOT1000. For other than operation method, refer to the following manuals.

(1) Installation method of GT SoftGOT1000 For the installation method of GT SoftGOT1000, refer to the following manuals.

GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual

(2) Project data creating method of GT Designer3 For the project data creating method of GT Designer3, refer to the following manuals.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

1 - 1

1.1 Features

The features of the GOT series and advantages of personal computer and panel computer are available

(1) Interactive use with applications (including MELSOFT)

(a) Interactive use with GT Designer3. Installation of GT SoftGOT1000 and GT Designer3 on the same personal computer allows operations from screen creation to monitoring to be supported by a single personal computer. Immediately after creating or modifying a screen on GT Designer3, the screen can be monitored on GT SoftGOT1000. Therefore, design efficiency is improved greatly.

(b) Interaction with PX Developer With interaction between GT SoftGOT1000 and PX Developer, monitor tool functions for PX Developer can be called on GT SoftGOT1000. GT SoftGOT1000 can also be started on PX Developer, and the functions can be shared. For the monitor tool of PX Developer, refer to the following manual.

PX Developer Version Operating Manual (Monitor Tool)

Install

GT SoftGOT1000

GX Developer

GT Works3 Version

(GT Designer3)

GT SoftGOT1000

License key

CPU direct

connection

Attach

PX DeveloperGT SoftGOT1000

Call a monitor tool function for in PX Developer

on GT SoftGOT1000.

Register GT SoftGOT1000 as a user graphic

screen of PX Developer, and start the registered

GT SoftGOT1000.

1 - 2 1.1 Features

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(c) Interactive use with Windows applications A Windows application can be started up from GT SoftGOT1000. Also, the data of GT SoftGOT1000 internal devices can be read/written from a user-created application. With interaction between GT SoftGOT1000 and a user-created application, the user can control or manage data by own method.

(2) Flexible response to high-resolution The user can select resolutions from UXGA to VGA and can set a resolution specification, which sets a resolution dot by dot depending on applications. GT SoftGOT1000 supports the following resolutions.

(a) Selectable resolutions UXGA (1600 1200 dots) SXGA (1280 1024 dots) XGA (1024 768 dots) SVGA (800 600 dots) VGA (640 480 dots)

(b) User setting X Y (Resolution specification) (1920 to 640 1200 to 480 dots)

The monitor screen data created for the GOT1000 series is applicable to GT SoftGOT1000. The GT SoftGOT1000 uses monitor screen data created with GT Designer3. By converting the GOT type for GT SoftGOT1000, the monitor screen data used for the GOT1000 series can be used without modification. GT SoftGOT1000 uses the same screens and operations as GOT. Therefore, there will be no discomfort or confusion for the operators and maintenance personnel.

Personal computer

GT SoftGOT1000

User-created application

PLC

Communication with PLC

Screen display (alarm etc.)

User's own data control

Server

Reading/writing

internal device value

User's own control

GOT GT SoftGOT1000

The monitor screen data is compatible.

1.1 Features 1 - 3

Synchronizing GT SoftGOT1000 data with GOT data The SoftGOT-GOT link function enables GT SoftGOT1000 to connect the GOT via Ethernet. And then, the function synchronizes GT SoftGOT1000 data with GOT project data and resource data. When input objects (touch switch, numerical input, and ASCII input) are input or other operation is performed, the simultaneous operation between GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT must be prevented. The operation must be allowed by either GT SoftGOT1000 or the GOT. GT SoftGOT1000 can monitor a controller connected to the GOT.

5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function

Ethernet

GT SoftGOT1000

GOT Controller

ControllerGT SoftGOT1000 monitors the controller connected to the GOT. GT SoftGOT1000 only monitors the controller with the channel number 1 assigned on the GOT. GT SoftGOT1000 cannot communicate with the controller other than the channel number 1 assigned.

GT SoftGOT1000 reads GOT project data from the GOT, and monitors the controller with the same project data as the read GOT project data.

1 - 4 1.1 Features

SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION OF

GT SoftGOT1000

2. SPECIFICATIONS OF GT SoftGOT1000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1

3. OPERATION OF GT SoftGOT1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S o

ft G

O T

10 0

0

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

2. SPECIFICATIONS OF GT SoftGOT1000

2.1 Operating Environment

The following shows the GT SoftGOT1000 operating environment.

Item Description

Personal computer PC/AT compatible personal computer that the following OSs run on.

PC CPU module manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD (PPC-852-21G, PPC-852-22F)*6

OS (English, Simplified

Chinese, Traditional

Chinese, or Korean

version)*10

Microsoft Windows 11 Education (64 bit)*2*3*8

Microsoft Windows 11 Enterprise (64 bit)*2*3*8

Microsoft Windows 11 Pro (64 bit)*2*3*8

Microsoft Windows 11 Home (64 bit)*2*3*8

Microsoft Windows 10 Enterprise (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8

Microsoft Windows 10 Pro (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8

Microsoft Windows 10 Home (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8

Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2016 LTSB (64 bit) (English OPK, or English OPK and a language pack for

localization)*2*3*8*11*12

Microsoft Windows 8.1 Enterprise (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8*9

Microsoft Windows 8.1 Pro (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8*9

Microsoft Windows 8.1 (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8*9

Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8*9

Microsoft Windows 8 Pro (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8*9

Microsoft Windows 8 (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8*9

Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*7*8

Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*7*8

Microsoft Windows 7 Professional (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*7*8

Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8

Microsoft Windows 7 Starter (32 bit)*2*3

CPU Windows 11: 64 bit-compatible processor with dual-core or more or System on a Chip (SoC)*13

Other than Windows 11: Intel Core 2 Duo Processor 2.0 GHz or more recommended*13

Memory

For Windows 11: 4 GB or more recommended

For 64-bit OS other than Windows 11: 2 GB or more recommended

For 32-bit OS other than Windows 11: 1 GB or more recommended

Display Resolution XGA (1024 768 dots) or higher

Hard disk space*1 For installation: 5GB or more recommended

For execution: 512MB or more recommended

Display color High color (16 bits) or more

Hardware*5

When using personal computer

GT15-SGTKEY-U (License key (for USB port))

GT15-SGTKEY-P (License key (for parallel port))

When using PC CPU module

GT15-SGTKEY-U (License key (for USB port))

Software

When creating or editing project data: GT Designer3*4

When using with PX Developer : PX Developer Version 1.14Q or later

(PX Developer Version1.31H or later when using the security level change)

GT Designer3 Version 1.01B or later

Others The mouse, key board, printer, DVD-ROM drive, sound function (sound card), or speaker

2.1 Operating Environment 2 - 1

*1 When using GT Designer3 or PX Developer, free space is required separately.

For the free space required when using GT Designer3, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

For the available space required when using monitor tool functions of PX Developer, refer to the following manual.

PX Developer Version Operating Manual (Monitor Tool)

When using a user-created application, free space is required separately. *2 Administrator authority is required for installing and using GT SoftGOT1000.

To use GT SoftGOT1000 with another application that runs with administrator authority, GT SoftGOT1000 must also run with

administrator authority.

*3 The following functions are not supported.

Activating the application with Windows compatibility mode Fast user switching Change your desktop themes (fonts) Remote desktop Setting the size of text and illustrations on the screen to any size other than [Small-100%]

*4 Use GT Designer3 included in GT Works3 that contains GT SoftGOT1000.

*5 When using GT15-SGTKEY-U, a USB port is required in the personal computer.

When using GT15-SGTKEY-P, a parallel port (Centronics/printer connecter) is required in the personal computer.

*6 Refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.

*7 Windows XP Mode is not supported.

*8 The touch feature is not supported.

*9 Modern UI style is not supported.

*10 A virtual environment such as Hyper-V is not supported.

*11 The following OSs are not supported.

Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise for Retail or Thin Client

Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise for Tablets

Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise for Small Tablets *12 The following lockdown features are not supported.

Unified Write Filter Assigned Access USB Filter Layout Control AppLocker Shell Launcher

*13 ARM64 and ARM32 are not supported.

POINT

(1) Operating environment when using a user-created application A user-created application is used with GT SoftGOT1000. When using a user-created application, therefore, prepare an operating environment where both the user- created application and GT SoftGOT1000 can operate.

(2) Resume function, suspend setting, power saving function, standby mode, and sleep function of the personal computer The following phenomena may occur when the resume function setting, suspend setting, power saving function setting, standby mode setting, and sleep function setting are configured in the personal computer. A communication error occurs when communicating with the PLC CPU. License key becomes unrecognizable. Therefore, do not set the above-mentioned items.

2 - 2 2.1 Operating Environment

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S o

ft G

O T

10 0

0

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

2.2 Specifications

2.2.1 Specifications of the GT SoftGOT1000

The specifications of the GT SoftGOT1000 is shown below.

*1 X and Y are resolution values set by the user.

3.5.1 Environment setup dialog box

POINT

Project data display

(1) Full screen mode If the resolution of the personal computer used is the same as that of GT SoftGOT1000, it is recommended to hide the frame and menu part using the full screen mode function. When not using the full screen mode function, the top/bottom and left/right parts of the display are hidden by the frame and menu part.

(2) GOT type and resolution For the GT SoftGOT1000, set the same resolution as the GOT type of the project data created with GT Designer3. If the resolution settings are different, the project data cannot be read into the GOT.

Virtual drive The GT SoftGOT1000 uses the following folder located on the hard disk of a personal computer as a virtual drive. A virtual drive is created for each module.

Any other folders can be set as the virtual A drive, the virtual B drive, and the virtual E drive. For changing folders for the virtual drives, refer to the following.

3.5 Environment Setup

Item Specifications

Resolution (dots) 640 480, 800 600, 1024 768, 1280 1024, 1600 1200, X Y (Resolution specification)*1

Display color (color) 65536

Memory capacity 57MB

MELSOFT(installation folder)

SGT1000

Multi

00001 Folder for module No.1

Drive Stores a virtual drive

A

E

B

00002 Folder for module No.2

Drive Stores a virtual drive

A

E

B

2.2 Specifications 2 - 3

Resource data storage destination Resource data is stored to the virtual A drive or a user-specified folder with the configuration shown below.

*1 File save destination for each file can be specified in the [File Output (Hard Copy Function)] menu in the Environment Setup

dialog box.

Refer to the following for Environment Setup dialog box.

3.5.1 Environment setup dialog box

The file formats of resource data are described below.

(Continued to next page)

Storage destination Function

Virtual A drive or

user-specified folder

Folder name specified in

project data

Advanced alarm, Alarm history, Logging,

Recipe, Advanced recipe, Report (Print),

Hard copy (File save)*1, Hard copy (Print), Operation log

G1SgtReport Report (Print)

G1SgtHardcopy Hard copy (File save)*1

Hard copy (Print)

Function Folder name File format and file name

Advanced alarm Folder name set in project data

File name set in project data

*****.G1A

File name set in project data

*****.CSV

File name set in project data

*****.TXT

Alarm function Folder name set in project data

File name set in project data

*****.G1H

File name set in project dataa

*****.CSV

Logging Folder name set in project data

File name set in project data

*****.G1L

File name set in project data

*****.CSV

File name set in project data

*****.TXT

Recipe Folder name set in project data File name set in project data

*****.CSV

Advanced recipe Folder name set in project data

File name set in project data

*****.G1P

File name set in project data

*****.CSV

File name set in project data

*****.TXT

Report (Print)*1 G1SgtReport (Fixed) REP00001.CSV - REP00008.CSV

Hard copy (File save)*2

G1SgtHardcopy (Fixed) SNAP0001.BMP - SNAP9999.BMP

SNAP0001.JPG - SNAP9999.JPG

File name set in project data

File name set in project data

*****.BMP

File name set in project data

*****.JPG

Hard copy (Print) G1SgtHardcopy (Fixed) HARDCOPY.BMP (Fixed)

2 - 4 2.2 Specifications

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S o

ft G

O T

10 0

0

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

*1 When using any language other than Japanese and English for the report screen and outputting the data in CSV file, characters

may not be displayed correctly.

Do not use any language other than Japanese and English.

*2 File save destination for each file can be specified in the [File Output (Hard Copy Function)] menu in the Environment Setup

dialog box.

Refer to the following for Environment Setup.

3.5.1 Environment setup dialog box

POINT

Precautions on file names for the virtual drive

As a folder name for the virtual drive, only ASCII characters (excluding |, , and ;) can be used with up to 78 characters. Set the file name with up to 256 characters including the path name for file storage destination and file name to be stored (including extension). Two-byte and one-byte Japanese kana are considered as 2 characters.

2.2.2 License key specifications

To use GT SoftGOT1000, license key is required. License key has the following two types.

Be sure to attach the license key before starting monitoring on GT SoftGOT1000. When starting monitoring without a license key, GT SoftGOT1000 automatically ends in about two hours. Also, from starting monitoring to exiting it, use GT SoftGOT1000 with the license key attached. If the license key is disconnected during monitoring, the GT SoftGOT1000 will exit automatically.

POINT

License key

(1) Before using license key The license key is authentificated by OS as a connected device. Thus, the System Driver (device driver) needs to be installed as other connected devices. As the license key can be accessed via the System Driver, the access to the license key is not allowed when the System Driver is not installed.

(2) License key use target The GT15-SGTKEY-U and GT15-SGTKEY-P are dedicated for GT SoftGOT1000. They cannot be used for GT SoftGOT2.

Function Folder name File format and file name

Operation log function Folder name set in project data

File name set in project data

*****.G1O

File name set in project data

*****.CSV

File name set in project data

*****.TXT

Model name Attachment type

GT15-SGTKEY-U Attached to USB port

GT15-SGTKEY-P Attached to parallel port

2.2 Specifications 2 - 5

2.3 Functions that Cannot Be Used

In GT SoftGOT1000, some functions available in GT16 cannot be used. The following table shows unusable functions.

*1 With the keyboard input function, operations equivalent to the operation panel function can be available.

Function category Function name

Utility functions

GOT setup

GOT main unit

setup

Time setting, Transparent mode,

Clean, Video/RGB setting ,

Multimedia setting, Behavior of duplicate IPs

Display Screen save time, Screen save backlight,

Battery alarm display, Brightness,contrast

Operation

Key sensitivity, Key reaction speed,

Touch panel calibration, Touch detection mode,

USB mouse/keyboard function, SoftGOT-GOT link function

GOT

maintenance

function

Maintenance timing setting, Addtion times reset,

GOT start time, GOT information

Communication setting Communication setting

Ethernet setting

Communication setting Communication setting

Debug Debug

Self check Self check

Data control

Data control Data control

OS/project

information OS/project information

Extension function

System monitor function, Video display function,

RGB display function, Multimedia function,

External I/O function, Operation panel function*1,

Backup/restore function, CNC data I/O function,

CNC manufacturing program editor

function,

Operator authentication

(Fingerprint authentication),

Remote personal computer operation, MELSEC-L troubleshooting function,

Log viewer function, File transfer function (FTP client),

Motion program (SV43) edit, Motion program (SV43) I/O,

VNC server function

Option functions

Ladder monitor function, List editor for MELSEC-A,

List editor for MELSEC-FX, Intelligent module monitor function,

Network monitor function, Q motion monitor function,

Servo amplifier monitor function, CNC monitor function,

Gateway function, MES interface function,

SFC monitor function, Ladder editor function

Motion SFC monitor function

Others FA transparent functions, Human sensor function,

RGB output function

2 - 6 2.3 Functions that Cannot Be Used

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S o

ft G

O T

10 0

0

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

POINT

Utility operability

In GT SoftGOT1000, some functions do not operate even though they can be set. The operability on GT SoftGOT1000 is shown below.

Item Operability on GT

SoftGOT1000

GOT setup

GOT main unit setup

Time setting

Transparent mode -

Clean

Video/RGB setting

Multimedia setting

License management

Behavior of duplicate IPs

Display

Language

Opening screen time

Screen save time -

Screen save backlight -

Battery alarm display -

Brightness, contrast -

Operation

Buzzer volume

Window move buzzer

Security setting

Utility call key

Key sensitivity -

Key reaction speed -

Touch panel calibration -

Touch Detection Mode -

USB mouse/keyboard function -

SoftGOT-GOT link function -

VNC server func. setting -

GOT maintenance function

Maintenance timing setting

Addition times reset

GOT start time

GOT information

Communication setting

Debug

Self check

Data control Data control

Alarm information

Advanced Recipe information

Logging information

Operation log information

Hard copy information

Special data information

Operator information

Fingerprint information

OS/project information

: Operable

: Inoperable

- : Setting is not required on GT SoftGOT1000 (Some

items can be set but do not operate.)

2.3 Functions that Cannot Be Used 2 - 7

2.4 Precautions

2.4.1 Precautions for using the GT Soft GOT1000

Numerical Display When the [View Format] of [Numerical Display] is set to [Real] and if illegal value is stored, illegal value will be displayed on GT Soft GOT1000. (GOT displays [non].)

Time display The clock data of the personal computer is used for clock display when monitoring GT SoftGOT1000. (GOT reads and shows the clock data of the PLC CPU.) When controling a system using clock data, set the same clock data for the PLC CPU and personal computer. GT SoftGOT1000 does not support the daylight saving function. Do not check [Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes] on the personal computer.

GT Soft GOT1000 Versions Be sure to use the GT Soft GOT1000 of the same version as the GT Designer3 that the project data is created. When using different versions of GT SoftGOT1000 and GT Designer3, the file may not be opened, functions/settings may be invalid, or the GT Soft GOT1000 may not work correctly. Refer to the following for the project data compatibility.

Appendix3 Applicable Project Data

Printer to output function

(1) Hard copy output destination Hard copy output destination can be specified on GT Designer3 or GT SoftGOT1000. Settings that are required for each hard copy output destination are shown below.

(a) In the case [Printer] is selected as the output destination on the Hard copy setting screen of GT Designer3.

-: Setting ineffective

Hard copy output Setting at GT SoftGOT1000

File save destination

(Hard copy (File Save)) Printing

[Print to printer

(Hard Copy Function)]

on the Page Setup screen

[File Output

(Hard Copy Function)] on the

Environment Setup screen

Virtual A Drive

(GT1sgHardcopy) Yes Check -

Virtual A Drive

(GT1sgHardcopy) No Uncheck -

2 - 8 2.4 Precautions

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S o

ft G

O T

10 0

0

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(b) In the case [File] is selected as the output destination on the Hard copy setting screen of GT Designer3.

-: Setting ineffective

Refer to the following for hard copy functions.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Refer to the following for Page Setup.

5.2.3 Performing page setup

Refer to the following for Environment Setup.

3.5 Environment Setup

(2) System alarm during hard copying The system alarm will not be displayed during hard copying. Refer to the following for troubleshooting for the hard copy function.

Appendix.2.4 Troubleshooting for print

Appendix.2.5 Troubleshooting for file save problems

(3) Report function Data cannot be output to a printer directly. Print images (in CSV format) are stored to the virtual A drive of a personal computer once. Output these images in each file to a printer.

Functions in which data are stored in the memory card in advance by the user When registering parts of BMP/JPEG files and document display data, store the data to the virtual A drive, the virtual B drive, or the virtual E drive. (The drive to be used depends on the specifications and setting of the object.) For details of each function, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Except for the virtual drive, GT SoftGOT1000 does not recognize BPM/JPEG files and other files.

*1 The folder name can be changed to another name.

Hard copy output Setting at GT SoftGOT1000

File save destination

(Hard copy (File Save)) Printing

[Print to printer

(Hard Copy Function)]

on the Page Setup screen

[File Output

(Hard Copy Function)] on the

Environment Setup screen

Virtual A Drive

(GT1sgHardcopy) No - Select [Default].

The save file destination that

was specified on the Hard copy

setting screen of GT Designer3

No - Select [Project Data Setting].

MELSOFT(installation folder)

SGT1000

Multi

00001

Drive

00002

A

B

PDFDAT DOCIMG Stores the JPEG files for the document display.

Stores the PDF files for the document display. Image Stores BMP or JPEG files.*1

2.4 Precautions 2 - 9

2.4.2 Precautions on license key

When attaching GT15-SGTKEY-U

(1) Installation/uninstallation of the System Driver Before installing or uninstalling the System Driver, disconnect the GT15-SGTKEY-U. When installing the System Driver with the GT15-SGTKEY-U attached, the installation of USB may be failed. When the installation is failed, uninstall the System Driver after disconnecting the GT15-SGTKEY-U, and install it again.

(2) Use of a USB hub Do not use GT15-SGTKEY-U through a USB hub. When using GT15-SGTKEY-U, connect GT15-SGTKEY-U to a personal computerdirectly.

When attaching GT15-SGTKEY-P

(1) Using GT15-SGTKEY-P The GT15-SGTKEY-P can be used only with the parallel port built in a personal computer as standard. It cannot be used with the parallel port added by extension or a converter.

(2) Using GT15-SGTKEY-P with other devices simultaneously The following devices cannot be used at the same port as the GT15-SGTKEY-P. SCSI interface for parallel port Floppy disc drive, hard disc drive, CD-ROM or ZIP drive connected to parallel port Devices that use a data communication method other than the standard network specification, including

parallel port communication type Interlink and Centronics printer interface

(3) Attaching GT15-SGTKEY-P Connect the GT15-SGTKEY-P between the printer switching device and personal computer.

2 - 10 2.4 Precautions

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

o ft

G O

T 1

00 0

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

3. OPERATION OF GT SoftGOT1000

3.1 Start GT SoftGOT1000

Start GT SoftGOT1000.

1. Select [Start]*1 [MELSOFT]*2 [GT Works3] [GT SoftGOT1000] from the menu of Windows to start GT SoftGOT1000.

*1 Select [All Programs] on the [Start] screen, or select [Start] [All Programs].

*2 [MELSOFT Application] appears for a version of GT Works3 earlier than 1.136S.

POINT

(1) Display position when starting up the GT SoftGOT1000 When GT SoftGOT1000 is started, its window is displayed where the last time it was terminated. However, if GT SoftGOT1000 was illegally terminated, the window is displayed where the last time GT SoftGOT1000 was normally closed. Display position is stored for each CPU number of GT SoftGOT1000.

(2) Automatic startup

GT SoftGOT1000 can be started automatically when Windows is started up by using [Online after starting]. For the setting, refer to the following.

3.12 Automatic Startup

3.1 Start GT SoftGOT1000 3 - 1

Precautions for executing other MELSOFT applications while GT SoftGOT1000 is being operated The User Account Control (UAC) has been introduced in Windows 7 or later. Run other MELSOFT applications using the following procedure.

(1) When User Account Control (UAC) is invalid Specifying [Run as administrator] is not required for running a MELSOFT application.

(2) When User Account Control (UAC) is enabled Select [Run as administrator] to execute the program.

1. Select and right-click the application to execute from the start menu of Windows.

2. Select [Run as administrator] to run the application.

Select [Run as administrator] from the right-click context menu.

3 - 2 3.1 Start GT SoftGOT1000

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

o ft

G O

T 1

00 0

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(3) When always running an application as an administrator To always run programs as an administrator, set the following setting.

1. Select and right-click the application to execute from the start menu of Windows.

2. Select [Properties].

3. The properties dialog appears. Select the [Compatibility] tab. Select [Run this program as an administrator] in [Privilege Level].

4. Click the [OK] button to close the dialog. For Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, and Windows 11, right-click a MELSOFT application used with GT SoftGOT1000 and select [Open file location] from the menu.

Select [Properties] from the right-click menu.

Select [Run this program as an administrator].

3.1 Start GT SoftGOT1000 3 - 3

3.2 Screen Configuration of GT SoftGOT1000

This section describes screen configuration.

Item Description

Title Bar

Displays the project name and/or the module number, or the comment set with GT SoftGOT1000 Commander.

Project name and module number

If GT SoftGOT1000 displays the project data for the first time, the title bar displays [***] as the project name.

If the project title is not set for the project data monitored by GT SoftGOT1000, the title bar displays [No title] as the project

name.

Comment set with GT SoftGOT1000 Commander

The title bar displays the comment set with GT SoftGOT1000 Commander. (The line feeds are disabled, and the comment

is displayed in one line.)

If GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the linked GOT for the first time, the title bar displays [***].

If the comment is not set with GT SoftGOT1000 Commander, the title bar displays [No comments (**.**.**.**)].?**.**.**.**

indicates the IP address of the linked GOT.)

To display the project name and/or the module number, or the comment set with GT SoftGOT1000 Commander, make a

selection in the title bar setting in the [Environment Setup] dialog box.

For the details of the title bar setting, refer to the following.

3.5 Environment Setup

Menu Bar

Operate GT SoftGOT1000 by using a drop-down menu.

For the details of the menu bar, refer to the following.

3.3 Menu Bar

Tool Bar

Operate GT SoftGOT1000 by selecting an icon.

For the details of the tool bar, refer to the following.

3.4 Tool Bar

Status Bar Displays the description of a command or icon, and the connection method, the communication port and the baud rate in the

communication setup.

Title Bar

Tool Bar Menu Bar

Status Bar

Dropdown menu

3 - 4 3.2 Screen Configuration of GT SoftGOT1000

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

o ft

G O

T 1

00 0

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

3.3 Menu Bar

This section describes commands assigned to the menu bar.

Project

The Project menu includes options for project data reading, Snap Shot

and printing.

5. FUNCTIONS

View

The View menu includes the functions for switching the toolbar, menu

bar, and scroll bar between display and nondisplay states. The menu

includes the functions for switching the full screen mode and back

screen mode between enabled and disabled states.

5. FUNCTIONS

Set

The Set menu includes the functions for setting the environment, mail,

application start-up, and PX Developer. The menu includes the

functions for switching the keyboard input, monitor-only mode, popup

menu, close menu, and exit key between enabled and disabled states.

5. FUNCTIONS

Online

The Online menu includes functions for setting monitor start/stop,

starting in online mode enable/disable switching, communication error

dialog display/non-display and communications.

3. OPERATION OF GT SoftGOT1000

3.3 Menu Bar 3 - 5

Tool

The Tool menu includes the function of displaying resource data, file

information in the PLC, GOT project data acquisition, and error

information.

5. FUNCTIONS

Window

The Window menu includes the functions for cascading, minimizing, or

moving windows.

5. FUNCTIONS

Help

The Help menu includes functions of viewing the PDF manual related

to the GT SoftGOT1000 and checking the software version.

3.13 Help

3 - 6 3.3 Menu Bar

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

o ft

G O

T 1

00 0

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

3.4 Tool Bar

This section describes the tool bar.

Name Description

Open a Project Opens the project data created with GT Designer3.

Open a File Opens a single file format project (*.GTW) of GT Designer3 or the GT Designer2 file (*.GTE).

Monitor Start Starts monitoring.

Monitor Stop Stops monitoring.

Resource Data Displays resource data.

Environment Setup Performs environment settings for GT SoftGOT1000.

Communication Setup Performs communication settings for GT SoftGOT1000.

Mail Setup Performs mail settings such as dial-up, send address.

Mail Condition Disables the mail send setting of the project data.

Mail History Displays the operation history of mail sendings.

Application Start-up Setting Allows settings for starting up applications from GT SoftGOT1000.

Application Start-up History Shows operation histories of application start-up.

PX Developer Function Call Setting Performs the PX Developer call settings.

PX Developer Function Call Sub-

Setting Performs the PX Developer call sub-settings.

PX Developer Function Call History Shows operation histories at calling monitor tool functions for in PX Developer.

Keyboard Switches keyboard input enable/disable.

3.4 Tool Bar 3 - 7

3.5 Environment Setup

In Environment Setup, set the resolution, etc. of GT SoftGOT1000.

1. Perform either of the following operations.

Clicking (Environment Setup) Selecting [Set] [Environment Setup] from the menu Right-clicking the mouse to select [Environment Setup] from the menu

2. The Environment Setup dialog box is displayed. Set each item and click the button.

3.5.1 Environment setup dialog box

Action Setup tab

(Continued to next page)

Item Description

Resolution

Select the screen size (resolution: dots) to be monitored.

"640 480", "800 600", "1024 768", "1280 1024", "1600 1200", "X Y"

Set the resolution dot by dot when selecting [X Y].

X: Set the horizontal size (X axis). (1920 dots to 640 dots)

Y: Set the vertical size (Y axis). (1200 dots to 480 dots)

OK

3 - 8 3.5 Environment Setup

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

o ft

G O

T 1

00 0

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Item Description

Font

Font Control

Select a font language used for monitoring.

When selecting Japanese (supporting Europe) or Chinese (Simplified) (supporting Europe), Latin characters are

displayed in one-byte characters.

Japanese: Japanese characters are displayed.

Japanese (supporting Europe): Japanese characters supporting European characters are displayed.

Chinese (Simplified): Simplified Chinese characters are displayed.

Chinese (Simplified) (supporting Europe): Simplified Chinese characters supporting European characters are

displayed.

Chinese(Traditional) (supporting Europe): Traditional Chinese characters supporting European characters are

displayed.

16dot Standard

Font

Select the font type of 16dot standard font.

[Gothic], [Mincho]

TrueType Numerical

Font

Select a font type of the TrueType numerical font.

[Gothic], [7-Segment]

Use Japanese

optional font

This item is available only when selecting Chinese (Simplified) or Chinese (Simplified) (supporting Europe) for Font

Control.

Do not check this item normally (when displaying in Chinese (Simplified) characters).

When checking this item, objects without Kanji region setting will be displayed in Japanese.

Authentication

Select password authentication or operator authentication.

[Password], [Operator]

Select the same authentication method set in [System Environment] of GT Designer3.

File Output (Hard Copy Function)

Select the output destination for the hard copy file.

Default : Stores files in the virtual A drive (G1SgtHardcopy).

Refer to the following for G1SgtHardcopy.

2.2.1 Resource data storage destination

[Project Data Setting] : Stores files in the file output destination specified on the [Project Data Setting]

screen.

3.5 Environment Setup 3 - 9

Drive Setup tab

(Continued to next page)

Item Description

Virtual A Drive*1

Set a folder in the hard disc drive as the virtual A drive, which is used as the A drive environment of the GOT main

unit.

Default : Stores resource data in the virtual A drive.

Refer to the following for virtual A drive.

2.2.1 Virtual drive

Fixed : Stores resource data in the folder specified by the user.

Select this item when storing resource data to a desired folder.

Clicking the button displays the Browse For Folder dialog.

Select a folder to which resource data is stored.

Virtual B Drive*1

Set a folder in the hard disc drive as the virtual B drive, which is used as the B drive environment of the GOT main

unit.

Default : Stores resource data in the virtual B drive.

Refer to the following for virtual B drive.

2.2.1 Virtual drive

Fixed : Stores resource data in the folder specified by the user.

Select this item when storing resource data to a desired folder.

Clicking the button displays the Browse For Folder dialog.

Select a folder to which resource data is stored.

Browse

Browse

3 - 10 3.5 Environment Setup

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

o ft

G O

T 1

00 0

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

*1 For specifying a virtual drive, do not specify the same folder set as the other virtual drive or virtual drives for other GT

SoftGOT1000.

Doing so may cause malfunctions.

Item Description

Virtual E Drive*1

Set a folder in the hard disc drive as the virtual E drive, which is used as the E drive environment of the GOT main

unit.

Default : Stores resource data in the virtual E drive.

Refer to the following for virtual E drive.

2.2.1 Virtual drive

Fixed: : Stores resource data in the folder specified by the user.

Select this item when storing resource data to a desired folder.

Clicking the button displays the Browse For Folder dialog.

Select a folder to which resource data is stored.

Browse

3.5 Environment Setup 3 - 11

Auxiliary Setup tab

(Continued to next page)

Item Description

Window Move Method

Select the window moving method used when the title bar is not displayed, for example, in the full screen display

function.

Refer to 5.9 for details of window movement.

[Mouse] :Move the mouse to move GT SoftGOT1000 for window movement.

Click the mouse to determine the position.

[Move Dialog] :The Move window dialog box is displayed for window movement, and clicking the up,

down, left or right button moves GT SoftGOT1000 on a 10-dot basis.

A window can also be moved on a panel computer that cannot use a mouse.

Title Bar

Select the data to be displayed on the title bar.

[Default] :Select this item to display the project name and the module number. After the selection, select

items to be displayed.

[Set the comment of GT SoftGOT1000 Commander for the title]

:Select this item to display the comment set with GT SoftGOT1000 Commander.

For how to set the comment, refer to the following.

5.21.5 Management of GT SoftGOT1000 modules with the SoftGOT-GOT link function (GT

SoftGOT1000 Commander)

Delete all resource data after

reading project data.

Check this item to delete all resource data in the A/B drive when completing project data reading.

3 - 12 3.5 Environment Setup

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

o ft

G O

T 1

00 0

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

For details of *1, refer to the following.

*1 Display Screen Size (Full Screen Mode)

When [Display Screen Size (Full Screen Mode)] is set to a smaller size than the size set for [Resolution] in the Environment Setup dialog box, the user can simultaneously use the full-screen GT SoftGOT1000 and other applications.

Displaying the scroll bars enables GT SoftGOT1000 to display the hidden part of the monitor screen.

( 5.19 Scroll Function)

POINT

Screen size in full screen mode

For selecting [User Setting] for [Display Screen Size (Full Screen Mode), [Width] and [Height] can be set with GOT internal devices (Width: GS503, Height: GS504). Input values into the corresponding GOT internal devices, and the screen size changes. For GOT internal devices, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Item Description

Display dialog when changing to

full screen mode. Check this item to display the confirmation dialog box when full screen changes are carried out.

Display dialog when changing to

back screen mode. Check this item to display the confirmation dialog box when the screen is displayed behind the other screens.

Display dialog when disabling

popup menu. Check this item to display the confirmation dialog box when disabling popup menu.

Display a splash when starting GT

SoftGOT1000. Check the item to display the splash screen when GT SoftGOT1000 starts.

Display dialog when starting GT

SoftGOT1000, specified with the

module that has been activated.

Check this item to display the attention dialog box when restarting GT SoftGOT1000 module that has been

activated.

Display dialog when closing GT

SoftGOT1000. Check this item to display the confirmation dialog box when ending GT SoftGOT1000.

Terminate GT SoftGOT1000 when

shutting down Windows. Check this item to end GT SoftGOT1000 as well as logging off or ending Windows.

Display dialog when using GOT

Link. Select this item to display the confirmation dialog box when synchronizing project data by the GOT.

Display dialog at the start of

monitoring in the monitor-only

mode.

Select this item to display the confirmation dialog box at the start of monitoring in the monitor-only mode.

When the sizes set for [Resolution] and

[Display Screen Size (Full Screen Mode)] are the same

[Resolution] : 1280 1024

[Display Screen Size (Full Screen Mode)] : 1280 1024

When [Display Screen Size (Full Screen Mode)] is

set to a smaller size than the size set for [Resolution]

[Resolution] : 1280 1024

[Display Screen Size (Full Screen Mode)] : 1280 512

3.5 Environment Setup 3 - 13

3.6 Communication Setup

In Communication Setup, set the type of the PLC CPU to be connected, the communication time-out period, etc.

1. Perform either of the following operations.

Clicking (Communication Setup) Select [Online] [Communication Setup] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Communication Setup] from the menu.

2. The Communication Setup dialog box is displayed. Set each item and click the button.

POINT

Communication Setup

Make Communication Setup before starting monitoring. After start of monitoring on GT SoftGOT1000, Communication Setup cannot be changed. (The "Communication Error Dialog" setting can be changed during monitoring.)

OK

3 - 14 3.6 Communication Setup

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

o ft

G O

T 1

00 0

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Connection Setup tab

(Continued to next page)

Item Description

Connection

Set the connection method between GT SoftGOT1000 and a controller.

Connection

type

Select the connection type of GT SoftGOT1000.

CPU : Select this option for direct connection to CPU via the RS-232 cable.

USB : Select this option for direct connection to CPU via the USB cable.

C24 : Select this option when computer link connection is used.

NET/H : Select this option when using the MELSECNET/H interface board.

Select [NET/H] when using the GT SoftGOT1000 in MELSECNET/10 mode.

CC IE Control : Select this option when using the CC-Link IE Controller Network interface board.

CC IE Field : Select this option when using the CC-Link IE Field Network interface board.

Ethernet : Select this option when Ethernet connection is used.

BUS : Select [BUS] when the bus connection is used.

Controller

type*1

If [CPU]/[USB]/[C24]/[NET/H]/[CC IE Control]/[CC IE Field]/[Ethernet] is selected as the [connection

method], specify the connection destination.

When [CPU]/[USB] is selected : Selects the type of CPU to be connected.

When [C24] is selected : Selects the type of computer link module or serial communication module

to be connected.

When [NET/H]/[CC IE Control]/[CC IE Field] is selected

: Select the interface board mounted on the personal computer to be used.

When [Ethernet] is selected : Select the model of a programmable controller to be connected.

Click this button to display the [GOT Link Setup] dialog box.

Clicking this button is available only when selecting [Ethernet] and [MELSEC]/[OMRON SYSMAC]/[GOT] for [Connection].

GOT Link Setup dialog box

Connection type

Controller type

3.6 Communication Setup 3 - 15

(Continued to next page)

Item Description

CPU/C24

Set this item when selecting [CPU] or [C24] for [Connection].

Comm. port Choose the communication port on the personal computer side.

COM1 to COM6

Baud rate

Set the transmission speed to/from the CPU.

Set the baud rate to be used.

When connecting a QnA/A series computer link, set the same baud rate as the one set in the computer link

or serial communication module to be used.

For connection with the FXCPU, select the baud rate supported by the connected FXCPU.

When the set baud rate is not supported, communication is made at 9.6kbps.

When selecting a transmission speed that is not supported by OMRON SYSMAC, a communication error

occurs.

Timeout

Set the timeout period and retry count.

Depending on the settings on the [Connection] menu, some items cannot be set.

Host Set the timeout period for host monitor.

"3" to "90" (seconds)

Other

Set the timeout period for other station monitor.

According to the item selected in [Connection], the setting range varies.

When [Ethernet] and [MELSEC] are selected: 1 to 90 (seconds)

Other than the above: 3 to 90 (seconds)

Retry Set the number of retries.

"0" to "10" (times)

CC IE Control/CC IE

Field

Set this item when selecting [CC IE Control] or [CC IE Field] for [Connection].

Monitor Speed Set the monitor speed for CC-Link IE Controller Network or CC-Link IE Field Network.

[High], [Normal], [Low]

Ethernet

Set this item when selecting [Ethernet] for [Connection].

NET No.

Set the network number of GT SoftGOT1000.

When [MELSEC]/[YASKAWA]/[YOKOGAWA]/[TOSHIBA nv]/[SIEMENS S7]/[SIEMENS OP]/[KEYENCE

KV]/[MODBUS/TCP] is selected: 1 to 239

When [OMRON SYSMAC] is selected: 1 to 127

When [GOT] is selected: Not necessary

PC No.

Set the station number of GT SoftGOT1000.

The station number must be different from the PLC No. of the Ethernet module to be monitored.

When [MELSEC] is selected: 1 to 120

When [YASKAWA]/[YOKOGAWA] is selected: 1 to 64

When [OMRON SYSMAC]/[TOSHIBA nv]/[SIEMENS S7]/[SIEMENS OP]/[KEYENCE KV] is selected: 1 to

254

When [MODBUS/TCP] is selected: 1 to 247

When [GOT] is selected: Not necessary

Port No.*2

Set the port number of GT SoftGOT1000.

When [MELSEC] is selected: 1024 to 65535

When [OMRON SYSMAC]/[YASKAWA]/[YOKOGAWA]/[TOSHIBA nv]/[SIEMENS S7]/[SIEMENS OP]/

[KEYENCE KV]/[MODBUS/TCP] is selected: 1024 to 65534 (excluding 5011, 5012, 5013, 49153)

When [GOT] is selected: Not necessary (Automatically detected)

Wait Time Set the transmission wait time to reduce the load on the network and target PLC.

"0" to "10000" (x 10 ms)

Option

Set this item when selecting [CPU] and [YASKAWA] for [Connection].

Host Add.

Specify the host address (the station number of a programmable controller to which connects GT

SoftGOT1000) within the connection network.

[1] to [31]

Wait Time Set the transmission time to reduce the loads of a network and a target programmable controller.

[0] to [30] (x 10ms)

32bit Storage

Select the storage order of 32-bit data.

Low High : The GOT writes data into controller devices in order of data from lower 16 bits to upper 16

bits.

High Low : The GOT writes data into controller devices in order of data from upper 16 bits to lower 16

bits.

Communication Error

Dialog Select this item to display the error dialog box on GT SoftGOT1000 when a communication error occurs.

3 - 16 3.6 Communication Setup

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

o ft

G O

T 1

00 0

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

*1 For using the CNC C70, select [MELSEC-Q].

For using the LJ72GF15-T2, select [MELSEC-L].

*2 For communication via the Ethernet port of the QnUD(V/EH)CPU, the port No. is automatically specified, regadless of the setting.

POINT

Precautions for using device entry mode (When the MELSEC-FX connection)

The precautions for applying the device entry mode are described below. Apply the device entry mode after the adequate debugging.

(1) Devices that can be set An error (Communication time out) may occur if the following device (Bit device) is set. For the device as objects, set other than the devices shown below when applying the device entry mode.

(2) When using the offset function When offset function is applied, the device range above may be monitored during an unintended moment and an error (Communication time out) may occur. Create the project data so that any offset will not operate for the devices above.

(3) Measures for errors The error mentioned by (1) and (2) is displayed in the system alarm. When applying the device entry mode, it is recommended to set system alarm to the project data.

Item Description

Communication Effective

Mode

Select this item to perform efficient readout of PLC devices data with GT SoftGOT1000.

The communication performance may not improve depending on the usage environment and the setting of the project data.

If the communication performance may not improve in the communication effective mode, it is already optimized in the

condition where the communication effective mode is not used, and therefore do not use this function.

This setting is available only when [Ethernet]-[MELSEC]/[GOT] is selected.

Device Entry Mode

Select this item to enable high-speed monitoring on GT SoftGOT1000.

When using the Device Entry Mode during FXCPU connection, the range of devices to be monitored may be restricted, and

monitoring may not be performed properly.

This setting is available only when selecting [CPU] and [MELSEC-Q]/[MELSEC-L]/[MELSEC-FX], or [USB] and [MELSEC-

Q]/[MELSEC-L]]/[MELSEC-FX] for [Connection].

Type of connected CPU Device name (Bit device) Device range

FX0(S) series

FX0N series

Counter contact (C) C224 to C239

C240 to C255

Special auxiliary relay (M) M8240 to M8255

FX1 series

Timer contact (T) T240 to T255

Counter contact (C)

C128 to C143

C224 to C239

C240 to C255

FX1S series Counter contact (C) C224 to C239

FX1N series Counter contact (C) C192 to C207

FX2(C) series Counter contact (C) C192 to C207

FX2N(C) series Counter contact (C) C192 to C207

FX3U(C) series Counter contact (C) C192 to C207

FX3G(C) series Counter contact (C) C192 to C207

FX3S Counter contact (C) C192 to C207

3.6 Communication Setup 3 - 17

(1) GOT Link Setup dialog box

Item Description

Use GOT Link

Select this item to use the SoftGOT-GOT link function.

For the SoftGOT-GOT link function, refer to the following.

5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function

Destination GOT IP Address Set the IP address of the GOT.

Click the [Communication Test] button to execute the communication test with the GOT.

Destination GOT Port No. Set the port No. of the GOT.

Project Data Upload Password

The password setting when reading project data from the GOT is available. (Up to 8 one-byte

alphanumeric characters can be set for a password.)

With the password setting, an authentication is automatically executed when reading project data from the

GOT.

Communication method Set the communication method.

This setting is available only when [Ethernet]-[GOT] is selected.

3 - 18 3.6 Communication Setup

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

o ft

G O

T 1

00 0

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Barcode Reader SetUp tab Set those items when executing the barcode reader connection. For details of the barcode reader connection, refer to the following.

4.16 Barcode Reader Connection

Item Description

Use Bar Code Select this item to use the barcode reader connection.

Comm. Port

Choose the communication port on the personal computer side. (COM1 to COM16)

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules using barcode reader connection are started, specify a different

communication port for each GT SoftGOT1000 module.

Baud Rate Select the transmission speed. (4.8Kbps/9.6Kbps/19.2Kbps/38.4Kbps/57.6Kbps/115.2Kbps)

Data Bit Select the data length. (7bit/8bit)

Stop Bit Select the stop bit length. (1bit/2bit)

Parity Select the type to check parity. (None/Even/Odd)

3.6 Communication Setup 3 - 19

RFID SetUp tab Set those items when executing the RFID connection. For details of the RFID connection, refer to the following.

4.17 RFID Connection

Item Description

Use RFID Select this item to use the RFID connection.

Comm. Port

Choose the communication port on the personal computer side. (COM1 to COM16)

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules using RFID connection are started, specify a different

communication port for each GT SoftGOT1000 module.

Baud Rate Select the transmission speed. (4.8Kbps/9.6Kbps/19.2Kbps/38.4Kbps/57.6Kbps/115.2Kbps)

Data Bit Select the data length. (7bit/8bit)

Stop Bit Select the stop bit length. (1bit/2bit)

Parity Select the type to check parity. (None/Even/Odd)

Sum Check Select whether to perform sum check. (Done/None)

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs.

When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (0 to 5 times)

Time Out Set the time required for communication to time out. (3 to 30sec)

Delay Time Set the delay time to lower the load of the network/connected PLC. (0 to 3000ms)

Format

Select the communication format. (10/11/12/15)

Format10: Dedicated protocol (LSRF manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.)

Format11: Dedicated protocol (ICU-60S manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE Corp.)

Format12: Dedicated protocol (ICU-215 (Mifare) manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCECorp.)

Format15: Nonprocedural protocol

3 - 20 3.6 Communication Setup

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

o ft

G O

T 1

00 0

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

3.7 Opening the Project

Set a project and start monitoring the project. A GT Designer3 project, a single file format project, or a GT Designer2 file can be set. GT Designer3 project Project data created with GT Designer3 A single file format project (*.GTW) of GT Designer3 Compressed project data created with GT Designer3 GT Designer2 file (*.GTE) Project data created with GT Designer2

3.7.1 Open the GT Designer3 Project

1. Perform either of the following operations.

Click (Open a Project). Select [Project] [Open] [Open a Project.] from the menu. Right-click the mouse and select [Open] [Open a Project.] from the menu.

2. Open a project dialog box is displayed. Set up the following items and click the button.

Item Description

Folder path to save

Enter the path of the location where the workspace is stored.

The save destination path can be set by the [Browse] button also.

Up to 200 characters can be entered.

Workspace/Project List

Displays the workspace or project existing in the same path entered for [Folder path to save].

Double-click the workspace to be opened to display projects stored in the workspace.

Select the project to be opened.

Workspace Name Displays the workspace name where the project selected in [Workspace/Project List] is stored.

Project Name Displays the project name selected in [Workspace/Project List].

Open

3.7 Opening the Project 3 - 21

3. Confirmation dialog box is displayed. (The dialogue box is not displayed if GT SoftGOT1000 is already in online mode.)

4. Selecting starts monitoring of the project monitored previously. (Displays the Utility when opening a project for the first time.) Turn off the power supply to the PLC or disconnect the communication cable that connects the personal computer and PLC in advance if it is not desired to go into online mode with the previous project data or if it is desired to open a project in off-line mode.

Yes

3 - 22 3.7 Opening the Project

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

o ft

G O

T 1

00 0

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

3.7.2 Open a single file format project of GT Designer3/GT Designer2 file

1. Perform either of the following operations.

Click (Open a File). Select [Project] [Open] [Open a File] from the menu. Right-click the mouse and select [Open] [Open a File] from the menu.

2. The Open a file. dialog box is displayed. Set up the following items and click the button.

Item Description

Look in Selects the area where the project data is saved.

File name Sets project data name for monitoring.

Files of type

Selects a file format of the project data.

GT Designer3 file(*.GTW): GTW format

GT Designer2 file(*.GTE): GTE format

Open

3.7 Opening the Project 3 - 23

3. Confirmation dialog box is displayed. (The dialogue box is not displayed if GT SoftGOT1000 is already in online mode.)

4. Selecting starts monitoring of the project monitored previously. (Displays the Utility when opening a project for the first time.) Turn off the power supply to the PLC or disconnect the communication cable that connects the personal computer and PLC in advance if it is not desired to go into online mode with the previous project data or if it is desired to open a project in off-line mode.

Yes

3 - 24 3.7 Opening the Project

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

o ft

G O

T 1

00 0

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

3.8 Starting Monitoring

This section describes how to perform monitoring with the project data monitored previously.

1. Perform either of the following operations.

Click (Monitor Start) Select [Online] [Monitor Start] from the menu. Right-click the mouse and select [Monitor Start] from the menu.

2. Monitoring is started with the project data monitored previously.

POINT

Before monitoring

The following shows the procedure used when not starting monitoring with the project data monitored previously.

(1) When performing a monitoring for the first time Select [Project] [Open] and set a project data to be monitored.

3.7 Opening the Project When performing a monitoring for the first time, performing the operation shown in this section causes GT SoftGOT1000 to display the Utility.

(2) When project data has been changed after previous monitoring Select [Project] [Open] and set the project data to be monitored before starting monitoring.

3.7 Opening the Project

3.8 Starting Monitoring 3 - 25

3.9 Monitoring Operation

On GT SoftGOT1000, touching the touch keys is performed by pressing the mouse button. As the input range of the touch key is narrower than that of the GOT, confirm the input with the buzzer sound after inputting.

3.10 Monitor Stop

This section describes how to stop a monitoring.

1. Perform either of the following operations.

Click (Monitor Stop). Select [Online] [Monitor Stop] from the menu. Right-click the mouse and select [Monitor Stop] from the menu.

2. The monitoring stops.

Select either method.

[Tool bar]

3 - 26 3.9 Monitoring Operation

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

o ft

G O

T 1

00 0

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

3.11 Exiting from GT SoftGOT1000

This section describes how to exit from GT SoftGOT1000.

1. Perform either of the following operations. Select [Project] [Exit] from the menu.

Click the on the tool bar.

Right-click the mouse and select [Exit] from the menu.

2. GT SoftGOT1000 is exited.

POINT

Exiting with GOT internal device

Turn ON the GOT internal device (system data area of GT SoftGOT1000: GS500.b0) to exit from GT SoftGOT1000. Presetting the above device as a touch key enables to exit from GT SoftGOT1000 without selecting the menu. (GT SoftGOT1000 may not be terminated if device ON time is too short. Keep the device ON until GT SoftGOT1000 is terminated.) For details of the GOT internal device, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Select either method.

3.11 Exiting from GT SoftGOT1000 3 - 27

3.12 Automatic Startup

The following explains how to start up GT SoftGOT1000 automatically when Windows is started up by using [Online after starting].

POINT

Before automatic startup

Make sure that the power supply to the connected PLC CPU is turned on before starting up Windows when performing automatic startup.

3.12.1 Automatic startup settings on Windows(R) 7, Windows(R) 8, Windows(R) 8.1, Windows(R) 10, or Windows(R) 11

Configure the automatic startup settings using [Task Scheduler] of Windows.

1. After starting up GT SoftGOT1000, the project data for which the monitoring should be automatically started up is read out and monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

2. Choose any of the following. [Online] -> [Startup in Online Mode] [Startup in Online Mode] by right-clicking the mouse

3. Close GT SoftGOT1000.

4. On Windows 7, select [Start] [All Programs] [Accessories] [System Tools] [Task Scheduler]. On Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select [Search] in the charm bar and enter "task". Select [Task Scheduler] from the search results. On Windows 10, enter "task" in the search box shown on the right of the start menu icon to perform a search. Select [Task Scheduler] from the search results. On Windows 11, select the search icon on the taskbar and enter "task" to perform a search. Select [Task Scheduler] from the search results.

5. Select [Create Task] from [Actions] in [Task Scheduler].

6. On the [General] tab, configure the following settings. Set a name for [Name]. Select [Run with highest privileges]. Select the used OS for [Configure for].

7. On the [Triggers] tab, click the [New] button and configure the following settings. Select [At log on] for [Begin the task].

For only Winodws8 or later, select [Delay task for], and set [30 seconds]. (According to the personal computer environment, set the optimum time.)

Select [Enabled].

8. On the [Actions] tab, click [New] button and configure the following settings. Select [Start a program] for [Action]. Specify the executable file of GT SoftGOT1000 for [Program/script].

(Default: C:\Program Files\MELSOFT\SGT1000\SGT1000.exe) To start a GT SoftGOT1000 module by specifying the module number, enter the keyword for the module in [Add

arguments (optional)]. For the keyword for the module number, refer to the following.

5.10.1 Startup procedure

3 - 28 3.12 Automatic Startup

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

o ft

G O

T 1

00 0

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

9. On the [Settings] tab, configure the following settings. Set [If the task fails, restart every] as needed. Change the setting of [Stop the task if it runs longer than] as needed. (Default: 3 days)

10.Click the [OK] button to complete the settings.

3.12 Automatic Startup 3 - 29

3.13 Help

Using Help allows viewing of the GT SoftGOT1000 related PDF manuals and the software version check.

POINT

Before viewing the PDF manual

To view the PDF manual, GT_Manual3 and Adobe Reader must be installed.

Operating method

1. Click an item within [Help].

Viewing a PDF manual (When [Index] is selected)

1. After operation in [Help]->[Index], the following screen appears. Click the manual to be viewed.

* The illustration above is given as an example and different from the actual page.

2. The selected manual is displayed. (For details of the Adobe Reader operating method, refer to Help of Adobe

Reader.)

* The illustration above is given as an example and different from the actual page.

Item Description

Index Displays the PDF manual list.

Connection to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global

Website... Connects to the MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website.

About GT SoftGOT1000... Used to check the GT SoftGOT1000 version.

Click.

Switches the current display

to the page of the selected

section.

Returns to INDEX MENU.

3 - 30 3.13 Help

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

o ft

G O

T 1

00 0

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Confirming GT SoftGOT1000 version (When [About GT SoftGOT1000...] is selected)

1. After operation in [Help]->[About GT SoftGOT1000...], the screen about GT SoftGOT1000 is displayed.

(Example: For Version 3.40S)

Item Description

GT SoftGOT1000 Displays GT SoftGOT1000 version.

Name Displays the name entered during GT SoftGOT1000 installation.

Company Displays the company name entered during GT SoftGOT1000 installation.

Closes the About GT SoftGOT1000 screen.OK

3.13 Help 3 - 31

3 - 32 3.13 Help

CONNECTION BETWEEN GT SoftGOT1000 AND DEVICES

4. CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4. CONNECTION

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

4.1.1 Controller that allows monitoring

The controllers that can be monitored by the GT SoftGOT1000 are indicated below.

(1) MELSEC PLC

(Continued to next page)

Item Type

RCPU

R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU,

R08PCPU, R16PCPU, R32PCPU, R120PCPU,

R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, R120SFCPU,

R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU

QCPU QCPU(Q mode)

Q00JCPU, Q00CPU*1, Q01CPU*1, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU,

Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU,

Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU, Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU, Q00UJCPU*1,

Q00UCPU*1, Q01UCPU*1, Q02UCPU*1, Q03UDCPU*1, Q04UDHCPU*1,

Q06UDHCPU*1, Q10UDHCPU*1, Q13UDHCPU*1, Q20UDHCPU*1, Q26UDHCPU*1,

Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,

Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU,

Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU

QCPU(A mode) Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, Q06HCPU-A

C controller MELSEC iQ-R series R12CCPU-V

Q series Q12DCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-VG, Q24DHCCPU-LS, Q26DHCCPU-LS

QSCPU QS001CPU

LCPU L02CPU, L06CPU, L26CPU, L26CPU-BT, L02CPU-P,

L06CPU-P, L26CPU-P, L26CPU-PBT, L02SCPU, L02SCPU-P

QnACPU QnACPU Type Q2ACPU, Q2ACPU-S1, Q3ACPU, Q4ACPU, Q4ARCPU

QnASCPU Type Q2ASCPU, Q2ASCPU-S1, Q2ASHCPU, Q2ASHCPU-S1

ACPU

AnCPU

Type

AnUCPU A2UCPU, A2UCPU-S1, A3UCPU, A4UCPU

AnACPU A2ACPU, A2ACPUP21, A2ACPUR21, A2ACPU-S1, A2ACPUP21-S1,

A2ACPUR21-S1, A3ACPU, A3ACPUP21, A3ACPUR21

AnNCPU

A1NCPU, A1NCPUP21, A1NCPUR21, A2NCPU, A2NCPUP21,

A2NCPUR21, A2NCPU-S1, A2NCPUP21-S1, A2NCPUR21-S1, A3NCPU,

A3NCPUP21, A3NCPUR21

AnSCPU

Type

AnUS(H)CPU A2USCPU, A2USCPU-S1, A2USHCPU-S1

AnS(H)CPU A1SCPU, A1SHCPU, A2SCPU, A2SCPU-S1, A2SHCPU,

A2SHCPU-S1, A1SCPUC24-R2

A1SJ(H)CPU A1SJCPU, A1SJCPU-S3, A1SJHCPU

A1FXCPU A1FXCPU

A0J2HCPU, A0J2HCPU-DC24, A0J2HCPUP21, A0J2HCPUR21, A2CCPU,

A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF, A2CCPUP21, A2CCPUR21, A2CJCPU,

A2CJCPU-S3

MELSEC iQ-F FX5U, FX5UC

FXCPU

FX0 Series, FX0S Series, FX0N Series,

FX1 Series, FX1S Series, FX1N Series, FX1NC Series,

FX2 Series, FX2C Series, FX2N Series, FX2NC Series,

FX3G Series, FX3GC Series, FX3U Series, FX3UC Series, FX3S Series

MELSECNET/H remote I/O station QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72BR15

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 1

*1 The serial communication function is not supported.

(2) Other PLC

(3) CNC

(4) Robot controller

(5) Barcode reader

Item Type

CC-Link IE Field Network head module LJ72GF15-T2

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB

Motion

controller

CPU

MELSEC iQ-R Series R16MTCPU, R32MTCPU

Q Series Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU, Q170MSCPU-S1

A Series A273UHCPU, A273UHCPU-S3,

A171SHCPU, A172SHCPU, A173UHCPU, A173UHCPU-S1

Item Type

OMRON PLC

SYSMAC CQM1H CQM1H

SYSMAC CJ1 CJ1H, CJ1G, CJ1M

SYSMAC CJ2 CJ2H(-EIP), CJ2M

SYSMAC CPM CPM2A

SYSMAC CP1 CP1E

SYSMAC C200HX, C200HG C200HE

SYSMAC CS1 CS1H, CS1G, CS1D

SYSMAC CVM1/CV CV500, CV1000, CV2000

CVM1-CPU01, CVM1-CPU11, CVM1-CPU21,

CQM1

KEYENCE PLC KV-700, KV-1000, KV-3000, KV-5000, KV-5500

TOSHIBA

PLC

Unified Controller nv

series type1 Controller (PU811)

YASKAWA PLC

GL60S, GL60H, GL70H, GL120, GL130,

CP-9300MS, MP-920, MP-930, MP-940,

CP-9200(H), PROGIC-8, MP2200, MP2300, MP2300S,

CP-317

YOKOGAWA

PLC

FA-M3

F3SP05, F3SP08, F3FP36, F3SP21, F3SP25,

F3SP35, F3SP28, F3SP38, F3SP53, F3SP58,

F3SP59, F3SP66, F3SP67, F3SP71-4N

FA-M3V F3SP71-4N, F3SP71-4S, F3SP76-7S

SIEMENS PLC SIMATIC S7-300, SIMATIC S7-400

Item Type

CNC C70 Q173NCCPU

MELDAS C6/C64 FCA C6, FCA C64

Item Type

Robot controller CRnQ-700, CR750-Q, CR751-Q, CRnD-700, CR750-D,

CR751-D

Item Type

Barcode reader

For connectable barcode readers and system equipment, refer to the following Technical News.

List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series (GOT-A-0010)

For Technical News, contact your local distributor.

4 - 2 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(6) RFID controller

4.1.2 Monitorable controllers

: Applicable : Inapplicable

(Continued to next page)

Item Type

RFID controller

For connectable RFID controllers and system equipment, refer to the following Technical bulletin.

List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series (GOT-A-0010)

For Technical News, contact your local distributor.

Controller monitored Bus

connection

CPU direct

connection Computer

link

connection

Ethernet

connection

MODBUS

connection

MELSECNET

connection CC-Link

IE

Controller

CC-Link

IE Field RS-232 USB RTU TCP

MELSEC

NET/H

MELSEC

NET/10

RCPU *18*30 *31 *32

LCPU *22

QCPU

(Q mode)

Other than

redundant

system*12

*16 *17 *15 *18 *3 *3 *25

Redundant

system

(Main base unit)

*2*3*14 *2*3

Redundant

system (Extension

base unit)

QCPU (A mode)

C

controller

MELSEC iQ-R

series *29

Q series

QSCPU

QnACPU *4 *4

ACPU

Other than

A1FXCPU *9 *5*13 *6 *6

A1FXCPU

MELSEC iQ-F

FXCPU *10 *20

Motion

controller

CPU

MELSEC iQ-R

series

Q series*19

A series*1 *7*8 *8*13 *8 *8

MELSECNET/H remote

I/O station *3

CC-Link IE Field Network head

module

CC-Link IE Field Network

Ethernet adapter module*23

OMRON PLC *28 *21*27

KEYENCE PLC

TOSHIBA PLC

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 3

*1 The motion controller (A series) cannot be connected to the remote I/O station, regardless of the connection method.

*2 Use a MELSECNET/H interface board driver (SW0DNC-MNETH-B) with the version K or later.

*3 Use a PLC CPU or MELSECNET/H network module of function version B or later.

*4 If an A series computer link module/Ethernet module is used for QnACPU, monitoring is not possible with the GT SoftGOT.

*5 The A0J2-C214-S3, A2CCPU and A2CJCPU do not allow computer link connection.

*6 The A2CCPUC24(-PRF), A2CCPU(P21)(R21), A2CJCPU-S3 and A1FXCPU do not allow Ethernet connection and

MELSECNET/10 connection.

*7 When connected to GT SoftGT1000, simultaneous connection with other MELSOFT products (such as GX Developer) is not

allowed.

*8 Applicable only to the A171SHCPU(N), A172SHCPU(N), A173UHCPU, A173UHCPU-S1, A273UHCPU and A273UHCPU-S3

*9 When monitoring AnNCPU(S1), A2SCPU, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPU, the following or later software version is used to write to the

CPU. The earlier software version is unusable.

AnNCPU(S1):Version L or later for the one with link, version H or later for the one without link A2SCPU: Version H or later A0J2HCPU: Version E or later A0J2HCPU-DC24: Version B or later A2CCPU: Version H or later

*10 Only the FX3G series and FX3GC series can be connected with a USB cable.

*11 When connecting MELDAS C6/C64, use the system software version indicated below.

NC system software version D0 or later *12 When configuring a multiple CPU system using Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU,

Q12HCPU, or Q25HCPU, use a CPU of function version B or later.

*13 In the computer link connection using A2SCPU, A2SHCPU, A1SHCPU, A1SJHCPU, A0J2HCPU, or A171SHCPU, use the

software version U or later of the computer link module.

*14 In the QCPU redundant system, the MELSECNET/H extend mode cannot be used.

*15 The connection with a USB cable is available for only the following PLCs.

Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU, Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU, Q00UJCPU,

Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU,

Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU,

Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU and

Q26UDVCPU

*16 Applicable only with the PC CPU module

*17 Because the Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU,

Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU,

Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU and Q26UDPVCPU, have no serial interface, the direct CPU connection using the serial

connection is not available.

*18 For connection to any of the following CPUs, connect the GOT to the Ethernet interface of a target CPU.

R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU, R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, R120SFCPU, Q03UDECPU,

Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU,

Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU, Q06UDPVCPU,

Q13UDPVCPU, Q26UDPVCPU

As with connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module, the Ethernet settings, including the IP address setting, are required.

*19 Only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU, and Q170MSCPU-S1 can be monitored. PERIPHERAL I/

F cannot be used.

*20 Compatible with only the FX3U(C) series, FX3G(C) series and FX3S series.

*21 Compatible with only CJ1H, CJ1G, CJ1M, CJ2H(-EIP), CJ2H, CJ2M, CS1H, CS1G and CS1D.

Controller monitored Bus

connection

CPU direct

connection Computer

link

connection

Ethernet

connection

MODBUS

connection

MELSECNET

connection CC-Link

IE

Controller

CC-Link

IE Field RS-232 USB RTU TCP

MELSEC

NET/H

MELSEC

NET/10

YASKAWA PLC

YOKOGAWA PLC *24

SIEMENS PLC

CNC CNC C70

MELDAS C6/C64 *11 *11

Robot

controller

CRnQ-700/

CR750-Q/

CR751-Q

*26

CRnD-700/

CR750-D/

CR751-D

MODBUS/TCP equipment

4 - 4 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

*22 The adapter L6ADP-R2 is required for the RS-232 connection of the following PLCs.

L02CPU, L06CPU, L26CPU, L02CPU-P, L06CPU-P, L26CPU-P, L26CPU-PBT

*23 The GOT cannot monitor the host station.

*24 Only STARDOM can be connected.

*25 Compatible with only the universal model QCPU.

*26 The Ethernet connection of robot controller can be established only via the Ethernet module (QJ71E71) or Built-in Ethernet port of

QnUDE, QnUDV and QnUDPV.

*27 Not compatible with the redundant Ethernet.

*28 Only CJ2M-CPU1 supports the direct CPU connection.

*29 This controller has no USB port for connecting a personal computer. Monitor the controller via an RCPU in the multiple CPU

system.

*30 For R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, and R120ENCPU, the built-in Ethernet port CPUs (CPU P1, and P1)

and RJ71EN71 can be used.

*31 For R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, and R120ENCPU, use RJ71GP21-SX.

*32 For R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, and R120ENCPU, the built-in Ethernet port CPUs (P1 and P2),

RJ71EN71, RJ71GF11-T2, RD77GF4, RD77GF8, and RD77GF16 can be used.

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 5

4.1.3 Access range

This section explains the access range by connection type.

Ethernet connection

Direct CPU conncetion/computer link connection

Bus connection

MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection

CC-Link IE Field Network connection

The following explains how to refer to the illustrations and tables described in this section.

R : RCPU

Communication units used on relay network 1

Communication units used on relay network 2

L : LCPU Q(Q) : QCPU(Q mode) QS : QSCPU

C6 : MELDAS C6* QnA : QnACPU A : ACPU

Q(A) : QCPU(A mode)

Mnet/10 (H) : MELSECNET/10 or MELSECNET/H connection Mnet (II) : MELSECNET (II) connection Ethernet : Ethernet connection CC IE Cont : CC-Link IE Controller Network connection CC IE Field : CC-Link IE Field Network connection

4 - 6 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Ethernet connection The following shows the access range via the connected station in a configuration in which GT SoftGOT1000 and a station are connected by Ethernet.

POINT

(1) When monitoring other networks (Routing parameter setting) To monitor other networks, setting of routing parameters is required. For the setting of the routing parameters, refer to the following.

4.8 Ethernet Connection

(2) Monitoring the devices of other stations on the network Monitoring devices, such as D and M, of a station on another network slows the display processing. When monitoring devices of other stations, monitor the devices that are assigned to the link relay (B) or link register (W) with the network parameter.

(1) Connecting with RCPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.

4.1.3 Access range

: Accessible, : Not accessible

*1 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.

*2 The routing parameter cannot be set for a QSCPU, and therefore the GOT cannot access the networks on which the CPU is not

located.

*3 This network is inaccessible only when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is an LCPU.

*4 This network is inaccessible when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is an RCPU or LCPU.

Connected

station Relay station

RCPU Relay network

1

CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network

2

CPU of relay station No. 2

R L Q

(Q) QS*2

Q

(A) QnA A R L

Q

(Q) QS*2

Q

(A) QnA A

Ethernet

Mnet/10(H)*4

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*3

CC IE Field *1

CC IE Cont

Mnet/10(H)*4

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*3

CC IE Field *1

CC IE Field

Mnet/10(H)*4

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*3

CC IE Field *1

GT SoftGOT1000

CPU of a connected

station

Module for relay network 1

CPU of relay station

No. 1

Module for relay network 1

Module for relay network 2

Relay network 1 Relay network 2

CPU of relay station

No. 2

Module for relay network 2

Ethernet connection

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 7

(2) Connecting with QCPU or Q series motion controller CPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.

4.1.3 Access range

: Accessible, : Not accessible

*1 Only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is applicable for Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU.

*2 CNC C70 on other networks cannot be monitored.

*3 AnNCPU cannot be monitored.

Connected

station Relay station

QCPU*1,

QSCPU

Relay network

1

CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network

2

CPU of relay station No. 2

R L Q

(Q)*2 QS

Q

(A) QnA A R L

Q

(Q)*2 QS

Q

(A) QnA A

Mnet/10(H) *3

Mnet/10(H) *3

Ethernet

CC IE Cont

CC IE Field

Ethernet

Mnet/10(H) *3

Ethernet

CC IE Cont

CC IE Field

CC IE Cont

Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

CC IE Cont

CC IE Field

CC IE Field

Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

CC IE Cont

CC IE Field

GT SoftGOT1000

CPU of a connected

station

Module for relay network 1

CPU of relay station

No. 1

Module for relay network 1

Module for relay network 2

Relay network 1 Relay network 2

CPU of relay station

No. 2

Module for relay network 2

Ethernet connection

4 - 8 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(3) Connecting with LCPU This connection is available only when routing parameters can be set on the PLC side. For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.

4.1.3 Access range

: Accessible, : Not accessible

(4) Connecting with QnACPU or MELDAS C6/C64 For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.

4.1.3 Access range

: Accessible, : Not accessible

*1 CNC C70 on other networks cannot be monitored.

Connected

station Relay station

LCPU Relay network

1

CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network

2

CPU of relay station No. 2

R L Q

(Q) QS

Q

(A) QnA A R L

Q

(Q) QS

Q

(A) QnA A

Ethernet

Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

CC IE Cont

CC IE Field

CC IE Field

Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

CC IE Cont

CC IE Field

Connected

station Relay station

QnACPU,

MELDAS

C6*

Relay network

1

CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network

2

CPU of relay station No. 2

R L Q

(Q) QS

Q

(A) QnA

*1 A R L

Q

(Q) QS

Q

(A)

QnA *1

A

Mnet/10(H) Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

Ethernet Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

GT SoftGOT1000

CPU of a connected

station

Module for relay network 1

CPU of relay station

No. 1

Module for relay network 1

Module for relay network 2

Relay network 1 Relay network 2

CPU of relay station

No. 2

Module for relay network 2

Ethernet connection

GT SoftGOT1000

CPU of a connected

station

Module for relay network 1

CPU of relay station

No. 1

Module for relay network 1

Module for relay network 2

Relay network 1 Relay network 2

CPU of relay station

No. 2

Module for relay network 2

Ethernet connection

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 9

(5) Connecting with ACPU Only the connected station can be accessed.

(6) Connecting with FXCPU The stations set with [Ethernet Setting] of GT Designer3 can be accessed.

(7) Connecting with the robot controller (CRnD-700) Only the connected station can be accessed.

(8) Connecting with the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module Only the other stations on the CC-Link IE Field network via a CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module can be accessed. For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.

4.1.3 Access range

: Accessible, : Not accessible

POINT

(1) Host in the Ethernet connection While the GT SoftGOT1000 is handled as the host in MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 or CC-Link connection, the station (Ethernet module) set as the host in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 is handled as the host in Ethernet connection.

(2) Precautions when using the QCPU redundant system When monitoring other networks, do not set the QCPU redundant system as a relay station. If the QCPU redundant system is set as a relay station, the GT SoftGOT1000 cannot switch the monitoring target automatically when the system is switched. (A timeout error occurs due to failed monitoring)

(9) Various settings For the Ethernet setting by GT Designer3, refer to the following.

4.8 Ethernet Connection

Connected

station Relay station

NZ2GF-

ETB

Relay network

1

CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network

2

CPU of relay station No. 2

R L Q

(Q) QS

Q

(A) QnA A R L

Q

(Q) QS

Q

(A) QnA A

CC IE Field CC IE Field

GT SoftGOT1000

CPU of a connected

station

Module for relay network 1

CPU of relay station

No. 1

Module for relay network 1

Module for relay network 2

Relay network 1 Relay network 2

CPU of relay station

No. 2

Module for relay network 2

Ethernet connection

4 - 10 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Direct CPU conncetion/computer link connection The following shows the access range via the connected station in a configuration in which GT SoftGOT1000 and a station are connected by direct CPU connection or serial communication.

POINT

(1) When monitoring other networks (Routing parameter setting) To monitor other networks, setting of routing parameters is required. For the setting of the routing parameters, refer to the reference manual of the network connected.

(2) Monitoring the devices of other stations on the network Monitoring devices, such as D and M, of a station on another network slows the display processing. When monitoring devices of other stations, monitor the devices that are assigned to the link relay (B) or link register (W) with the network parameter.

(1) Connecting with RCPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.

4.1.3 Access range

: Accessible, : Not accessible

Connected

station Relay station

RCPU Relay network

1

CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network

2

CPU of relay station No. 2

R L Q

(Q) QS

Q

(A) QnA A R L

Q

(Q) QS

Q

(A) QnA A

Ethernet

Ethernet

CC IE Cont

CC IE Field

CC IE Cont

Ethernet

CC IE Cont

CC IE Field

CC IE Field

Ethernet

CC IE Cont

CC IE Field

Direct CPU connection, serial communication connection

GT SoftGOT1000

CPU of a connected

station

Module for relay network 1

CPU of relay station

No. 1

Module for relay network 1

Module for relay network 2

Relay network 1 Relay network 2

CPU of relay station

No. 2

Module for relay network 2

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 11

(2) Connecting with QCPU or Q series motion controller CPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.

4.1.3 Access range

: Accessible, : Not accessible

*1 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.

*2 When QSCPU is connected by USB, access to other stations or other PLCs is unavailable.

*3 Depending on the CPU type, the access range is different.

Refer to the following table.

: Accessible, : Not accessible, : Accessible when the connected station is a control station

Connected

station Relay station

QCPU,

QSCPU

Relay network

1

CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network

2

CPU of relay station No. 2

R L Q

(Q) QS

Q

(A) QnA A*3 R L

Q

(Q) QS

Q

(A) QnA A*3

*2 Mnet/10(H)

Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

CC IE Cont

CC IE Field *1

*2 Ethernet

Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

CC IE Cont

CC IE Field *1

*2 CC IE Cont

Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

CC IE Cont

CC IE Field *1

*2 CC IE Field *1

Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

CC IE Cont

CC IE Field *1

Connected station Relay network 1 Relay network 2

AnA(AnN)CPU AnUCPU AnA(AnN)CPU AnUCPU

QCPU

Direct CPU connection, serial communication connection

GT SoftGOT1000

CPU of a connected

station

Module for relay network 1

CPU of relay station

No. 1

Module for relay network 1

Module for relay network 2

Relay network 1 Relay network 2

CPU of relay station

No. 2

Module for relay network 2

4 - 12 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(3) Connecting with LCPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.

4.1.3 Access range

: Accessible, : Not accessible

*1 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.

*2 This network can be accessed only when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is a QCPU.

Connected

station Relay station

LCPU Relay network

1

CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network

2

CPU of relay station No. 2

R L Q

(Q) QS

Q

(A) QnA A R L

Q

(Q) QS

Q

(A) QnA A

Ethernet

Mnet/10(H)*2

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*2

CC IE Field *1

CC IE Field *1

Mnet/10(H)*2

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*2

CC IE Field *1

Direct CPU connection, serial communication connection

GT SoftGOT1000

CPU of a connected

station

Module for relay network 1

CPU of relay station

No. 1

Module for relay network 1

Module for relay network 2

Relay network 1 Relay network 2

CPU of relay station

No. 2

Module for relay network 2

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 13

(4) Connecting with QnACPU or MELDAS C6/C64 For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.

4.1.3 Access range

: Accessible, : Not accessible

*1 Only the link relay device or link register device assigned to the link parameter can be monitored.

Depending on the type of the connected station, the access range is different. For a master station, its local stations can be monitored. For a local station, only its master station can be monitored. For the master station on the third hierarchy, the master station on the second hierarchy and the local stations on the third

hierarchy can be monitored. For the details of the data link system, refer to the following.

4.1.6 Access range of the data link system (MELSECNET/B, (II))

*2 MELDAS C6* is inaccessible.

Connected

station Relay station

QnACPU,

MELDAS

C6*

Relay network

1

CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network

2

CPU of relay station No. 2

R L Q

(Q) QS

Q

(A)

QnA,

C6 A R L

Q

(Q) QS

Q

(A)

QnA,

C6 A

Mnet/10

Mnet/10

Mnet()

Ethernet

Mnet()*1 *2

Mnet/10

Mnet()

Ethernet

Ethernet

Mnet/10

Mnet()

Ethernet

Direct CPU connection, serial communication connection

GT SoftGOT1000

CPU of a connected

station

Module for relay network 1

CPU of relay station

No. 1

Module for relay network 1

Module for relay network 2

Relay network 1 Relay network 2

CPU of relay station

No. 2

Module for relay network 2

4 - 14 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(5) Connecting with ACPU or QCPU (A mode) For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.

4.1.3 Access range

: Accessible, : Not accessible

*1 Depending on the CPU type, the access range is different.

Refer to the following table.

: Accessible, : Not accessible,

: Accessible when the connected station is a control station, : Accessible when the monitored CPU is in a control station

*2 Only the link relay device or link register device assigned to the link parameter can be monitored.

Depending on the type of the connected station, the access range is different. For a master station, its local stations can be monitored. For a local station, only its master station can be monitored. For the master station on the third hierarchy, the master station on the second hierarchy and the local stations on the third

hierarchy can be monitored. For the details of the data link system, refer to the following.

4.1.6 Access range of the data link system (MELSECNET/B, (II))

(6) Connecting with FXCPU Only the connected CPU can be accessed.

(7) Connecting with CNC (CNC C70) or a robot controller (CRnQ-700) Monitor the motion controller CPU (Q series), CNC (CNC C70), or robot controller (CRnQ-700) via the following QCPUs in the multiple CPU system.

Connected

station Relay station

ACPU,

QCPU

(A mode)

Relay network

1

CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network

2

CPU of relay station No. 2

R L Q

(Q) QS

Q

(A) QnA A R L

Q

(Q) QS

Q

(A) QnA A

Mnet/10*1 Mnet/10(H)

Mnet()

Mnet()*2 Mnet/10(H)

Mnet()

Connected station Relay network 1 Relay network 2

AnA(AnN)CPU AnUCPU AnA(AnN)CPU AnUCPU

AnA(AnN)CPU

AnUCPU

Controller Relay CPU

CNC(CNC C70) Q173NCCPU QnUCPU

Robot controller (CRnQ-700) Q172DRCPU

Direct CPU connection, serial communication connection

GT SoftGOT1000

CPU of a connected

station

Module for relay network 1

CPU of relay station

No. 1

Module for relay network 1

Module for relay network 2

Relay network 1 Relay network 2

CPU of relay station

No. 2

Module for relay network 2

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 15

(8) Connecting with remote I/O stations in the MELSECNET/H network system When connected to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system, the GT SoftGOT1000 can monitor the PLC CPU of the master station. When connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the remote I/O station, use the following connection methods.

POINT

Connection to remote I/O station of MELSECNET/B, (II) or /10

The GT SoftGOT1000 cannot be connected to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/B, (II) data link system and MELSECNET/10 network system. Connect the GT SoftGOT1000 to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/H network system.

(a) Network modules in a remote I/O station The network units (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QP72BR15) of the remote I/O station are handled as PLC CPU. Connect the GT SoftGOT1000 to the RS-232 interface of the network unit. For cables required for connection with the network module and other details, refer to the following.

4.6.2 Connection cable

(b) Display of objects Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT Designer3. Then, specify [[NW No.] (Network No. of the remote I/O network) to 1, and specify [Station No.] (Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. The GT SoftGOT1000 monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GT SoftGOT1000 can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network. For the settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following.

Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

GT SoftGOT1000 Q J71E

71-100

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24N

Q33B

Q J71LP

21-25

Q33BP ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule Direct CPU connection

Network No.1 Station No.1 (remote I/O station)

Network No.1 Station No.0 (master station)

MELSECNET/H remort I/O Network

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

P LC

C P

U

Monitor target

4 - 16 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(9) Connecting with a head module in the CC-Link IE Field Network system When connected to the head module of the CC-Link IE Field Network system, the GT SoftGOT1000 can monitor the PLC CPU of the master station and local stations. When connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the head module, use the following connection methods.

(a) Head module The head module (LJ72GF15-T2) is handled as PLC CPU. For cables required for connection with the head module and other details, refer to the following.

4.6.2 Connection cable

(b) Display of objects Specify a type including MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT Designer3. Then, specify [NW No.] (Network No. of the CC-Link IE Field Network) to 1, and specify [Station No.] (Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. The GT SoftGOT1000 monitors stations on the CC-Link IE Field Network with the transient transmission. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GT SoftGOT1000 can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the CC-Link IE Field Network. For the settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following.

MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual

GT SoftGOT1000 Q J71G

F11-T2

LJ72G F15-T2

LJ71C 24

LX 40C

6

LY 10R

2

Q33B

E m

pty

E m

pty

CC-Link IE Field Network

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

P LC

C P

U

Network No. 1, Station No. 1

Network No. 1, Station No. 0

Monitor target

Direct CPU connection

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 17

Bus connection When the multiple CPU system is created, the PC CPU module can access the other CPUs on the same main base unit. The PC CPU module cannot access CPUs on the other main base units.

POINT

(1) When monitoring other networks (Routing parameter setting) To monitor other networks, setting of routing parameters is required. For the setting of the routing parameters, refer to the reference manual of the network connected.

(2) Monitoring the devices of other stations on the network Monitoring devices, such as D and M, of a station on another network slows the display processing. When monitoring devices of other stations, monitor the devices that are assigned to the link relay (B) or link register (W) with the network parameter.

power supply

1:CPU No.1 2:CPU No.2 3:CPU No.3

PC CPU module (GT SoftGOT1000)

Q series CPU (Q Mode)

1 2 3

4 - 18 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection The following shows the access range via the connected station in a configuration in which GT SoftGOT1000 and a station are connected by MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10. The GT SoftGOT1000 is regarded as a normal station and monitors the control station and all normal stations on the network. If the monitoring target is a PLC CPU within a multiple CPU system, CPU No. 1 to CPU No. 4 can be monitored. When monitoring devices of other stations, monitoring of all devices is possible in the PLC CPU to be accessed.

4.1.4When using MELSECNET/10 connection

POINT

(1) When monitoring other networks (Routing parameter setting) To monitor other networks, setting of routing parameters is required. For the setting of the routing parameters, refer to the following.

MELSECNET/H Interface Board User's Manual

Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

(2) Monitoring the devices of other stations on the network Monitoring devices, such as D and M, of a station on another network slows the display processing. When monitoring devices of other stations, monitor the devices that are assigned to the link relay (B) or link register (W) with the network parameter.

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 19

(1) Connecting with QCPU or Q series motion controller CPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.

4.1.3 Access range

: Accessible, : Not accessible

*1 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.

*2 Only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is applicable for Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU.

*3 The routing parameter cannot be set for a QSCPU, and therefore the GOT cannot access the networks on which the CPU is not

located.

*4 MELDAS C6* is not applicable.

*5 CNC C70 on other networks cannot be monitored.

*6 This network can be accessed only when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is a QCPU.

Connected

station Relay station

QCPU*2,

QSCPU*3

Relay network

1

CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network

2

CPU of relay station No. 2

R L Q

(Q)*5 QS*3

Q

(A)

QnA,

C6 A R L

Q

(Q)*5 QS*3

Q

(A)

QnA,

C6 A

Mnet/10(H) *4

Mnet/10(H) *4

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*6

CC IE Field*6 *1

Ethernet

Mnet/10(H) *4

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*6

CC IE Field*6 *1

CC IE Cont

Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*6

CC IE Field*6 *1

CC IE Field *1

Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*6

CC IE Field*6 *1

MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection

GT SoftGOT1000

CPU of a connected

station

Module for relay network 1

CPU of relay station

No. 1

Module for relay network 1

Module for relay network 2

Relay network 1 Relay network 2

CPU of relay station

No. 2

Module for relay network 2

4 - 20 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(2) Connecting with QnACPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.

4.1.3 Access range

: Accessible, : Not accessible

*1 MELDAS C6* is not applicable.

*2 The routing parameter cannot be set for a QSCPU, and therefore the GOT cannot access the networks on which the CPU is not

located.

*3 CNC C70 on other networks cannot be monitored.

*4 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.

*5 This network can be accessed only when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is a QCPU.

Connected

station Relay station

QnACPU *1

Relay network

1

CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network

2

CPU of relay station No. 2

R L Q

(Q) QS*2

Q

(A)

QnA,

C6*3 A R L

Q

(Q) QS*2

Q

(A)

QnA,

C6*3 A

Mnet/10 *1

Mnet/10(H) *1

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*5

CC IE Field*5 *4

Ethernet

Mnet/10(H) *1

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*5

CC IE Field*5 *4

MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection

GT SoftGOT1000

CPU of a connected

station

Module for relay network 1

CPU of relay station

No. 1

Module for relay network 1

Module for relay network 2

Relay network 1 Relay network 2

CPU of relay station

No. 2

Module for relay network 2

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 21

(3) Connecting with ACPU or QCPU (A mode) For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.

4.1.3 Access range

: Accessible, : Not accessible

*1 The routing parameter cannot be set for a QSCPU, and therefore the GOT cannot access the networks on which the CPU is not

located.

Connected

station Relay station

ACPU,

QCPU

(A mode)

Relay network

1

CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network

2

CPU of relay station No. 2

R L Q

(Q) QS*1

Q

(A) QnA A R L

Q

(Q) QS*1

Q

(A) QnA A

Mnet/10 Mnet/10

MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection

GT SoftGOT1000

CPU of a connected

station

Module for relay network 1

CPU of relay station

No. 1

Module for relay network 1

Module for relay network 2

Relay network 1 Relay network 2

CPU of relay station

No. 2

Module for relay network 2

4 - 22 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection The following shows the access range via the connected station in a configuration in which GT SoftGOT1000 and a station are connected by CC-Link IE Controller Network. The GT SoftGOT1000 is regarded as a normal station and monitors the control station and all normal stations on the network. If the monitoring target is a PLC CPU within a multiple CPU system, CPU No. 1 to CPU No. 4 can be monitored. When monitoring devices of other stations, monitoring of all devices is possible in the PLC CPU to be accessed.

4.1.4When using MELSECNET/10 connection

POINT

(1) When monitoring other networks (Routing parameter setting) To monitor other networks, setting of routing parameters is required. For the setting of the routing parameters, refer to the following.

CC-Link IE Controller Network Interface Board User's Manual

MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual

(2) Monitoring the devices of other stations on the network Monitoring devices, such as D and M, of a station on another network slows the display processing. When monitoring devices of other stations, monitor the devices that are assigned to the link relay (B) or link register (W) with the network parameter.

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 23

(1) Connecting with RCPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.

4.1.3 Access range

: Accessible, : Not accessible

*1 The routing parameter cannot be set for a QSCPU, and therefore the GOT cannot access the networks on which the CPU is not

located.

*2 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.

*3 This network is inaccessible only when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is an LCPU.

*4 This network is inaccessible when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is an RCPU or LCPU.

Connected

station Relay station

RCPU Relay network

1

CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network

2

CPU of relay station No. 2

R L Q

(Q) QS*1

Q

(A)

QnA,

C6 A R L

Q

(Q) QS*1

Q

(A)

QnA,

C6 A

Ethernet

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*3

CC IE Field

CC IE Cont

Mnet/10*4

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*3

CC IE Field *2

CC IE Field

Mnet/10*4

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*3

CC IE Field *2

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection

GT SoftGOT1000

CPU of a connected

station

Module for relay network 1

CPU of relay station

No. 1

Module for relay network 1

Module for relay network 2

Relay network 1 Relay network 2

CPU of relay station

No. 2

Module for relay network 2

4 - 24 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(2) Connecting with QCPU or Q series motion controller CPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.

4.1.3 Access range

: Accessible, : Not accessible

*1 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.

*2 The routing parameter cannot be set for a QSCPU, and therefore the GOT cannot access the networks on which the CPU is not

located.

*3 LCPU is accessible only when QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B2, or QJ71E71-B5 is used. (Built-in Ethernet port QCPU is

inapplicable.)

*4 CNC C70 on other networks cannot be monitored.

*5 This network can be accessed only when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is a QCPU.

Connected

station Relay station

QCPU,

QSCPU*2

Relay network

1

CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network

2

CPU of relay station No. 2

R L Q

(Q)*4 QS*2

Q

(A)

QnA,

C6 A R L

Q

(Q)*4 QS*2

Q

(A)

QnA,

C6 A

Mnet/10(H)

Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*5

CC IE Field*5 *1

Ethernet *3

Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*5

CC IE Field *1

CC IE Cont

Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*5

CC IE Field*5 *1

CC IE Field *1

Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*5

CC IE Field *1

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection

GT SoftGOT1000

CPU of a connected

station

Module for relay network 1

CPU of relay station

No. 1

Module for relay network 1

Module for relay network 2

Relay network 1 Relay network 2

CPU of relay station

No. 2

Module for relay network 2

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 25

CC-Link IE Field Network connection The following shows the access range via the connected station in a configuration in which GT SoftGOT1000 and a station are connected by CC-Link IE Field Network. The GT SoftGOT1000 is regarded as a normal station and monitors the control station and all normal stations on the network. If the monitoring target is a PLC CPU within a multiple CPU system, CPU No. 1 to CPU No. 4 can be monitored. When monitoring devices of other stations, monitoring of all devices is possible in the PLC CPU to be accessed.

4.1.4When using MELSECNET/10 connection

POINT

(1) When monitoring other networks (Routing parameter setting) To monitor other networks, setting of routing parameters is required. For the setting of the routing parameters, refer to the reference manual of the network connected.

MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual

(2) Monitoring the devices of other stations on the network Monitoring devices, such as D and M, of a station on another network slows the display processing. When monitoring devices of other stations, monitor the devices that are assigned to the link relay (B) or link register (W) with the network parameter.

4 - 26 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(1) Connecting with RCPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.

4.1.3 Access range

: Accessible, : Not accessible

*1 The routing parameter cannot be set for a QSCPU, and therefore the GOT cannot access the networks on which the CPU is not

located.

*2 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.

*3 This network is inaccessible only when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is an LCPU.

*4 This network is inaccessible when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is an RCPU or LCPU.

Connected

station Relay station

RCPU Relay network

1

CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network

2

CPU of relay station No. 2

R L Q

(Q) QS*1

Q

(A)

QnA,

C6 A R L

Q

(Q) QS*1

Q

(A)

QnA,

C6 A

Ethernet

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*3

CC IE Field

CC IE Cont

Mnet/10*4

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*3

CC IE Field *2

CC IE Field

Mnet/10*4

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*3

CC IE Field *2

CC-Link IE Field Network connection

GT SoftGOT1000

CPU of a connected

station

Module for relay network 1

CPU of relay station

No. 1

Module for relay network 1

Module for relay network 2

Relay network 1 Relay network 2

CPU of relay station

No. 2

Module for relay network 2

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 27

(2) Connecting with QCPU or Q series motion controller CPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.

4.1.3 Access range

: Accessible, : Not accessible

*1 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.

*2 Only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is applicable for Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU.

*3 QSCPU cannot access other networks because routing parameters cannot be set on QSCPU.

*4 CNC C70 on other networks cannot be monitored.

*5 This network can be accessed only when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is a QCPU.

Connected

station Relay station

QCPU*1*2,

QSCPU*3

Relay network

1

CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network

2

CPU of relay station No. 2

R L Q

(Q)*4 QS*3

Q

(A)

QnA,

C6 A R L

Q

(Q)*4 QS*3

Q

(A)

QnA,

C6 A

Mnet/10(H)

Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*5

CC IE Field*5 *1

Ethernet

Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*5

CC IE Field *1

CC IE Cont

Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*5

CC IE Field*5 *1

CC IE Field *1

Mnet/10(H)

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*5

CC IE Field *2

CC-Link IE Field Network connection

GT SoftGOT1000

CPU of a connected

station

Module for relay network 1

CPU of relay station

No. 1

Module for relay network 1

Module for relay network 2

Relay network 1 Relay network 2

CPU of relay station

No. 2

Module for relay network 2

4 - 28 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(3) Connecting with LCPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.

4.1.3 Access range

: Accessible, : Not accessible

*1 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.

*2 The routing parameter cannot be set for a QSCPU, and therefore the GOT cannot access the networks on which the CPU is not

located.

*3 This network can be accessed only when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is a QCPU.

POINT

(1) Precautions when using the QCPU redundant system When monitoring other networks, do not set the QCPU redundant system as a relay station. If the QCPU redundant system is set as a relay station, the GT SoftGOT1000 cannot switch the monitoring target automatically when the system is switched. (A timeout error occurs due to failed monitoring)

Connected

station Relay station

LCPU Relay network

1

CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network

2

CPU of relay station No. 2

R L Q

(Q) QS*2

Q

(A)

QnA,

C6 A R L

Q

(Q) QS*2

Q

(A)

QnA,

C6 A

Ethernet

Mnet/10(H)*3

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*3

CC IE Field *1

CC IE Field *1

Mnet/10(H)*3

Ethernet

CC IE Cont*3

CC IE Field *1

CC-Link IE Field Network connection

GT SoftGOT1000

CPU of a connected

station

Module for relay network 1

CPU of relay station

No. 1

Module for relay network 1

Module for relay network 2

Relay network 1 Relay network 2

CPU of relay station

No. 2

Module for relay network 2

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 29

4.1.4 System setting examples

The following shows an example of the monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices.

When using the direct CPU connection or computer link connection (without the data link system)

(1) Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table. To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host

station. To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station

No.)

Station to be accessed

Station connected

to GT SoftGOT1000

Network No.1 Network No.2

AnU (1-1) Q (Q mode)

(1-2) AnA (1-3) AnU (1-4) QnA (2-1) AnU (2-2) AnN (2-3) AnU (2-4)

AnU (1-1) Host Other (1-3) Other (1-4) Other (2-2)

Q (Q mode) (1-2) Other (1-1) Host Other (1-4) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-4)

AnA (1-3) Other (0-0) Host

AnU (1-4)

(2-2) Other (1-1) Host Host

QnA (2-1) Host

AnN (2-3) Host

AnU (2-4) Other (2-2) Host

How to read the table

Upper line: Accessibility

: Accessible

: Not accessible

Lower line: Network settings

Host

Other (Network No. - Station number)

Control station Control station

Network No.1 Network No.2

AnU (1-1)

Q(Q mode) (1-2)

AnA (1-3)

AnN (2-3)

AnU (2-4)

QnA (2-1)

AnU (1-4) (2-2)

4 - 30 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

POINT

Monitoring link device B or W

For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 31

When using the direct CPU connection or computer link connection (with the data link system)

(1) Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table. To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host

station. To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station

No.).

Station to be

accessed

Station

connected to

GT SoftGOT1000

Network No.1 Network No.2 Data link system

QnA (1-1) AnA (1-2) QnA (1-3) AnU (2-1) QnA (2-2) AnU (2-3) AnU (2-4) QnA (M) QnA (L1) AnA (L2)

Q (Q mode) (1-1) Host Other (1-2) Other (1-3) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4)

Other (1-3)

or

Other (2-2)

AnA (1-2) Host

QnA

(1-3)

(2-2)

Other (1-1) Host Other (2-1) Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Host *1

Other (0-2)(M)

AnU (2-1) Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4)

AnU (2-3) Other (2-1) Host Other (2-4)

AnU (2-4) Other (2-1) Other (2-3) Host

QnA (L1) Host

AnA (L2) Host

Control station

AnU (2-4)QnA

(1-3) (2-2) (M)

Network No.2

AnU (2-1)

Network No.1

AnA (1-2)

QnA (L1)

AnA (L2)

Data link system

Control station

Q(Q mode) (1-1)

AnU (2-3)

4 - 32 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

*1 When monitoring the data link system, designate the network No. as 0.

POINT

Monitoring link device B or W

For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

How to read the table

Upper line: Accessibility

: Accessible

: Not accessible

Lower line: Network settings

Host

Other (Network No. - Station number)

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 33

When using MELSECNET/10 connection

(1) Monitor access range for other station devices (other than B and W)

: Accessible : Not accessible

(2) Designating network No. and station number for setting monitor device

(a) Monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by network parameter NW No.: 1, Station number: Host For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the local device number if designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

(b) Monitoring other stations (other than B and W)

Station to be accessed

Station connected

to GT SoftGOT1000

Network No.1 Network No.2

QnA

(1-1)

Q (Q mode)

(1-2)

GT

SoftGOT1000

(1-3)

AnU

(1-4)

Q (Q mode)

(2-1)

QnA

(2-2)

AnN

(2-3)

AnU

(2-4)

GT SoftGOT1000 (1-3)

Station to be accessed

Station connected

to GT SoftGOT1000

QnA

(1-1)

Q (Q mode)

(1-2)

GT

SoftGOT1000

(1-3)

AnU

(1-4)

How to read the table 1, Other (2)

NW No. Station number

SoftGOT1000 (1-3) 1, Other (1) 1, Other (2) 1, Other (4)

GT Soft GOT1000

(1-3)

QnA (1-1)

AnU (1-4) (2-4)

Q (Q mode) Network No. 1 Network No. 2 (1-2)

Q (Q mode) (2-1)

QnA (2-2)

AnN (2-3)

4 - 34 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4.1.5 How to monitor redundant system

This section explains the restrictions on the connection methods and other information applicable when the QCPU redundant system is monitored by the GT SoftGOT1000.

In a redundant system, the monitoring can be performed with the monitoring target specified as the control system or the standby system on the GT SoftGOT1000. By specifying the monitoring target PLC CPU as the control system of the redundant system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU in the control system when system switching occurs. To enable this automatic changing of the monitoring target at the GT SoftGOT1000, settings are required in the GT Designer3.

Q redundant setting

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

CPU direct connection

Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Standby system

(System B)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Station No. 2 (remote I/O station)

Tracking cable

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24N

The GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the control system PLC CPU.

When an error occurs in System A, System B switches from standby system to control system.

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

CPU direct connection

Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Standby system

(System A)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Station No. 2 (remote I/O station)

Tracking cable

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24N

The GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the PLC CPU of the new control system after system switching.

E m

pty

E m

pty

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

E m

pty

E m

pty

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

E m

pty

E m

pty

P ow

er supply m

odule

E m

pty

E m

pty

P ow

er supply m

odule

Control system

(System A)

Control system

(System B)

GT Soft GOT1000

GT Soft GOT1000

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 35

The following connection methods are available for the QCPU redundant system.

Connection to remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system

Connection to remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system

Direct CPU connection

Direct CPU connection

MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection (Network system)

MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connections (network systems)

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (Network system)

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (network system)

Ethernet connection

Ethernet connection

Connection to the redundant type extension base unit

(1) Computer link connection (Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)

(1) Computer link connection (Connection to the Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)

(2) Ethernet connection (Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)

(2) Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on redundant type extension base unit)

For details of PLC CPUs that can be monitored in each connection method of GT SoftGOT1000, refer to the following.

4.1.2 Monitorable controllers

4 - 36 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

The following table shows the features of each connection method.

Connection type Before system switching After system switching

Direct CPU connection

(Remote I/O station of

MELSECNET/H network

system)

The monitoring target is automatically changed to the control

system PLC CPU.

Direct CPU connection

By the Q redundant setting, the GT SoftGOT1000

automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU

in the control system.*1

Monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by GT

SoftGOT1000 1). Monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by GT

SoftGOT1000 2).

GT Soft GOT1000

Control system

Multiplexed remote master station

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Standby system

Multiplexed remote sub master station

Remote I/O station

GT Soft GOT1000

Standby system

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Remote I/O station

Multiplexed remote master station

Multiplexed remote sub master station

Control system

GT Soft GOT1000

Control system

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Standby system

Remote I/O station

Multiplexed remote master station

Multiplexed remote sub-master station

GT Soft GOT1000

Multiplexed remote master station

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Standby system

Remote I/O station

Multiplexed remote sub-master station

Control system

GT Soft GOT1000

1)

GT Soft GOT1000

2)

Control system

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Standby system

Remote I/O station

Multiplexed remote master station

Multiplexed remote sub-master station

GT Soft GOT1000

1)

GT Soft GOT1000

2)

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Remote I/O station

Control systemStandby system

Multiplexed remote master station

Multiplexed remote sub-master station

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 37

*1 To monitor the control system after the system switching without the Q redundant setting, change the cable connection from the

PLC CPU in the previous control system to the control system after system switching.

*2 To monitor the control system after the system switching without the Q redundancy setting, refer to the following.

Switch the monitor target to the control system using the script function

Connection type Before system switching After system switching

MELSECNET/H

connection, MELSECNET/

10 connection

(Network system)

By the Q redundant setting, the GT SoftGOT1000

automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU

in the control system.*2

CC-Link IE Controller

Network connection

(Network system)

By the Q redundant setting, the GT SoftGOT1000

automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU

in the control system.*2

Ethernet connection

By the Q redundant setting, the GT SoftGOT1000

automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU

in the control system.*2

Computer link connection

(Serial communication

module mounted on the

redundant type extension

base unit)

Ethernet connection

(Ethernet module mounted

on the redundant type

extension base unit)

GT Soft GOT1000

Station No.3 (normal station)

MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode)

Station No.1 (control station)

Station No.2 (normal station)

Control system

Standby system

GT Soft GOT1000

Station No.3 (normal station)

MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode)

Station No.1 (normal station)

Station No.2 (sub control station)

Control system

Standby system

GT Soft GOT1000

Station No.3 (normal station)

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Station No.1 (control station)

Station No.2 (normal station)

Control system

Standby system

GT Soft GOT1000

Station No.3 (normal station)

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Station No.1 (normal station)

Station No.2 (sub control station)

Control system

Standby system

GT Soft GOT1000

Station No. 3

Ethernet

Station No. 1 Station No. 2

Control system

Standby system

GT Soft GOT1000

Station No. 3

Ethernet

Station No. 1 Station No. 2

Standby system

Control system

GT Soft GOT1000

1)

GT Soft GOT1000

2)

Control system

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

Serial communication module

Ethernet module

Serial communication connection

Ethernet connection

GT Soft GOT1000

1)

GT Soft GOT1000

2)

Control system Standby system

Station No. 1

Station No. 2

Serial communication module

Ethernet module

Serial communication connection

Ethernet connection

4 - 38 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

POINT

Precautions for monitoring the QCPU redundant system

(1) A system alarm may be detected when the system is switched in a redundant system. When Q redundant setting is made : "450 Path has changed or timeout occured in redundant system." When Q redundant setting is not made : "402 Communication timeout. Confirm communication pathway or

modules." However, even if the error occurs, the GT SoftGOT1000 automatically resumes monitoring and there are no problems in the monitoring operation.

(2) The system alarm is displayed when the system is switched due to cable disconnection etc. (when the path is changed). The system alarm is not displayed when the system is switched by the user.

(3) When the Q redundant setting is not made, the GT SoftGOT1000 does not automatically change the monitoring target even if system switching occurs in the redundant system. When the GT SoftGOT1000 is connected to the standby system, data written to a device are overwritten by the data of the control system, failing to be reflected. In this case, when data are written to a device in the standby system normally, the system alarm "315 Device writing error. Correct device." is not detected.

(4) Do not check-mark the [Comm. Error Dialog] in [Communication Setup] from [Online], for GT SoftGOT1000. If [Comm. Error Dialog] is checked, a communication error dialog box appears and the monitor stops when some error occurs in the communication path.

3.6 Communication Setup

(5) For monitoring the QCPU redundant system when connecting to MELSECNET/H, use QCPU of function version D or later, with the upper five digits later than "07102". Also, use GX Developer of Version 8.29F or later.

(6) A message "Unable to communicate with CPU." is displayed when the system switching occurs while an option function such as the ladder monitor is used.

(7) In the MELSECNET/H connection or MELSECNET/10 connection, when the control station of the MELSECNET/H network or MELSECNET/10 network fails and is taken over by a station outside the QCPU redundant system, the timeout is detected as the system alarm. If this occurs, the monitor display speed may slow down.

(8) In the direct CPU connection, the GT SoftGOT1000 fails to automatically change the monitoring target in the following cases.

When the power supply to the CPU where the GT SoftGOT1000 is connected is OFF When the cable connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 with the CPU is broken When the tracking is disabled

(9) If the Q redundant setting is made for a system that is not a QCPU redundant system, no error occurs at the start up of the GT SoftGOT1000 and the GT SoftGOT1000 operates normally. In this case, if an abnormality (such as powering OFF, or communication timeout error) occurs at the PLC CPU for which the Q redundant setting has been made, the PLC CPU may operate in a different way from the monitoring target change mode that was set in the Q redundant setting.

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 39

Connection to remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system This section explains the direct CPU connection that connects the GT SoftGOT1000 to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.

(1) Connection method Connect the GT SoftGOT1000 to the RS-232 interface of the network module (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72BR15) on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.

(2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

In this case, the GT SoftGOT1000 monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the MELSECNET/H network system.Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GT SoftGOT1000 can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network.

(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system takes over the master operation of MELSECNET/H. Since the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU that is operating as the master.

Setting item Settings

Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*

Device setting

(Network setting)

Host Host

Remote master

station

Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of remote I/O network),

Station No. 0 (master station))

Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item.

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

CPU direct connection

Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Control system (System A)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Standby system (System B)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24NNetwork No. 1, Station No. 2 (Remote I/O station)

E m

pty

E m

pty

P ow

er supply m

odule

E m

pty

P ow

er supply m

odule

E m

pty

P ow

er supply m

odule

GT SoftGOT1000

4 - 40 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Direct CPU connection This section describes the direct CPU connection by which a GT SoftGOT1000 is connected to a PLC CPU in the redundant system. Two methods for the CPU direct connection, using one or two GT SoftGOT1000 are available.

(1) When using one GT SoftGOT1000

(a) Connection method Connect the GT SoftGOT1000 and the control system PLC CPU (Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU) of the redundant system with an RS-232 cable or USB cable.

(b) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

(c) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the PLC CPU (other station) of the control system after system switching takes over the host station operation. Since the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to other station.

POINT

To monitor the control system without Q redundant setting

If the system switching occurs when the Q redundant setting is not made, the GT SoftGOT1000 cannot change the monitoring target at the occurrence of system switching since it monitors the connected PLC CPU (host station). As a contermeasure, change the cable connection from the PLC CPU in the previous control system to the control system after system switching.

Setting item Settings

Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*

Device setting

(Network setting) Host Host

Q Redundant Setting Q redundant setting

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

CPU direct connection

Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Control system (System A)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

P ow

er supply m

odule

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

E m

pty

P ow

er supply m

odule

E m

pty

P ow

er supply m

odule

E m

pty

E m

pty Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Standby system (System B)

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24NNetwork No. 1, Station No. 2 (remote I/O station)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N GT SoftGOT1000

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 41

(2) When using two GT SoftGOT1000 Connect a GT SoftGOT1000 to each PLC CPU to respond to the system switching.

(a) Connection method Connect GT SoftGOT1000 to the RS-232 interface of the control system and standby system CPU modules (Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU) of the redundant system.

(b) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

(c) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the GT SoftGOT1000 cannot change the monitor target automatically in response to the system switching. The GT SoftGOT1000 that is connected to the control system CPU module after system switching continues the monitoring. Different from the case using one GT SoftGOT1000, no cable reconnection is required.

POINT

To automatically change the monitoring target after system switching using one GT SoftGOT1000, make the Q redundant settings.

Q redundant setting

Setting item Settings

Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*

Device setting

(Network setting) Host Host

Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item.

Monitor target

Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)

Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)

Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (remote I/O station)

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

CPU direct connection

Control system (System A)

E m

pty

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Standby system (System B)

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24N

E m

pty

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

E m

pty

E m

pty

CPU direct connection

GT SoftGOT1000 1) GT SoftGOT1000 2)

4 - 42 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(3) Precautions when connecting a GT SoftGOT1000 directly to a PLC CPU in the redundant system without making Q redundant setting

(a) As the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors exclusively the PLC CPU that is directly connected to, the monitor target cannot be changed in response to the system switching of the redundant system. To change the target monitor in response to the system switching, change the target of the connection cable between the GT SoftGOT1000 and PLC CPU to the other PLC CPU, or configure the system using GT SoftGOT1000 connected to each PLC CPU.

(b) In CPU direct connection, when monitoring a PLC CPU in the redundant system, only the PLC CPU that is directly connected to the GT SoftGOT1000 can be monitored.

(c) When connected to the standby system PLC CPU, the writing of the GT SoftGOT1000 to a device in the connected PLC CPU is not reflected. Design a monitor screen that disables writing to the standby system. In the redundant system, the tracking function transfers device data from control system to standby system. When the tracking function is enabled, the device value of the standby system PLC CPU is overwritten by the device value transferred from the control system to the standby system even if the GT SoftGOT1000 writes to the standby system PLC CPU (Numerical input, Ascii input, Script, Recipe, or others).

As countermeasures to the above, perform the following. Display a monitor screen which indicates that "the connected PLC CPU is the standby system" on a GT

SoftGOT1000 when connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the standby system PLC CPU. To display the specified monitor screen when connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the standby system

PLC CPU, use the special relay SM1515 (Control status identification flag) of the PLC CPU. (When the SM1515 is OFF, the connected PLC CPU is the standby system)

Control the operation of each object by the SM1515, which is set for the operation condition. For the screen switching device, use a GT SoftGOT1000 internal device.

If a device of the PLC CPU is used, the Status Observation operation of the GT SoftGOT1000 may be disabled since the device data of the PLC CPU will is overwritten by the device value transferred with the redundant system tracking function.

Numerically input D100=100 from the GT SoftGOT1000.

1) D100=100

2) D100=5

Tracks D100=5 from control system to standby system.

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

CPU direct connection CPU direct connection

Control system (System A)

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Standby system (System B)

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24N

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

GT SoftGOT1000 1) GT SoftGOT1000 2)

1.2.

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 43

The following diagram shows an example of screen setting using SM1515. System configuration example: when using one GT SoftGOT1000

Create a monitor screen on the base screen 1 that performs the following operations for when connecting a GT SoftGOT1000 to control system and standby system. 1) When connecting to the control system, the monitor screen displays a message calling a touch switch

operation, by which the screen switches to the next screen. 2) When connecting to the standby system, the monitor screen displays a message calling the reconnection of

the connection cable.

1) When connecting to the control system 2) When connecting to the standby system

Control system (System A)

Q25PRH CPU

QJ71 BR11

Standby system (System B)

Station No. 0

Q25PRH CPU

QJ71 BR11

Station No. 1

QJ72 BR15

Station No. 2

GT SoftGOT1000

4 - 44 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

1. Set the screen switching device of the base screen. Choose [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device GD100 as the base screen switching device. (Do not use PLC CPU devices for the screen switching device. If used, the Status Observation operation of the GT SoftGOT1000 may be disabled since the device data of the PLC CPU is overwritten by the device value transferred with the redundant system tracking function)

2. Set the Status Observation. Make the setting so that the base screen 1 is displayed when the connected PLC CPU is the standby system (SM1515 is OFF) in the project specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation].

Create the status observation in the project on the Project tab.

Condition 1 : SM1515 (while OFF) When the SM1515 is OFF, the connected PLC CPU is the standby system.

Operation : GD100=1 The screen switches to the base screen 1.

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 45

3. Set the comment display on the base screen 1. Set a comment to be displayed on the base screen 1 depending on the system status (ON/OFF of the SM1515) of the connected PLC CPU using the Comment Display (Bit). Select [Object] [Comment Display] [Bit Comment] and set Comment Display (Bit).

Dvice/Style tab

Device : SM1515

Shape : None

Comment tab : Basic Comment

Comment Display Type Text (ON) : The operation status is control system.

Touch the screen to display the next screen.

Comment Display Type Text (OFF) : The operation status is standby system.

Reconnect the PLC connection cable to the control system CPU.

1) Dvice/Style tab screen 2) Comment tab screen (ON status)

3) Comment tab screen (OFF status)

4 - 46 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4. Set the touch switches on the base screen 1. By using the go to screen switch function, set a touch switch for shifting the screen to the next screen with a screen touch, when the connected PLC CPU is the control system (SM1515 is ON). Select [Object] [Switch] [Go To Screen Switch] and set the screen switching function. Set the same size for the touch switch as the base screen size so that touching any place of the screen enables the switch operation.

Next Screen tab

Screen Type : Base

Go To Screen : Fixed 2

Style tab

Display Style : None (Shape)

Trigger tab

Trigger Type : ON

Trigger Device : SM1515

1) Next Screen tab 2) Style tab screen 3) Trigger tab screen

The following shows the created base screen 1.

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 47

MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connections (network systems) This section explains the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connections (network systems) that connect the GT SoftGOT1000 to the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network system. The following provides an example of connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 set as a normal station to the MELSECNET/ H network system.

(1) Connection method Connect the MELSECNET/H network system to the GT SoftGOT1000.

(2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When system switching occurs, the network module station No. 2 changes from the normal station to the sub control station and takes over the control of the MELSECNET/H network system. Since the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the network module station No. 2.

POINT

To monitor the control system without Q redundant setting

When system switching occurs, the network module station No. 2 changes from the normal station to the sub control station and takes over the control of the MELSECNET/H network system. Since the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the station of the specified station number, the monitoring target cannot be changed to the station No. 2 in response to the system switching. As a countermeasure, create a screen to monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by switching the station numbers between System A and System B using the script function.

Switch the monitor target to the control system using the script function

Setting item Settings

Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*

Device setting

(Network setting) Other station

Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of PLC to PLC network),

Station No. ** (** indicates the station number of the control system. Station No. 1, in the

above example))

Q Redundant Setting Q redundant setting

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network E

m pty

E m

pty

Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Control station)

Control system

(System A)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Standby system

(System B) Q

25P R

H C

P U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24N

Network No. 1, Station No. 3 (Normal station)

Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (Normal station)

MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode)

P ow

ersupply m

odule

GT SoftGOT1000

E m

pty

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

E m

pty

4 - 48 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (network system) This section explains the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (network system) that connects the GT SoftGOT1000 to the CC-Link IE Controller Network. The following shows an example of connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 set as a normal station to the CC-Link IE Controller Network.

(1) Connection method Connect the GT SoftGOT1000 to the CC-Link IE Controller Network.

(2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as described below.

(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When system switching occurs, the network module station No.2 changes from a normal station to the sub control station, and the system with the module takes over the control of the CC-Link IE Controller Network as the control system. Since the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the network module station No. 2.

Setting item Settings

Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*

Device setting

(Network) Other station

Other (NW No.1 (Network No. of CC-Link IE Controller Network),

Station No. ** (** indicates the station number of the control system. Station No. 1 in the

above example))

Q Redundant Setting Q redundant setting

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71G

P 21-S

X

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71G

P 21-S

X

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24N

Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Control station)

Network No. 1, Station No. 3 (Normal station)

Monitor target

Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (Normal station)CC-Link IE Controller Network

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

Standby system

(System B)

E m

pty

E m

ptyControl system

(System A)

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

P ow

er supply m

odule

E m

pty

E m

pty

GT SoftGOT1000

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 49

Ethernet connection This section explains the Ethernet connection that connects the GT SoftGOT1000 to the Ethernet network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the Ethernet network.

(1) Connection method Connect the Ethernet network system to the GT SoftGOT1000.

(2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When system switching occurs, Ethernet module station No. 2 takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. Since the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the control system, he monitoring target is automatically changed to the Ethernet module station No. 2.

POINT

To monitor the control system without Q redundant setting

When system switching occurs, the network module station No. 2 changes from the normal station to the sub control station and takes over the control of the MELSECNET/H network system. Since the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the station of the specified station number, the monitoring target cannot be changed to the station No. 2 in response to the system switching. As a countermeasure, create a screen to monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by switching the station numbers between System A and System B using the script function.

Switch the monitor target to the control system using the script function

Setting item Settings

Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*

Device setting

(Network setting)

Host Host

Other station

Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of Ethernet),

Station No. ** (** indicates the station number of the control system. Station No. 1, in the

above example))

Q Redundant Setting Q redundant setting

Monitor target

MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

P ow

ersupply m

odule

E m

pty

Network No. 1, Station No. 1

Control system

(System A)

E m

pty

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

E m

pty Standby system

(System B)

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71LP

21-25

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71E

71-100

Q J61B

T11N

Q J72LP

25-25

Q J71C

24N

Network No. 1, Station No. 3

Network No. 1, Station No. 2

Ethernet

P ow

ersupply m

odule

P ow

ersupply m

odule

E m

pty

GT SoftGOT1000

4 - 50 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Connection to the redundant type extension base unit

(1) Computer link connection (Connection to the Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the computer link connection for connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. The following shows an example of connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.

(a) Connection method Connect the GT SoftGOT1000 to the serial communication module (QJ71C24N) mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.

(b) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

(c) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the GT SoftGOT1000 automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU switched to the control system.

Setting item Settings

Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*

Device setting

(Network setting) Host Host

Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item.

Computer link connection

Redundant type extension base unit

Monitor target

Control system (System A)

Standby system (System B)

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71C

24N

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71B

R 11

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

GT SoftGOT1000

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 51

(2) Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the Ethernet connection for connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. The following shows an example of connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.

(a) Connection method Connect the GT SoftGOT1000 to the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, LJ71E71-100) mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.

(b) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.

(c) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the GT SoftGOT1000 automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU switched to the control system.

Setting item Settings

Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*

Device setting

(Network setting) Other station

Other (NW No.2 (Network No. of Ethernet),

Station No.** (** indicates the station No. of the Ethernet module. Station No.1 in the above

example))

Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item.

Monitor target

Control system (System A)

Standby system (System B)

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

P ow

er supply m

odule

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71E71-100

Q 25P

R H

C P

U

Q J71B

R 11

Q J71B

R 11

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

E m

pty

Ethernet connection

Redundant type extension base unit

Network No.2, Station No.1 (Ethernet module)

Network No. 2, Station No. 2 GT SoftGOT1000

4 - 52 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Q redundant setting The following explains the setting for automatically change the monitoring target of the GT SoftGOT1000 when monitoring a QCPU redundant system.

POINT

Before making the Q redundant setting

In the Q redundant setting, do not set stations other than redundant CPUs.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [Q Redundant] from the menu.

2. The setting dialog box appears. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.

3. Make the settings for the Q redundant setting. In the Q Redundant Setting dialog box, settings can be made for each channel of the controller.

(Example: Ethernet connection (Station No. 5), redundant CPU pair No. 1 and No. 2, redundant CPU station No. 1 to 4)

For details of *1, refer to the explanation below.

Item Contents

Target at its own Station

(0-FF)

Select this item to monitor the control system as a host station.

(In Ethernet connection, not available even when selected)

Pair No.*1

NW No.

Set the network No. (1 to 225) for each of pair numbers (1 to 64).

Upper row: Setting for the first redundant CPU.

Lower row: Setting for the second redundant CPU.

(The same value as the value set for the first redundant CPU is displayed)

Station

No.

Set the station No. (1 to 63) of the redundant CPU for each of pair numbers (1 to 64).

Upper row: Setting for the first redundant CPU.

Lower row: Setting for the second redundant CPU.

(The value of "Setting for the first redundant CPU" + 1 is displayed)

New Create a new pair No.

Duplicate Copies one setting of the selected pair number to append it at the last line.

Delete Deletes one setting of the selected pair.

After deletion, the succeeding pair numbers are renumbered to fill the deleted pair number.

Delete All Deletes the setting of all pair numbers.

Copy All Copies the Q redundant setting on the selected CH No. tab.

Paste All Pastes the copied Q redundant setting in the selected CH No. tab.

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 53

*1 Pair number

Redundant CPU pair means the redundant CPUs (System A / System B) in the redundant system configuration. Pair number is the number assigned to each redundant CPU pair.

Example: Ethernet connection (Pair No. 1 and Pair No. 2)

POINT

Precautions for making Q redundant setting

Pay attention to the following items when making the Q redundant setting. In the setting, station Nos. of the System A CPU and System B CPU must be adjacent numbers to be set as a

pair. As long as adjacent numbers are used, allocation of them to the System A CPU and System B CPU may be determined as desired.

Pairing of the last station No. and station No. 1 (Example: Station No. 64 and station No. 1) is not allowed. Make sure that the QCPU in the station for which Q redundant setting is made is a redundant CPU.

If any of the QCPUs to which the Q redundant setting is made is not a redundant CPU, the GT SoftGOT1000 fails to automatically change the monitoring target to the control system when the system is switched.

When making the Q redundant setting for MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, or Ethernet connections, check the station Nos. of network modules before the setting. If the settings of the Q redundant setting and the actual network module station Nos. are not matched, the GT SoftGOT1000 fails to automatically change the monitoring target to the control system when the system is switched.

The redundant pair number setting is necessary in the Q redundant setting when the monitoring target changes automatically at the system switching with the host station specified in Ethernet connection. (The "Target at its own Station (0-FF)" function of the Q redundant setting is not valid in Ethernet connection.)

Redundant CPU pair (No.1)

Ethernet (Network No.1)

Station No.1

Station No.5

Station No.2

Q25PRHCPU

Power supply m

odule

Power supply m

odule

Q J71E71-100

Q25PRHCPU

Q J71E71-100

Redundant CPU pair (No.2)

Station No.3

Station No.4

Q25PRHCPU

Power supply m

odule

Power supply m

odule

Q J71E71-100

Q25PRHCPU

Q J71E71-100

GT SoftGOT1000

4 - 54 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Switch the monitor target to the control system using the script function The following explains how to create a script screen which is used for the MELSECNET/H connection and automatically changes the monitoring target (Station No.) at the occurrence of system switching even if the Q redundant setting is not made. The script executes the station number switching function or screen switching function. The following shows the advantages and disadvantages of the station number switching function and screen switching function.

The following explains how to use each function.

(1) Method for using the station number switching function

(a) As a feature of this function, monitor screens for Station No. 1 (control system) and Station No. 2 (standby system) can be created on one screen.

(b) If the system switching occurs, the GT SoftGOT1000 can change the monitoring target to the control system PLC CPU on the same monitor screen.

(c) To achieve this, the script of the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the special relay SM1515 (Control system identification flag) of the PLC CPU and stores the station number of the latest control system into the station number switching device.

(d) Restrictions: Some objects do not allow the station number to be switched.

GT Designer3 Version 1 Screen Design Manual

(e) Setting method System configuration example

Function Advantage Disadvantage

Station number switching

function

The monitor screens for Station No. 1 (control system)

and Station No. 2 (standby system) can be created on one

screen.

Some objects do not allow the station number to be

switched.

Screen switching function All objects can be used since monitor screens are created

for each station number.

Monitor screens must be created separately for Station

No. 1 (control system) and Station No. 2 (standby

system).

Connected module Network No. Station No.

MELSECNET/H network module of control system

1

1

MELSECNET/H network module of standby system 2

GT SoftGOT1000 connected to MELSECNET/H network 3

MELSECNET/H (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode) Network No. 1

Station No. 3

Control system

(System A)

Q25PRH CPU

QJ71 BR11

Standby system (System B)

Station No. 1

Q25PRH CPU

QJ71 BR11

Station No. 2

GT SoftGOT1000

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 55

1. Set the station number switching device. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [Station No. Switching], and set the internal device GD100 as the station number switching device.

2. Set the status observation. Make the settings so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (SW70) of MELSECNET/H turns ON in the project specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation].

Create the status observation in the project on the Project tab.

Condition 1 : SW70.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal.

Operation : GD100=2 Station No. is changed to 2.

Condition 1 : SW70.b1 (while ON) When b1 is ON, Station No. 2 is abnormal.

Operation : GD100=1 Station No. is changed to 1.

Condition 1 : GD100==0 The value of the Station No. changing device is 0.

Condition 2 : SW56<=2 The current control station is a redundant CPU.

Operation : GD100=SW56 Station No. is changed to a current control station.

Condition 1 : GD100==0 The value of the Station No.changing device is 0.

Condition 2 : SW56>2 The current control station is not a redundant CPU.

Operation : GD100=1 Station No. is changed to a current control station in normal condition.

Set here.

4 - 56 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

POINT

Setting for the status observation function

For the status observation function, hexadecimals cannot be used. To use the status observation function, set the N/W No. and the station No. of the PLC CPU in [Unsigned BIN]. (For the status observation function, set [Unsigned BIN] for [Storing Device])

Example: When N/W No.: 1 and Station No.: 1 (0101H) Set "257". When N/W No.: 10 and Station No.: 10 (0A0AH) Set "2570".

3. Create a monitor screen. In the device setting (network setting) of each object, set Network No. 1 and Station No. 1 of the control system.

4. Validate the station number switching function. On the Basic tab screen specified by selecting [Screen] [Screen Property], select the item [Switch Station No.] to validate the station number changing function. Make this setting for each monitor screen.

5. Change the station number switching device value in the script. By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515 status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device value. Set the trigger type of the script as [Ordinary] or [Sampling(about 3s)].

// If the monitoring target is a standby station, the Station No. is changed. if([b:SM1515]==OFF){ //Is the monitoring target standby?

if([w:GD100]==1){ //The Station No. is 1 to 2. [w:GD100]=2;

}else{ //The Station No. is 2 to 1. [w:GD100]=1;

} }

Check here.

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 57

Set the created script for each screen on the Screen tab.

HINT When the MELSECNET/H network is connected to the redundant system only, SW56 (current control station) can be set as the station number switching device. In this case, even if the system switching occurs, the GT SoftGOT1000 always monitors the station number that is currently the control station.

(2) Method for using the screen changing function

(a) As a feature of this function, monitor screens are created for each station number. When the system switching occurs, the GT SoftGOT1000 can change the monitoring target to the control system PLC CPU on the other monitor screen.

(b) To achieve this, the script of the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the special relay SM1515 (Control system identification flag) of the PLC CPU and stores the screen number corresponding to the latest station number of the control system into the screen switching devices.

(c) Precautions: There are the following 8 different screen switching devices.Set the screen switching devices for all screens to be used. Base screen switching device Overlap window 1 switching device Overlap window 2 switching device Overlap window 3 switching device Overlap window 4 switching device Overlap window 5 switching device Superimpose window 1 switching device Superimpose window 2 switching device

(d) Setting method System configuration example

Connected module Network No. Station No.

MELSECNET/H network module of control system

1

1

MELSECNET/H network module of standby system 2

GT SoftGOT1000 connected to MELSECNET/H network 3

MELSECNET/H (MELSECNET/H mode) Network No. 1

Station No. 3 Control system

(System A)

Q25PRH CPU

QJ71 BR11

Standby system (System B)

Station No. 1

Q25PRH CPU

QJ71 BR11

Station No. 2

GT SoftGOT1000

4 - 58 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

1. Set the screen switching device of the base screen. Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device GD100 as the base screen switching device.

2. Set the status observation. Set the status observation so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (SW70) of MELSECNET/H turns ON in the project specified by choosing [Common] [Status Observation].

Condition 1 : SW70.b0 (while ON) Station No. 1 is abnormal.

Condition 2 : GD100<100

Operation : GD100= GD100+100 Station No. is changed to 2.

Condition 1 : SW70.b1 (while ON) Station No. 2 is abnormal.

Condition 2 : GD100>100

Operation : GD100= GD100-100 Station No. is changed to 1.

Condition 1 : GD100==0 The value of the screen changing device is 0.

Condition 2 : SW56==1 The current control station is Station No. 1.

Operation : GD100=2 Screen No. is changed to 2 (for Station No. 1).

Condition 1 : GD100==0 The value of the screen changing device is 0.

Condition 2 : SW56==2 The current control station is Station No. 2.

Operation : GD100=102 Screen No. is changed to 102 (for Station No. 2).

Condition 1 : GD100==0 The value of the screen changing device is 0.

Condition 2 : SW56>2 The current control station is not a redundant CPU.

Operation : GD100=2 Screen No. is changed to 2 (for Station No. 1).

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 59

3. Set monitor screens. Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 1 on Screen No. 2 to 3. Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 2 on Screen No. 102 to 103.

4. Change the screen switching device value in the script. By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515 status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device value. Set the trigger type of the script as [Ordinary] or [Sampling(about 3s)].

Screen scripts

// The script of Screen No. 2 to 3 (for Station No.1)

// If the monitoring target is a standby station, the screen is changed to the other one.

if ([1-1: b: SM1515]==OFF){

//Is Station No.1 standby?

if([w: GD100]<100){

[w: GD100]= [w: GD100]+100;

//The screen is changed from Station No.1 to 2.

}

}

// The script of Screen No. 102 to 103 (for Station No.2)

// If the monitoring target is a standby station, the screen is changed to the other one.

if ([1-2: b: SM1515]==OFF){

//Is Station No.2 standby?

if([w: GD100]>100){

[w: GD100]= [w: GD100]-100;

//The screen is changed from Station No.2 to 1.

}

}

Script screen of Screen No. 2 (for Station 1) Script screen of Screen No. 102 (for Station 2)

4 - 60 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4.1.6 Access range of the data link system (MELSECNET/B, (II))

(1) CPU direct connection, Computer link connection

(a) When connecting to the master station

Local stations can be monitored. When the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored.

(b) When connecting to the local station

The master station can be monitored. However, when the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored.

Other local stations cannot be monitored.

(c) When connecting to the master station on the third layer

The master station on the second layer and local stations on the third layer can be monitored. However, when the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored.

Local stations on the second layer cannot be monitored.

(d) When connecting to ACPU or QnACPU Only other stations with the same PLC CPU type of the connected station can be monitored.

(2) Monitoring devices of other stations If devices of other stations on the data link system are monitored, the display speed will be significantly reduced. Therefore monitor the link relay (B) and link register (W) that are allocated by the link parameter.

L3

M

L1

L2

GT SoftGOT1000

GT SoftGOT1000

L1

L2

M

L3

GT SoftGOT1000 L3

M

L1

L2 m

2

1 3

4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 61

(3) Setting method of monitor device The following example describes the method of setting the network No. and the station numbers when setting monitor devices .

(a) Monitoring the connected station (host station) and B and W allocated by the link parameter Specify the host station. For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

(b) Monitoring devices of other stations Network No.: 0, Station number: Refer to the following table.

Setting of the station No.

Station to be accessed

Station connected

to GT SoftGOT1000

M L1 L2

m L3 1 2 3

M Host Other 1 Other 2 Other 3

L1 Other 0 Host

L2

m Other 0 Host Other 1 Other 2 Other 3

L3 Other 0 Host

1 Other 0 Host

2 Other 0 Host

3 Other 0 Host

GT SoftGOT1000

L3

M

L1

L2 m

2

1 3

4 - 62 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4.2 Type of PC to Be Used

The system configuration and connection conditions differ according to the type of the PC used with GT SoftGOT1000.

PC/AT compatible PC Connect a PC/AT compatible PC with the controller using a cable. Use an interface board according to the communication type.

PC CPU Mount a PC CPU to the base unit of Q series PLC CPU. Bus connection is available between PC CPUs on the same base unit. In other connection types, connect a PC CPU with the controller using a cable.

4.3 Connectable Devices

Applicable CPU Refer to the following for PLC CPUs that can be monitored from GT SoftGOT1000.

4.1.1 Controller that allows monitoring

Controllers that can be monitored in each connection type Refer to the following for GT SoftGOT1000 connection types and PLC CPUs that can be monitored in each connection type.

4.1.2 Monitorable controllers

4.4 Converter/Cable to Be Used

Converter/Cable used in GT SoftGOT1000 The converter/cable used for the GX Developer can be applied to the GT SoftGOT1000.

PC CPUPC/AT compatible PC

4.2 Type of PC to Be Used 4 - 63

4.5 Bus Connection

4.5.1 System configurations and connection conditions

*1 Connect the PC CPU with a PLC CPU on the same base unit as the PC CPU.

*2 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.

4.5.2 GT SoftGOT1000 setting

When communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to a PLC in bus connection, communication setup is required. Refer to the following for performing GT SoftGOT1000 communication setup.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

PLC

Connection cable Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000 Number of connectable

equipmentModel name Communication

type

QCPU (Q mode) Bus *1 *1 PC CPU 1*2

Main base PLC CPU PC CPU

4 - 64 4.5 Bus Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4.6 Direct CPU Connection

4.6.1 System configurations and connection conditions

*1 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be

monitored.

*2 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.

*3 RS-232 (via a QCPU in the multiple CPU system)

USB (same as QCPU (Q mode))

PLC

Connection cable Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000 Number of connectable equipment*2 Model name

Communication

type

RCPU USB

USB 1)

USB 4)

USB 6)

5m

PC/AT compatible

PC

PC CPU

1

QCPU (Q mode) RS-232

USB

RS-232 1)

USB 1)

USB 2)

USB 3)

USB 4)

USB 5)

RS-232:3m

USB:3m

1

(2 units are connectable when using

both RS-232 and USB connections.)

QCPU (A mode) RS-232 RS-232 1) 3m 1

C controller Same as QCPU (Q mode)*3

QSCPU USB USB 5) 3m

PC/AT compatible

PC

PC CPU

1

LCPU RS-232

USB

RS-232 1)

USB 1)

USB 2)

RS-232:3m

USB:3m

1

(2 units are connectable when using

both RS-232 and USB connections.)

QnACPU RS-422 RS-422 1) 15m 1

ACPU RS-422 RS-422 1) 15m 1

MELSEC iQ-F RS-232 RS-232 2) 4.5m 1

FXCPU

RS-232

RS-422

USB*5

RS-232 2)

RS-422 1)

RS-422 2)

USB 1)

RS-232:4.5m

RS-422:4.5m

USB:3m

1

Motion

controller CPU

MELSEC iQ-R

series USB

USB 1)

USB 4)

USB 6)

5m 1

Q series*1 RS-232

USB

RS-232 1)

USB 1)

USB 2)

USB 3)

USB 4)

USB 5)

RS-232:3m

USB:3m

1

(2 units are connectable when using

both RS-232 and USB connections.)

A series RS-422 RS-422 1) 15m 1

MELSECNET/H remote I/O station RS-232 RS-232 1) 3m 1

CC-Link IE Field Network head unit RS-232 USB 1)

USB 2) 3m 1

CNC C70 Same as QCPU (Q mode)*4

CRnQ-700, CR750-Q, CR751-Q

PLC CPU GT SoftGOT1000

Connection cable

4.6 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 65

*4 Access the CPU via a QCPU in the multiple CPU system.

*5 For the FX3G series and the FX3GC series, the connection with a USB cable is available.

4.6.2 Connection cable

RS-232 1)

(1) MITSUBISHI SYSTEM & SERVICE product

*1 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be

monitored.

*2 The adapter L6ADP-R2 is required for the connection with LCPU.

RS-232 2)

(1) MITSUBISHI SYSTEM & SERVICE product

Use the cables to connect to the function extension board or function adaptor of MELSEC iQ-F and FXCPU. The following table shows the available communication types.

(a) The following communication types are available in the GT01-C30R2-9S.

RS-232 cable*1*2

Controller: MINI-DIN 6-pin Personal computer: D-sub 9-pin

GT01-C30R2-6P (3m)

RS-232 cable

GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)

GT01-C30R2-25P(3m)

Model name Function expansion board Function adapter PC side connector

FX5U FX5-232-BD - 9-pin D-sub

FX5U,

FX5UC - FX5-232ADP 9-pin D-sub

FX3U series,

FX3UC series

(FX3UC- -LT)

FX3U-232-BD -

9-pin D-subFX3U-232-BD, FX3U-485-BD,

FX3U-422-BD, FX3U-USB-BD,

FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-232ADP, FX3U-232ADP-MB

FX3UC series

(FX3UC- /D,

FX3UC- /DSS)

- FX3U-232ADP, FX3U-232ADP-MB 9-pin D-sub

FX3S series

FX3G-232BD -

9-pin D-sub -

FX3S-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP,

FX3U-232ADP-MB

FX3G series

FX3G-232BD -

9-pin D-sub -

FX3S-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP,

FX3U-232ADP-MB

FX3GC series - FX3U-232ADP, FX3U-232ADP-MB 9-pin D-sub

FX2N series FX2N-232-BD -

9-pin D-sub FX2N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP

FX1NC,

FX2NC series - FX2NC-232ADP 9-pin D-sub

4 - 66 4.6 Direct CPU Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(b) The following communication types are available in the GT01-C30R2-25P.

FX1S, FX1N series FX1N-232-BD -

9-pin D-sub FX1N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP

Model name Function expansion board Function adapter PC side connector

FX3U series,

FX3UC series

(FX3UC- -LT)

FX3U-232-BD -

25-pin D-subFX3U-232-BD, FX3U-485-BD,

FX3U-422-BD, FX3U-USB-BD,

FX3U-CNV-BD

FX3U-232ADP, FX3U-232ADP-MB

FX3UC series

(FX3UC- /D,

FX3UC- /DSS)

- FX3U-232ADP, FX3U-232ADP-MB 25-pin D-sub

FX3S series

FX3G-232BD -

25-pin D-sub -

FX3S-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP,

FX3U-232ADP-MB

FX3G series

FX3G-232BD -

25-pin D-sub -

FX3S-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP,

FX3U-232ADP-MB

FX3GC series - FX3U-232ADP, FX3U-232ADP-MB 25-pin D-sub

FX2N series

FX2N-CNV-BD FX0N-232ADP 9-pin D-sub

FX2N-232-BD - 25-pin D-sub

FX2N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP

FX1NC,

FX2NC series

- FX0N-232ADP 9-pin D-sub

- FX2NC-232ADP 25-pin D-sub

FX1S, FX1N series

FX1N-CNV-BD FX0N-232ADP 9-pin D-sub

FX1N-232-BD - 25-pin D-sub

FX1N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP

Model name Function expansion board Function adapter PC side connector

4.6 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 67

RS-422 1)

(1) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product

*1 A straight cable for conversion between 9-pin D-sub and 25-pin D-sub is required separately.

*2 How to distinguish products compatible with QnACPU, ACPU.

Check the model name label of the cable.

*3 When connecting the FX-232AWC-H to the FX3UC/FX3UCPU, transmission speed of 9600/19200/38400/57600/115200 bps is

available.

When connecting the FX-232AWC or FX-232AW, either of transmission speed of 9600/19200bps is available.

PLC CPU Side(RS-422 cable) RS-232/RS-422 Converter*3 PC side (RS-232 cable)

FX-422CAB (0.3m), FX-422CAB-150 (1.5m)

(For connecting to QnACPU, ACPU, motion controller

CPU (A series), FX1CPU, FX2CPU, or FX2cCPU)

FX-232AW

FX-232AWC

FX-232AWC-H

(FX series only)

F2-232CAB(3m)*1*2

(For the 25-pin D-sub connector of the PC side)

F2-232CAB-1(3m)*2

(For the 9-pin D-sub connector of the PC side)

FX-422CAB0 (1.5m)

(For connecting to FX0/FX0S/FX0N/FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/

FX1NC/FX2NC/FX3UC/FX3U/FX3G/FX3GCCPU) AC30N2A(3m)*1

(For the 25-pin D-sub connector of the PC side)

F2-232CAB Y990C*****

F2-232CAB-1 Y990C*****

F2-232CAB(F/FX/A) Y990C*****

F2-232CAB-1(F/FX/A) Y990C*****

Icompatible products Compatible products (with indication of F/FX/A)

4 - 68 4.6 Direct CPU Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

RS-422 2)

(1) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product

*1 Drivers respectively stored in the CD-ROMs included in the FX-USB-AW and FX3U-USB-BD must be installed on the personal

computer for using the converters. (The converters can be used by assigning the USB-serial conversion driver to the COM

number.)

USB cable 1) With RCPU, LCPU, Universal model QCPU, FXCPU, or CC-Link IE Field Network head module

(1) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product

(2) Product manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.

Refer to the following for FXCPU-applicable USB cables other than the above.

FX3G USER'S MANUAL [Hardware Edition]

RS-232/RS-422 Converter PC side (RS-232 cable)

(Use the cable included in the FX-USB-AW.)

(Use the cable included in the FX3U-USB-BD.)

USB cable

Controller: USB Mini-B Personal computer: USB TYPE-A

MR-J3USBCBL3M (3m)

USB cable

Controller: USB Mini-B Personal computer: USB TYPE-A

GT09-C30USB-5P (3m)

FX-USB-AW*1

FX3U-USB-BD*1

(FX3UC/FX3U only)

4.6 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 69

USB cable 2) With LCPU, Universal model QCPU or CC-Link IE Field Network head module

(1) Product manufactured by ELECOM CO., LTD. (Recommended Product)

(2) Product manufactured by LOAS CO., LTD. (Recommended Product)

USB cable 3) With Universal model QCPU

(1) Product manufactured by ELECOM CO., LTD. (Recommended Product)

USB cable 4) With RCPU or Universal model QCPU

(1) Product manufactured by BUFFALO KOKUYO SUPPLY INC. (Recommended Product)

USB cable 5) With Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU, QSCPU

(1) Product manufactured by ELECOM CO., LTD. (Recommended Product)

USB cable

Controller: USB Mini-B Personal computer: USB TYPE-A

USB-M53 (3m)

USB cable

Controller: USB Mini-B Personal computer: USB TYPE-A

ZUM-430 (3m)

USB cable/USB conversion adapter

Controller: USB Mini-B Personal computer: USB TYPE-A

+

AD-USBBFTM5M USB2-30 (3m)

USB cable/USB conversion adapter

Controller: USB Mini-B Personal computer: USB TYPE-A

+

AUXUBM5 AU2-30(3m)

USB cable

Controller: USB TYPE-B Personal computer: USB TYPE-A

USB2-30 (3m)

4 - 70 4.6 Direct CPU Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(2) Product manufactured by BUFFALO KOKUYO SUPPLY INC. (Recommended Product)

USB cable 6) With Universal model RCPU

(1) Product manufactured by SANWA SUPPLY INC. (Recommended Product)

4.6.3 GT SoftGOT1000 setting

When communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to a PLC in CPU direct connection, communication setup is required. Refer to the following for performing GT SoftGOT1000 communication setup.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

USB cable

Controller: USB TYPE-B Personal computer: USB TYPE-A

AU2-30 (3m)

USB cable

Controller: USB Mini-B Personal computer: USB TYPE-A

KU-AMB530(3m) or KU-AMB550(5m)

4.6 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 71

4.6.4 Precautions

Converters/cables

(1) Specifications and precautions for converters/cables Refer to the manuals for each product for the specifications and precautions for converters/cables.

(2) Inserting and removing a converter/cable that receives electricity from the 5VDC power Turn the PLC CPU side power OFF before inserting and removing the converter/cable that receives electricity from the PLC CPU side 5VDC power.

(3) Inserting and removing a converter/cable that does not receive electricity from the 5VDC power Refer to the following procedures (a) to (g) when inserting and removing the peripheral device or cable that does not receive electricity from the PLC side 5VDC power (receives from an external power supply).

(a) Make sure to touch the static discharge wrist strap or grounded metal before operation and discharge electrostatic from cables, human body or others.

(b) Turn off the PC.

(c) Turn off the converter. Ground the FG terminal if provided.

(d) Insert and remove the converter/cable connected to the PC and PLC.

(e) Turn on the converter.

(f) Turn on the PC.

(g) Start the software package.

USB cable

(1) Before using USB cable The USB cable can be used with the USB driver already installed.

(2) Number of connectable programmable controllers when using USB cable A single programmable controller can be connected when using the USB cable. The following shows the system configurations, which do not meet the above conditions.

(3) Precautions for connecting programmable controller Connect or remove the USB cable, reset a programmable controller or turn the power on/off after stop the monitor.

( 3.10 Monitor Stop)

If operated without stop, a communication timeout occurs, which cannot be fixed. If not fixed, remove the USB cable completely. After 5 seconds or more, reconnect the cable. (The error may occur at first communication after the above operation. From the next time, the programmable controller functions normally.)

QCPU (Q mode)

USB cable

QCPU (Q mode) USB cable

Connecting from a personal computer with multiple USB ports to

multiple QCPUs (Qmode)

QCPU (Q mode)

USB cable USB cable

QCPU (Q mode)

USB cable

Connecting from a personal computer to multiple QCPUs (Q mode)

through USB hub

USB hub

4 - 72 4.6 Direct CPU Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4.7 Computer Link Connection

4.7.1 System configurations and connection conditions

PLC

Connection cable Max.

distance GT SoftGOT1000

Number of

connectable

equipment*1Model name Communication unit Communication

type

RCPU RJ71C24,

RJ71C24-R2

RS-232

RS-232 1)

15m

PC/AT compatible

PC

PC CPU

1

QCPU (Q mode)

QJ71C24,

QJ71C24-R2,

QJ71C24N,

QJ71C24N-R2,

QJ71CMO,

QJ71CMON

QCPU (A mode)

A1SJ71UC24-R2,

A1SJ71UC24-PRF,

A1SJ71C24-R2,

A1SJ71C24-PRF

RS-232 2)

C controller*4

MELSEC

iQ-R series

RJ71C24,

RJ71C24-R2

RS-232 1)

Q series

QJ71C24,

QJ71C24-R2,

QJ71C24N,

QJ71C24N-R2,

QJ71CMO,

QJ71CMON

LCPU LJ71C24,

LJ71C24-R2 RS-232 1)

QnACPU

AJ71QC24,

AJ71QC24-R2,

AJ71QC24N,

AJ71QC24N-R2,

A1SJ71QC24,

A1SJ71QC24-R2,

A1SJ71QC24N,

A1SJ71QC24N-R2

RS-232 2)

ACPU

AJ71C24-S8,

AJ71UC24,

A1SJ71C24-R2,

A1SJ71C24-PRF,

A1SJ71UC24-R2,

A1SJ71UC24-PRF

RS-232 2)

GT SoftGOT1000PLC CPU

Connection cable

Serial communication

module Computer link

module

4.7 Computer Link Connection 4 - 73

*1 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.

*2 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be

monitored.

*3 The multiple CPU system with the QCPU (Q mode) is mounted on.

*4 Use the serial port of a serial communication module controlled by another CPU on the multiple CPU.

4.7.2 Serial communication module, computer link module

The following table shows connectable serial communication modules and computer link modules. Connection via RS-422 communication cannot be used.

*1 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be

monitored.

Motion controller

CPU

MELSEC

iQ-R series

RJ71C24,

RJ71C24-R2

RS-232

RS-232 1)

15m

PC/AT compatible

PC

PC CPU

1

Q series*2

QJ71C24,

QJ71C24-R2,

QJ71C24N,

QJ71C24N-R2,

QJ71CMO,

QJ71CMON

RS-232 1)

A series

AJ71C24-S8,

AJ71UC24,

A1SJ71C24-R2,

A1SJ71C24-PRF,

A1SJ71UC24-R2,

A1SJ71UC24-PRF

RS-232 2)

CNC C70*3

Same as QCPU (Q mode) CRnQ-700*3

Item Model name

RCPU RJ71C24, RJ71C24-R2

QCPU (Q mode) QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71CMO, QJ71CMON

QCPU (A mode) A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF, A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-PRF

LCPU LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2

QnACPU AJ71QC24, AJ71QC24-R2, AJ71QC24N, AJ71QC24N-R2, A1SJ71QC24, A1SJ71QC24-R2,

A1SJ71QC24N, A1SJ71QC24N-R2

ACPU AJ71C24-S8, AJ71UC24, A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-PRF, A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF

Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) RJ71C24, RJ71C24-R2

Motion controller CPU (Q series)*1 QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71CMO, QJ71CMON

Motion controller CPU (A series) AJ71C24-S8, AJ71UC24, A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-PRF, A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF

PLC

Connection cable Max.

distance GT SoftGOT1000

Number of

connectable

equipment*1Model name Communication unit Communication

type

4 - 74 4.7 Computer Link Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4.7.3 Connection cable

RS-232 1)

(1) Connection example which can turn ON/OFF CD signal (No. 1 pin)

(2) Connection example which cannot turn ON/OFF CD signal (No. 1 pin) Connection example for exercising CD code control or DTR/DSR control.

RS-232 2)

(1) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product

*1 When the port on the PC side is 9-pin D-sub, a 9-25 pin converter is required separately.

RS-232 cable

Controller: D-sub 25-pin Personal computer: D-sub 25-pin

AC30N2A(3m)*1

Cable Connection and Signal Direction (Connection example for full duplex/half duplex communication)

RS(RTS)

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

DSR(DR)

SG

DTR(ER)

CD

CS(CTS)

-

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

DTR(ER)

SG

DSR(DR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

7

3

2

6

5

4

1

8

9

PLC side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GT SoftGOT1000 side

Cable Connection and Signal Direction (Connection example for full duplex)

RS(RTS)

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

DSR(DR)

SG

DTR(ER)

CD

CS(CTS)

-

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

DTR(ER)

SG

DSR(DR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

7

3

2

6

5

4

1

8

9

PLC side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GT SoftGOT1000 side

4.7 Computer Link Connection 4 - 75

(2) User-created QnA Series (large-scale QC24(N))

(a) Example of connection to an external device that allows the CD signal (No. 8 pin) to be turned ON/OFF

* DC code control or DTR/DSR control is enabled by connecting the QC24 (N) to an external device as shown above.

(b) Example of connection to an external device that does not allow the CD signal (No. 8 pin) to be turned ON/ OFF

* DC code control or DTR/DSR control is enabled by connecting the QC24 (N) to an external device as shown above.

QnA Series (compact-scale QC24(N))

(a) Example of connection to an external device that allows the CD signal (No.1 pin) to be turned ON/OFF

* DC code control or DTR/DSR control is enabled by connecting the QC24 (N) to an external device as shown above.

Cable Connection and Signal Direction (Connection example for full duplex/half duplex communication)

CS(CTS)

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

DSR(DR)

SG

DTR(ER)

RS

CD

FG

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

DTR(ER)

SG

DSR(DR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

5

2

3

6

7

20

4

8

1

PLC side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GT SoftGOT1000 side

Cable Connection and Signal Direction (Connection example for full duplex)

CS(CTS)

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

DSR(DR)

SG

DTR(ER)

RS

CD

FG

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

DTR(ER)

SG

DSR(DR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

5

2

3

6

7

20

4

8

1

PLC side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GT SoftGOT1000 side

Cable Connection and Signal Direction (Connection example for full duplex/half duplex communication)

RS(RTS)

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

DSR(DR)

SG

DTR(ER)

CD

CS(CTS)

-

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

DTR(ER)

SG

DSR(DR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

7

3

2

6

5

4

1

8

9

PLC side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GT SoftGOT1000 side

4 - 76 4.7 Computer Link Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(b) Example of connection to an external device that does not allow the CD signal (No. 1 pin) to be turned ON/ OFF

* DC code control or DTR/DSR control is enabled by connecting the QC24 (N) to an external device as shown above.

A series

(a) Connection example 1 when the C24 (computer link module) has a 25-pin connector

(b) Connection example 2 when the C24 (computer link module) has a 25-pin connector

* When performing a communication in the connection shown above, the CD signal is not required to be connected. For the RS-

232C CD terminal check setting (set by the buffer memory address "10BH"), specify "without CD terminal check (writing "1")"

Cable Connection and Signal Direction (Connection example for full duplex)

RS(RTS)

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

DSR(DR)

SG

DTR(ER)

CD

CS(CTS)

-

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

DTR(ER)

SG

DSR(DR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

7

3

2

6

5

4

1

8

9

PLC side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GT SoftGOT1000 side

Cable Connection and Signal Direction

FG

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

RS

CD

DTR(ER)

SG

CS(CTS)

DSR(DR)

FG

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

RS

CS(CTS)

DSR(DR)

SG

CD

DTR(ER)

1

3

2

4

8

20

7

5

6

PLC side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

20

GT SoftGOT1000 side

Cable Connection and Signal Direction

FG

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

RS

CD

DTR(ER)

SG

CS(CTS)

DSR(DR)

FG

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

RS

CS(CTS)

DSR(DR)

SG

CD

DTR(ER)

1

3

2

4

8

20

7

5

6

PLC side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

20

GT SoftGOT1000 side

4.7 Computer Link Connection 4 - 77

(c) Connection example 1 when the C24 (computer link module) has a 9-pin connector

(d) Connection example 2 when the C24 (computer link module) has a 9-pin connector

*1 DC code control or DTR/DSR control is enabled by connecting the DTR and DSR signals of the computer link module to an

external device as shown above.

*2 When performing a communication in the connection shown above, the CD signal is not required to be connected.

For the RS-232C CD terminal check setting (set by the buffer memory address "10BH"), specify "without CD terminal check

(writing "1")".

Cable Connection and Signal Direction

CS(CTS)

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

DSR(DR)

SG

DTR(ER)

RS(RTS)

CD

-

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

DTR(ER)

SG

DSR(DR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

8

3

2

6

5

4

7

1

9

PLC side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GT SoftGOT1000 side

Cable Connection and Signal Direction

CD

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

DSR(DR)

SG

DTR(ER)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

DTR(ER)

SG

DSR(DR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

1

3

2

6

5

4

7

8

9

PLC side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GT SoftGOT1000 side

4 - 78 4.7 Computer Link Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4.7.4 GT SoftGOT1000 side

When communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to a PLC in computer link connection, communication setup is required. The following table shows the transmission specifications for a serial communication module or a computer link module.

Refer to the following for performing GT SoftGOT1000 communication setup.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

4.7.5 Controller setting

When connecting to serial communication module (MELSEC iQ series, Q series, L series) No switch setting is required for the serial communication module (MELSEC iQ series, Q series, L series). (GOT monitors via it without making switch setting in the I/O assignment setting of GX Developer.) The following settings are also available for monitoring, according to the CH (interface) of the module to be connected with GT SoftGOT1000. For the GX Developer operating method, refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual.

Model name

Settings

Transmission

speed Data length Stop bit Parity bit Sum check

Serial communication

module

(MELSEC iQ-R series)

RJ71C24,

RJ71C24-R2

9600bps/

19200bps/

38400bps/

57600bps/

115200bps

8 bits 1 bit Yes (odd) Yes

Serial communication

module

(Q series)

QJ71C24,

QJ71C24-R2,

QJ71C24N,

QJ71C24N-R2,

QJ71CMO,

QJ71CMON

Serial communication

module

(L series)

LJ71C24,

LJ71C24-R2

Serial communication

module

(QnA series)

AJ71QC24N,

AJ71QC24N-R2,

A1SJ71QC24N,

A1SJ71QC24N-R2

AJ71QC24,

AJ71QC24-R2,

A1SJ71QC24,

A1SJ71QC24-R2

9600bps/

19200bps

Computer link module

AJ71C24-S8,

AJ71UC24,

A1SJ71C24-R2,

A1SJ71C24-PRF,

A1SJ71UC24-R2,

A1SJ71UC24-PRF

Channel where GT

SoftGOT1000 is connected

Settings

Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5

CH1 0000 0000 0000

CH2 0000 0000 0000

4.7 Computer Link Connection 4 - 79

When connecting to serial communication module (QnA series)

*1 38400 bps, 57600 bps and 115200 bps can be set only for the following modules.

AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24N-R2 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N-R2

When connecting to computer link module

(1) AJ71C24-S8

Switch Baud rate (Transmission speed)*1

9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps

Station number switch 0

Mode switch 5

sw01 OFF

sw02 ON

sw03 ON

sw04 OFF

sw05 OFF

sw06 ON

sw07 ON

sw08 OFF

sw09 ON OFF ON OFF ON

sw10 OFF ON ON ON ON

sw11 ON ON ON OFF OFF

sw12 OFF OFF OFF ON ON

Switch

RS-232 communication

Baud rate (Transmission speed)

9600bps 19200bps

Station number switch 0

Mode switch 1

sw11 OFF

sw12 ON

sw13 ON OFF

sw14 OFF ON

sw15 ON ON

sw16 ON

sw17 OFF

sw18 OFF

sw21 ON

sw22 ON

sw23 OFF

sw24 OFF

4 - 80 4.7 Computer Link Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(2) AJ71UC24

(3) A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF and A1SJ71C24-PRF

Switch

RS-232 communication

Baud rate (Transmission speed)

9600bps 19200bps

Station number switch 0

Mode switch 1

sw11 OFF

sw12 ON

sw13 ON OFF

sw14 OFF ON

sw15 ON ON

sw16 ON

sw17 OFF

sw18 OFF

sw21 ON

sw22 ON

sw23 ON

sw24 OFF

Switch

RS-232 communication

Baud rate (Transmission speed)

9600bps 19200bps

Station number switch No applicable switch

Mode switch 1

SW01 No applicable switch

SW02 No applicable switch

sw03 OFF

sw04 ON

sw05 ON OFF

sw06 OFF ON

sw07 ON ON

sw08 ON

sw09 ON

sw10 OFF

sw11 OFF

sw12 ON

4.7 Computer Link Connection 4 - 81

4.8 Ethernet Connection

4.8.1 System configurations and connection conditions

PLC Connection

cable*4 Max. distance

GT

SoftGOT1000

Number of connectable

equipment*2

Model name Ethernet module Communication

type

Personal

computer*6 PLC*7

RCPU (Built-in Ethernet port)*8

Ethernet Twisted pair

cable

100m

(max. segment

length)

PC/AT

compatible PC

PC CPU

128 128 RJ71EN71

QCPU (Q mode)

(Built-in Ethernet port)*8

Ethernet Twisted pair

cable

100m

(max. segment

length)

PC/AT

compatible PC

PC CPU 128*5 128

QJ71E71,

QJ71E71-B2,

QJ71E71-B5,

QJ71E71-100

QCPU (A mode)

AJ71E71-S3,

A1SJ71E71-B2-S3,

A1SJ71E71-B5-S3,

AJ71E71N-T,

AJ71E71N-B5,

AJ71E71N-B2,

AJ71E71N3-T,

AJ71E71N-B5T,

A1SJ71E71N-T,

A1SJ71E71N-B2,

A1SJ71E71N-B5,

A1SJ71E71N-B5T,

A1SJ71E71N3-T

Ethernet Twisted pair

cable

100m

(max. segment

length)

PC/AT

compatible PC

PC CPU

128 128

C controller

MELSEC

iQ-R series

(Built-in Ethernet port)*8

Ethernet Twisted pair

cable

100m

(max. segment

length)

PC/AT

compatible PC

PC CPU

1 128 RJ71EN71

Q series

(Built-in Ethernet port)*8

Ethernet Twisted pair

cable

100m

(max. segment

length)

PC/AT

compatible PC

PC CPU

16 128 QJ71E71,

QJ71E71-B2,

QJ71E71-B5,

QJ71E71-100

QSCPU

QJ71E71,

QJ71E71-B2,

QJ71E71-B5,

QJ71E71-100

Ethernet Twisted pair

cable

100m

(max. segment

length)

PC/AT

compatible PC

PC CPU

128 128

LCPU (Built-in Ethernet port)*8

Ethernet Twisted pair

cable

100m

(max. segment

length)

PC/AT

compatible PC

PC CPU

16 128 LJ71E71-100

Ethernet modulePLC CPU GT SoftGOT1000

Connection cable

4 - 82 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

QnACPU

AJ71QE71,

AJ71QE71-B5,

AJ71QE71N-T,

AJ71QE71N-B2,

AJ71QE71N-B5,

AJ71QE71N-B5T,

AJ71QE71N3-T,

A1SJ71QE71-B2,

A1SJ71QE71-B5,

A1SJ71QE71N-T,

A1SJ71QE71N-B2,

A1SJ71QE71N-B5,

A1SJ71QE71N-B5T,

A1SJ71QE71N3-T Ethernet Twisted pair

cable

100m

(max. segment

length)

PC/AT

compatible PC

PC CPU

128 128

ACPU

AJ71E71-S3,

A1SJ71E71-B2-S3,

A1SJ71E71-B5-S3,

AJ71E71N-T,

AJ71E71N-B5,

AJ71E71N-B2,

AJ71E71N3-T,

AJ71E71N-B5T,

A1SJ71E71N-T,

A1SJ71E71N-B2,

A1SJ71E71N-B5,

A1SJ71E71N-B5T,

A1SJ71E71N3-T

MELSEC iQ-F (Built-in Ethernet port)*8 Ethernet Twisted pair

cable

100m

(max. segment

length)

PC/AT

compatible PC

PC CPU

8 128

FXCPU FX3U-ENET-L,

FX3U-ENET-ADP Ethernet

Twisted pair

cable

100m

(max. segment

length)

PC/AT

compatible PC

PC CPU

2 128

Motion

controller CPU

MELSEC

iQ-R series RJ71EN71

Ethernet Twisted pair

cable

100m

(max. segment

length)

PC/AT

compatible PC

PC CPU

128 128

Q series*1

QJ71E71,

QJ71E71-B2,

QJ71E71-B5,

QJ71E71-100

A series

AJ71E71-S3,

A1SJ71E71-B2-S3,

A1SJ71E71-B5-S3,

AJ71E71N-T,

AJ71E71N-B5,

AJ71E71N-B2,

AJ71E71N3-T,

AJ71E71N-B5T,

A1SJ71E71N-T,

A1SJ71E71N-B2,

A1SJ71E71N-B5,

A1SJ71E71N-B5T,

A1SJ71E71N3-T

CC-Link IE Field Network

Ethernet adapter module (Built-in Ethernet port)*8

CNC C70*3 (Built-in Ethernet port)*8

PLC Connection

cable*4 Max. distance

GT

SoftGOT1000

Number of connectable

equipment*2

Model name Ethernet module Communication

type

Personal

computer*6 PLC*7

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 83

*1 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be

monitored.

*2 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.

*3 Ethernet is connected to Display I/F.

*4 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.

Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network

system.

Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.

*5 Number of connectable equipment is 16 for Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,

Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU,

Q26UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU, Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU and Q26UDPVCPU.

*6 This column shows the number of personal computers that can be connected to one PLC.

*7 This column shows the number of PLCs that can be connected to one personal computer.

*8 For the applicable CPUs, refer to the following.

4.8.2 Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card

4 - 84 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4.8.2 Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card

The following table shows connectable Built-in Ethernet port CPUs, Ethernet modules, and Ethernet boards/cards.

Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module

*1 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be

monitored.

*2 To use the FX3U-ENET-L or FX3U-ENET with the FX3UC, the FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is required.

*3 To use the FX3U-ENET-ADP, the FX3U-CNV-BD, FX3U-422-BD, or FX3U-232-BD is required.

*4 Version 3.10 or later is required.

*5 The built-in Ethernet port CPUs (CPU P1, and P1) can be used.

Item Model name

RCPU Built-in Ethernet port CPU

R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU, R16MTCPU, R32MTCPU, R08PCPU, R16PCPU,

R32PCPU, R120PCPU, R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, R120SFCPU, R04ENCPU*5,

R08ENCPU*5, R16ENCPU*5, R32ENCPU*5, R120ENCPU*5

Ethernet module RJ71EN71

QCPU (Q mode) Built-in Ethernet port CPU

Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU,

Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU,

Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU, Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU, Q26UDPVCPU

Ethernet module QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-100

QCPU (A mode)

AJ71E71-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, AJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2,

AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N-B5T,

A1SJ71E71N3-T

C controller

(MELSEC iQ-R

series)

Built-in Ethernet port CPU R12CCPU-V

Ethernet module RJ71EN71

C controller

(Q series)

Built-in Ethernet port CPU Q12DCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-LS, Q26DHCCPU-LS, Q24DHCCPU-VG

Ethernet module QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-100

QnACPU

AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5, AJ71QE71N-T, AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B5T,

AJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71-B2, A1SJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B2,

A1SJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71N3-T

ACPU

AJ71E71-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, AJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2,

AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-B5,

A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71N3-T

LCPU Built-in Ethernet port CPU L02CPU, L06CPU, L26CPU, L26CPU-BT, L02CPU-P, L06CPU-P, L26CPU-P, L26CPU-PBT

Ethernet module LJ71E71-100

Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) RJ71EN71

Motion controller CPU (Q series)*1 QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-100

Motion controller CPU (A series)

AJ71E71-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, AJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2,

AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-B5,

A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71N3-T

MELSEC iQ-F FX5U, FX5UC

FXCPU FX3U-ENET-L*2, FX3U-ENET*2, FX3U-ENET-ADP*3*4

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 85

Ethernet board/card Applicable Ethernet bords/cards are shown in the following.

POINT

When using PC CPU module

A interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.

4.8.3 Connection cable

Use a cable applicable to the Ethernet module or the Ethernet board/card to be used.

4.8.4 Controller setting

POINT

Ethernet connection

(1) Before Ethernet connection Read the manual for the Ethernet module to be used thoroughly and understand it fully before setting up the Ethernet connection.

(2) Time-out error If many devices (including GT SoftGOT1000) are connected, line traffic may become dense, causing a time- out error. If a time-out error occurs, reduce the number of connected devices or increase the time-out value in the Communication Setup of GT SoftGOT1000.

When using Built-in Ethernet port RCPU (one-to-one connection, multiple connection) The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to Built-in Ethernet port RCPU. This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host.

Manufacturer Model name Remarks

3COM EthernetLink LAN PC Card Ethernet board/card

- Ethernet board built in the personal computer as standard Ethernet board

:5006

:1 :3 :192.168.3.18

N/W No.

PLC 2

PLC 1

PC No. IP address Port No. :5006 (Fixed)

:1 :2 :192.168.3.40

:5006 (Fixed)

:1 :1 :192.168.3.39

<Built-in Ethernet port RCPU> Other station

N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No.

Host

N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No.

4 - 86 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

POINT

Setting items

Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000.

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(1) Before setting

(a) Monitoring the CPUs on other networks Monitoring the CPUs on other networks requires the routing parameter to be set. Refer to the following for how to set the routing parameters.

(4) Routing setting

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

(2) Compatible models

(3) Setting on GX Works3 (Module parameter setting) Set the Built-in Ethernet port for the module parameter setting. (multiple connection only) To make communications with GX Works3, ask the person in charge of the network about the IP address setting to confirm, and set the IP address. Set the other items according to the system used. For the details of the settings, refer to the following.

GX Works3 Operating Manual

Set IP Address of PLC1 in [IP Address].

Compatible models

R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU,

R16MTCPU, R32MTCPU, R08PCPU, R16PCPU, R32PCPU,

R120PCPU, R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, R120SFCPU,

R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU

Set IP Address for PLC1.

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 87

(4) Routing setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.

POINT

Routing parameter setting for the request source

The GOT at the request source also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(5) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.

(6) Communications check

(a) Ping test

When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on the Windows.

When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 3. 39 Reply from 192. 168. 3. 39:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 3. 39 Request timed out.

When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including

the IP address, for Windows.

Item Range

Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 120

4 - 88 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 120

Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. RCPU

IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5006

Communication Select a communication method. UDP

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 89

Routing Parameter Setting Set the routing parameter in the Routing Information Setting dialog box of GT Designer3. Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.

POINT

Routing parameter setting

Communication within the host network does not require routing parameter setting.

Refer to the following for details of routing parameter setting.

MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet User's Manual (Application)

POINT

Routing parameter setting for the relay station

The PLC at the relay station also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.

(4) Routing setting

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Range

Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 120

4 - 90 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

When using Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R series) The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to the PLC CPU via the Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R series). This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host.

POINT

Setting items

Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R series) and GT SoftGOT1000.

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(1) Before setting

(a) Monitoring the CPUs on other networks Monitoring the CPUs on other networks requires the routing parameter to be set. Refer to the following for how to set the routing parameters.

(4) Routing setting

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

(2) Compatible models

Compatible models

RJ71EN71

N/W No. PC No.

: 5001

Host

: 1 : 1 : 192.168.3.18

N/W No. PLC No. IP address Port No. : 5001 (Fixed)

: 1 : 3 : 192.168.3.40

Other station

N/W No. PLC No.

: 5001 (Fixed)

: 1 : 2 : 192.168.3.39IP address

Port No.

Port No. IP address

PLC 2

PLC 1

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 91

(3) Setting on GX Works3 (Module parameter setting) Set the Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R series) of the module parameter setting. (multiple connection only) To make communications with GX Works3, ask the person in charge of the network about the IP address setting to confirm, and set the IP address. Set the other items according to the system used. For the details of the settings, refer to the following.

GX Works3 Operating Manual

Set IP Address of PLC1 in [IP Address].

(4) Routing setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.

Item Range

Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 120

Set IP Address for PLC1.

4 - 92 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

POINT

Routing parameter setting for the request source

The GOT at the request source also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(5) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.

(6) Communications check

(a) Ping test

When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on the Windows.

When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 3. 19 Reply from 192. 168. 3. 19:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 3. 19 Request timed out.

When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including

the IP address, for Windows.

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 93

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 120

Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. RJ71EN71

IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5001

Communication Select a communication method. UDP

4 - 94 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Routing Parameter Setting Set the routing parameter in the Routing Information Setting dialog box of GT Designer3. Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.

POINT

Routing parameter setting

Communication within the host network does not require routing parameter setting.

Refer to the following for details of routing parameter setting.

MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet User's Manual (Application)

POINT

Routing parameter setting for the relay station

The PLC at the relay station also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.

(4) Routing setting

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Range

Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 120

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 95

When using Built-in Ethernet port MELSEC iQ-F (one-to-one connection, multiple connection) The setting items and precautions shown below are for the communication from GT SoftGOT1000 via Built-in Ethernet port MELSEC iQ-F. This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host.

POINT

Setting items

Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the CPU module and GT SoftGOT1000.

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(1) Before setting

(a) Precautions for monitoring The CPUs on other networks cannot be monitored.

(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

(2) Compatible models

Compatible models

FX5U, FX5UC

<Built-in Ethernet port MELSEC iQ-F> Other station

<Built-in Ethernet port MELSEC iQ-F> Other station

N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No. :5562 (Fixed)

:1 :2 :192.168.3.251

N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No. :5562 (Fixed)

:1 :1 :192.168.3.250

N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No. :5001

:1 :3 :192.168.3.18

PLC 2

PLC 1

4 - 96 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(3) Setting on GX Works3 (Module parameter setting) Set the Built-in Ethernet port for the module parameter setting. (multiple connection only) To make communications with GX Works3, ask the person in charge of the network about the IP address setting to confirm, and set the IP address. Set the other items according to the system used. For the details of the settings, refer to the following.

GX Works3 Operating Manual

Set IP Address of PLC1 in [IP Address].

(4) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.

(5) Communications check

(a) Ping test

When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on the Windows.

When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 3. 251 Reply from 192. 168. 3. 251:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 3. 251 Request timed out.

When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including

the IP address, for Windows.

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3

Set IP Address for PLC1.

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 97

(6) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 120

Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. FX5CPU

IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5562

Communication Select a communication method. TCP

4 - 98 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

When using Built-in Ethernet port QCPU (one-to-one connection, multiple connection) The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to Built-in Ethernet port QCPU. This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host.

POINT

Setting items

Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000.

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(1) Before setting

(a) Monitoring the CPUs on other networks Monitoring the CPUs on other networks requires the routing parameter to be set. Refer to the following for how to set the routing parameters.

(4) Routing setting

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

:5001

:1 :3 :192.168.0.18

N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No. :5006 (Fixed)

:1 :1 :192.168.0.1

:5006 (Fixed)

:1 :2 :192.168.0.2

<Built-in Ethernet port QCPU> Other station

N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No.

Host

N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No.

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 99

(2) Compatible models

(3) Setting on GX Developer (Q parameter setting) Set the Built-in Ethernet port for the Q parameter setting. (multiple connection only)

Compatible models

Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,

Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU,

Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU,

Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU, Q26UDPVCPU

Item Setting Screen Examples

Built-in Ethernet port

Open settings

To make communications with GX Developer, ask the person in charge of the network

about the IP address setting to confirm, and set the IP address.

Set the other items according to the specifications of other nodes and applications

connected to the Ethernet module.

4 - 100 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(4) Routing Parameter Setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.

POINT

Routing parameter setting for the request source

The GOT at the request source also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(5) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.

(6) Communications check

(a) Ping test

When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on the Windows.

When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192. 168. 0. 2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.

When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including

the IP address, for Windows.

Item Range

Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 120

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 101

POINT

Ping test

The ping test can also be performed with GX Developer (SW6D5C-GPPW 6.01B or later). For details of the ping test, refer to the following.

GX Developer Version Operating Manual

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64

Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. QnUD(P)V/QnUDEH

IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5006

Communication Select a communication method. UDP

4 - 102 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Routing Parameter Setting Set the routing parameter in the Routing Information Setting dialog box of GT Designer3. Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.

POINT

Routing parameter setting

Communication within the host network does not require routing parameter setting.

Refer to the following for details of routing parameter setting.

Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Application)

POINT

Routing parameter setting for the relay station

The PLC at the relay station also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.

(4) Routing setting

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Range

Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 120

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 103

When using Ethernet module (Q series, L series) The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to the PLC CPU via the Ethernet module. This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host.

POINT

Setting items

Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000.

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(1) Before setting

(a) Monitoring the CPUs on other networks Monitoring the CPUs on other networks requires the routing parameter to be set. Refer to the following for how to set the routing parameters.

(4) Routing setting

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

(2) Compatible models

Compatible models

QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71, LJ71E71-100

N/W No. PC No.

: 5001

Host

GT SoftGOT1000 : 1 : 3 : 192.168.0.3

N/W No. PLC No. IP address Port No. : 5001 (Fixed)

: 1 : 1 : 192.168.0.1

Other station

N/W No. PLC No.

: 5001 (Fixed)

: 1 : 2 : 192.168.0.2IP address

Port No.

Port No. IP address

Ethernet module

Ethernet module

4 - 104 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(3) Setting on GX Developer (Network parameter setting) Parameter setting can be made from the MELSECNET/ETHERNET network parameter setting screen. Set the network type, first I/O No., network No., group No., station number, mode and operation setting.

Item Setting Screen Examples

Ethernet Parameters

Operation Setting

To make communications with GX Developer, ask the person in charge of the network

about the IP address setting to confirm, and set the IP address.

Set the other items according to the specifications of other nodes and applications

connected to the Ethernet module compatible with QCPU or LCPU.

The following are the operation setting items that can be set on GX Developer.

[Communication data code]: Either the binary code or ASCII code can be specified.

[Initial timing]: Communications can be made from GX Developer even when the PLC

CPU is in the STOP status.

[Enable Write at RUN time]: The online change or device test can be performed with GX

Developer.

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 105

(4) Routing Parameter Setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.

POINT

Routing parameter setting for the request source

The GOT at the request source also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(5) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.

(6) Communications check

(a) Ping test

When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on the Windows.

When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192. 168. 0. 2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.

When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including

the IP address, for Windows.

Item Range

Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 120

4 - 106 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

POINT

Ping test

The ping test can also be performed with GX Developer (SW6D5C-GPPW 6.01B or later). For details of the ping test, refer to the following.

GX Developer Version Operating Manual

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64

Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. QJ71E71/LJ71E71

IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5001

Communication Select a communication method. UDP

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 107

Routing Parameter Setting Set the routing parameter in the Routing Information Setting dialog box of GT Designer3. Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.

POINT

Routing parameter setting

Communication within the host network does not require routing parameter setting.

Refer to the following for details of routing parameter setting.

Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Application)

POINT

Routing parameter setting for the relay station

The PLC at the relay station also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.

(4) Routing setting

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Range

Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 120

4 - 108 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

When using Built-in Ethernet port LCPU (one-to-one connection, multiple connection) The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to Built-in Ethernet port LCPU. This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host.

POINT

Setting items

Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the CPU module and GT SoftGOT1000.

(6) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(1) Before setting

(a) Precautions for monitoring The CPUs on other networks cannot be monitored.

(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

(2) Compatible models

Compatible models

L02CPU, L06CPU, L26CPU, L26CPU-BT, L02CPU-P,

L06CPU-P, L26CPU-P, L26CPU-PBT

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 3 IP address: 192.168.0.18 Port No.: 5001

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1 IP address: 192.168.0.1 Port No.: 5006 (Fixed)

N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2 IP address: 192.168.0.2 Port No.: 5006 (Fixed)

Other station

Host station

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 109

(3) Setting on GX Developer (L parameter setting) Set the Built-in Ethernet port for the L parameter setting. (multiple connection only)

(4) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.

Item Setting Screen Examples

Built-in Ethernet port

To make communications with GX Developer, ask the person in charge of the network

about the IP address setting to confirm, and set the IP address.

Set the other items according to the specifications of other nodes and applications

connected to the Ethernet module.

Open settings

4 - 110 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(5) Communications check

(a) Ping test

When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on the Windows.

When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192. 168. 0. 2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.

When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including

the IP address, for Windows.

POINT

Ping test

The ping test can also be performed with GX Developer (SW6D5C-GPPW 6.01B or later). For details of the ping test, refer to the following.

GX Developer Version Operating Manual

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 111

(6) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64

Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. LCPU

IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5006

Communication Select a communication method. UDP

4 - 112 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

When using C Controller module For communications with GT SoftGOT1000 via C Controller module, setting items and precautions are described below. This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host.

POINT

Setting items

Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of C Controller module and GT SoftGOT1000.

(6) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(1) Before setting

(a) Precautions for monitoring GT SoftGOT1000 cannot monitor CPUs on the other networks.

(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

(2) Compatible models

Compatible models

R12CCPU-V, Q12DCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-VG, Q26DHCCPU-LS,

Q24DHCCPU-LS

N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No. :5001

:1 :3 :192.168.0.3

N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No. :5006 (Fixed)

:1 :1 :192.168.0.1

N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No. :5006 (Fixed)

:1 :2 :192.168.0.2

Other station

Host

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 113

(3) Setting on C Controller setting utility (Parameter setting) Set the parameter on C Controller setting utility. Use SW3PVC-CCPU-J Ver.3.05F or later for the C Controller setting utility. For details of the C Controller setting utility, refer to the following manual.

C Controller Module User's Manual (Utility Operation, Programming)

Item Setting Screen Examples

Connection settings

If the IP address of the C controller module has been changed, input the changed IP

address or host name.

If the account of the C controller module has been changed, input the changed user name

and password.

Online operation

Detailed settings

System settings

4 - 114 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(4) Setting on personal computer Set the IP address.

(5) Communications check

(a) Ping test When C Controller module is ready for communications, execute the Ping command with the command

prompt of Windows.

When the Ping test is verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192.168.0.2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When the Ping test is not verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.

When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including

the IP address, for Windows.

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 115

(6) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

*1: Set the same value as that of GOT N/W No.

*2: Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No. and the PLC No. of other PLCs on the same network.

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication Setup

Make the settings in the Communication Setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. Refer to the following for details of Communication Setup.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target C Controller module. 1 to 239*1

PLC No. Set the station number of the target C Controller module. 1 to 64*2

Type Set the type of the target C Controller module. QnD(H)CCPU

IP address Set the IP address of the target C Controller module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No. Set the port number of the target C Controller module. 5006 (fixed)

Communication Select a communication method. UDP (fixed)

4 - 116 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

When using Ethernet module (QnA series) The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to the PLC CPU via the Ethernet module (QnA series). This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host.

POINT

Setting items

Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000.

(8) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(1) Before setting

(a) Monitoring the CPUs on other networks Monitoring the CPUs on other networks requires the routing parameter to be set. Refer to the following for how to set the routing parameters.

(5) Routing Parameter Setting

(8) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(b) Precautions for communication Only communications within the same segment are applicable.

No communications via a router or gateway can be monitored. When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

Host N/W No.

PLC No. : 1 : 2 : 192.168.0.2 : 5001 (Fixed)

Other station N/W No.

Port No. IP address PLC No.

: 1 : 1 : 192.168.0.1 : 5001 (Fixed)

N/W No. PC No.

: 1 : 3 : 192.168.0.3 : 5001

Port No. IP address

Port No. IP address

Ethernet module (QnA series)

Ethernet module (QnA series)

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 117

(2) Compatible models*1

*1 When using AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B2 or A1SJ71QE71-B5, use a module or PLC CPU of function version B

or later.

(3) Ethernet module (QnA series) switch settings Operation mode setting switch: 0 (online) Automatic start mode: SW3 ON

When SW3 is ON, initial processing is performed independently of Y19 (initial processing request). Communications are also enabled if the CPU module is stopped. For the initial processing using Y19 (initial processing request), create the program for initial processing while referring to the "For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual".

(4) Setting on GX Developer (Network parameter setting) On the MELSECNET/Ethernet setting screen of network parameter, set the network type, starting I/O No., network No., group No., station number and IP address.

Compatible models

AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, AJ71QE71N-B5T,

AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B2,

A1SJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B2

Item Setting screen example

Ethernet Parameters

IP Address Setting

4 - 118 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(5) Routing Parameter Setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.

POINT

Routing parameter setting for the request source

The GOT at the request source also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.

(8) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(6) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.

Item Range

Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 120

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 119

(7) Communications check

(a) Ping test

When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on the Windows.

When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192. 168. 0. 2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.

When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including

the IP address, for Windows.

POINT

Ping test

The ping test can also be performed with GX Developer (SW6D5C-GPPW 6.01B or later). For details of the ping test, refer to the following.

GX Developer Version Operating Manual

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3

4 - 120 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(8) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

Routing Parameter Setting Set the routing parameter in the Routing Information Setting dialog box of GT Designer3. Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.

POINT

Routing parameter setting

Communication within the host network does not require routing parameter setting.

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64

Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. AJ71QE71

IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5001

Communication Select a communication method. UDP

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 121

Refer to the following for details of routing parameter setting.

For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual

POINT

Routing parameter setting for the relay station

The PLC at the relay station also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.

(5) Routing Parameter Setting

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Range

Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 120

4 - 122 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

When using Ethernet module (A series) The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to the PLC CPU via the Ethernet module (A series). This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host.

POINT

Setting items

The N/W No. and PLC No. to be specified for Ethernet connection to the E71 should be those set as desired on GT Designer3. Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000.

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

The following shows the procedure for performing communications via E71.

(1) Before setting

(a) Monitoring precautions The connection target cannot be monitored via MELSECTNET/10 or MELSECNET/H.

(b) Communication precautions Only communications within the same segment can be monitored.

No communications via a router or gateway can be monitored. When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

Host

N/W No. : 1

Port No. : 5001

IP address : 192.168.0.2 PLC No. : 2

Other station

N/W No. : 1

Port No. : 5001

IP address : 192.168.0.1 PLC No. : 1

N/W No. : 1

Port No. : 5001

IP address : 192.168.0.3 PC No. : 3

Ethernet module (A series)

Ethernet module (A series)

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 123

(2) Compatible models

(3) E71 switch settings

(4) Sequence programs Initial processing and communication line open processing sequence programs are needed. Necessary communication parameters and sequence program examples are given below.

(a) Communication parameters The following are the communication parameter setting examples for the host side.

*1 Value specified for application setting

The user can change the settings of 1), 2) and 3).

4), 5) and 6) are fixed settings. The following shows details of the application setting.

1): Fixed buffer application

0: For send/no communication 1: For receive

2): Existence check

0: No 1: Yes

3): Paring open

0: No 1: Yes

4): Communication system (Set to 1: UDP/IP)

5): Fixed buffer communication (Set to 0: With procedure)

0: With procedure 1: Without procedure

6): Open system (Set to 00: Active, UDP/IP)

*2: The other node port number is a fixed setting.

The user can change the other settings.

Compatible models

AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5T,

AJ71E71-S3, A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-T,

A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S

Switch

AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5,

A1SJ71E71-B2-S3, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3

AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T,

AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3,

A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5,

A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-T,

A1SJ71E71N-B5T

Operation mode setting switch 0 (Online mode) 0 (Online mode)

Exchange condition

setting switch

Data code setting SW2 OFF (Binary code) SW2 OFF (Binary code)

CPU exchange timing setting SW7 ON (Online change enabled) SW3 ON (Online change enabled)

Setting item Set value

Application setting*1 100H

IP address of E71 192.168.0.2

E71 port number 5001

IP address of other node FFFFFFFFH

Other node port number*2 FFFFH

b12b15 b14 b13 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

5)6) 1)2)3)4)

4 - 124 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(b) Sequence program In a communications-ready status, the E71's RUN LED comes on and RDY LED flickers.

(5) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.

(6) Communications check

(a) Ping test

When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on the Windows.

When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192. 168. 0. 2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.

When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including

the IP address, for Windows.

IP address of Ethernet module(192.168.0.2)

Initial request

COM. ERR turned off request

Clear the initial fault code.

Set to the permit of communication while stopping the PLC CPU.

Communication format(UDP/IP)

Port No. of Ethernet module(5001)

IP address of GT SoftGOT (When GT SoftGOT is used, FFFFFFFFH) Port No. of GT SoftGOT (When GT SoftGOT is used, FFFFH)

Read the initial fault code.

Request to open

Normal completed initial

No. 1 open completed

Initial request

COM. ERR turned off command

Initial fault detection

WDT ERR detection

Turned on at first scan only while running

WDT ERR detection

* Initial processing

* Opening processing of communication line

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 125

POINT

Ping test

The ping test can also be performed with GX Developer (SW6D5C-GPPW 6.01B or later). For details of the ping test, refer to the following.

GX Developer Version Operating Manual

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64

Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. AJ71QE71

IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 1024 to 65534

Communication Select a communication method. UDP

4 - 126 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

When using Ethernet module (FX series) The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to the PLC CPU via the Ethernet module (FX series). This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host

For FX3U-ENET-L

For FX3U-ENET

POINT

Setting items

Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000.

(8) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

Host station N/W No.

Port No. IP address PC No.

: 1 : 2 : 192.168.0.2 : 5551 (Fixed)

Other station N/W No.

Port No. IP address PC No.

: 1 : 1 : 192.168.0.1 : 5551 (Fixed)

N/W No.

Port No. IP address PC No.

: 1 : 3 : 192.168.0.3 : 5001

Ethernet module (FX series)

Ethernet module (FX series)

Host station N/W No.

Port No. IP address PC No.

: 1 : 2 : 192.168.0.2 : 5551 (Fixed)

Other station N/W No.

Port No. IP address PC No.

: 1 : 1 : 192.168.0.1 : 5551 (Fixed)

N/W No.

Port No. IP address PC No.

: 1 : 3 : 192.168.0.3 : 5001

Ethernet module (FX series)

Ethernet module (FX series)

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 127

(1) Before setting

(a) Precautions for monitoring The CPUs on other networks cannot be monitored.

(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

(2) Compatible models

Compatible models

FX3U-ENET-L FX3U-ENET FX3U-ENET-ADP

4 - 128 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(3) Setting with FX Configurator-EN-L or FX Configurator-EN (network parameter setting) Set the Ethernet parameter with FX Configurator-EN-L or FX Configurator-EN. GX Developer Ver.8.88S or later is required to use the FX Configurator-EN-L. For the details of the FX Configurator-EN-L, refer to the following manual.

FX Configurator-EN-L Operation Manual

To use FX Configurator-EN, GX-Developer Ver.8.25B or later is required. For details of FX Configurator-EN, refer to the following manual.

FX Configurator-EN Operation Manual

Item Setting Screen Examples

Ethernet Module settings

Set the Ethernet station No. in the Ethernet module setting.

Set the station No. of the Ethernet module not to overlap with the station No. of GT

SoftGOT1000.

Operation settings

Since the port No. 5551 is used, the operation , regardless of the settings, is as follows.

Communication data code setting: [Binary code]

Initial timing: [Always wait for OPEN] (Communication is applicable while stopping the

PLC CPU.)

Open settings

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 129

(4) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.

(5) Communications check

(a) Ping test

When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on Windows.

When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192. 168. 0. 2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.

When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including

the IP address, for Windows.

POINT

Ping test

A ping test can be performed also with FX Configurator-EN-L or FX Configurator-EN. For details of the ping test, refer to the following.

FX Configurator-EN-L Operation Manual

FX Configurator-EN Operation Manual

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3

4 - 130 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(6) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64

Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. FX

IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5551

Communication Select a communication method. TCP

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 131

When using CNC C70 (Q17nNCCPU) For communications with GT SoftGOT1000 via the Display I/F of the CNC C70, setting items and precautions are described below. This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below.

POINT

Before creating Display I/F connection

(1) Display I/F connection For the Display I/F connection, read the following manual carefully, and fully understand the details.

C70 Setup Manual

(2) Setting items Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., IP address, and port No. of the CNC C70 and GT SoftGOT1000.

When using CNC C70 (Q17nNCCPU)

(1) Before setting

(a) Precautions for monitoring GT SoftGOT1000 cannot monitor CPUs on the other networks.

(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

(2) Compatible models

Compatible models

Q173NCCPU

N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No. : 5001

: 1 : 3 : 192.168.0.18

N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No. : 5001 (Fixed)

: 1 : 2 : 192.168.0.19

Host

4 - 132 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(3) Setting with remote monitor tool (IP address setting)

: Required : Set if necessary : Not required

(4) Setting on personal computer Set the IP address.

(5) Communication check

(a) Ping test The INIT.LED of the CNC C70 turns on when the CNC C70 is ready for communications. When the CNC C70 is ready for communications, execute the Ping command with the command prompt of

Windows.

When the Ping test is verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 19

Reply from 192.168.0.19:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When the Ping test is not verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 19

Request timed out.

When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including

the IP address, for Windows.

Item Setting Setting

(with GOT connected)

IP address 192.168.0.19

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0

Gateway address 0.0.0.0

Port number 64758 (Fixed)

Speed auto/10M 0 (Fixed)

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 133

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3

(6) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64

Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. Q17nNC

IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5001

Communication Select a communication method. UDP

4 - 134 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

When using CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to the PLC CPU via the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module.

POINT

Setting items

Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module and GT SoftGOT1000.

(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

The following shows the procedure for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to the PLC CPU via the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module.

(1) Before setting

(a) Precautions for monitoring The GOT cannot monitor the host station.

(b) Monitoring the CPUs on other networks Monitoring the CPUs on other networks requires the routing parameter to be set. Refer to the following for how to set the routing parameters.

(4) Routing Parameter Setting

(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(c) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

N/W No. PC No. IP address

Port No. :5001 (Fixed)

:3 :1 :192.168.3.18

Network type N/W No. PC No. Total stations :2

:CC IE Field (Master station) :1 :0

HUB

IP address N/W No. Station No.

:192.168.3.30 :3 :30

Network type N/W No. PC No.

:CC IE Field (Local station) :1 :0

Ethernet

CC-Link IE Field Network

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 135

(2) Compatible models

(3) Setting on GX Developer (Network parameter setting) Parameter setting can be made from the Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET network parameter setting screen. Set the network type, network No., total stations and station number.

(4) Routing Parameter Setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.

Compatible models

NZ2GF-ETB

Item Setting Screen Examples

Ethernet parameter

Setting item Range

Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 120

4 - 136 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

POINT

Routing parameter setting for the request source

The GOT at the request source also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.

(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(5) Parameter setting Set the parameter with the Ethernet adapter unit setting tool. For details of the Ethernet adapter unit setting tool, refer to the following manual.

CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual

(6) Setting on personal computer Set the IP address.

(7) Communications check

(a) Ping test When C Controller module is ready for communications, execute the Ping command with the command

prompt of Windows.

When the Ping test is verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192.168.0.2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When the Ping test is not verified

Item Setting Screen Examples

CC-Link IE Field

Network Setting

For the network No., set the same value as the setting on the PLC side.

For the station No., set a value other than the setting on the PLC side.

Ethernet Setting

Set the IP address within the following range.

192.168. 3. 30

Set the fourth octet within the range from 1 to 64.

Set the third octet within the range from 1 to 239.

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 137

C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.

When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including

the IP address, for Windows.

POINT

Ping test

The ping test can also be performed with GX Developer (SW6D5C-GPPW 6.01B or later). For details of the ping test, refer to the following.

GX Developer Version Operating Manual

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3

(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

*1 Set according to the third octet (network No.) of the Ethernet adapter unit IP address.

*2 Set according to the fourth octet (PC No.) of the Ethernet adapter unit IP address.

*3 Set according to the Ethernet adapter unit IP address.

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No.*1 Set the network number of the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet

adapter module. 1 to 239

PLC No.*2 Set the station number of the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet

adapter module. 1 to 64

Type Set the type of the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module. NZ2GF-ETB

IP address*3 Set the IP address of the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter

module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No. Set the port number of the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter

module. 5001

Communication Select a communication method. UDP

4 - 138 4.8 Ethernet Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Routing Parameter Setting Set the routing parameter in the Routing Information Setting dialog box of GT Designer3. Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.

POINT

Routing parameter setting

Communication within the host network does not require routing parameter setting.

Refer to the following for details of routing parameter setting.

Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Application)

POINT

Routing parameter setting for the relay station

The PLC at the relay station also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.

(4) Routing Parameter Setting

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Setting item Range

Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 0 to 120

4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 139

4.9 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 Connection

4.9.1 System configurations and connection conditions

*1 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be

monitored.

*2 Distance between stations for using QSI optical cable and 5C-2V coaxial cable.

The overall distance and distance between stations differs according to the type and the number of total stations for the cable to

be used.

For details on the cable, refer to the following manual.

Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

*3 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.

*4 Applicable when using one MELSECNET/H board per personal computer.

Up to four MELSECNET/H boards can be mounted per personal computer.

*5 The multiple CPU system with the QCPU (Q mode) is mounted on.

PLC Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000

Number of connectable

equipmentModel name Network module Communication type

QCPU

QJ71LP21,

QJ71LP21-25,

QJ71LP21S-25,

QJ71BR11,

AJ71LP21,

A1SJ71LP21,

AJ71BR11,

A1SJ71BR11 MELSECNET/H

MELSECNET/10

Optical fiber cable:

1km*2

Coaxial cable:

500m*2

PC/AT compatible PC

PC CPU

Optical fiber cable: 64*3*4

Coaxial cable: 32*3*4

C controller

QJ71LP21-25,

QJ71LP21S-25,

QJ71BR11

QSCPU

QJ71LP21,

QJ71LP21-25,

QJ71LP21S-25,

QJ71BR11

QnACPU

AJ71QLP21,

AJ71QLP21S,

A1SJ71QLP21,

A1SJ71QLP21S,

AJ71QBR11,

A1SJ71QBR11 MELSECNET/10

ACPU

AJ71LP21,

A1SJ71LP21,

AJ71BR11,

A1SJ71BR11

Motion controller

CPU

Q series*1

QJ71LP21,

QJ71LP21-25,

QJ71LP21S-25,

QJ71BR11

MELSECNET/H

MELSECNET/10

A series

AJ71LP21,

A1SJ71LP21,

AJ71BR11,

A1SJ71BR11

MELSECNET/10

CNC C70*5

Same as QCPU (Q mode) CRnQ-700*5

PLC CPU MELSECNET/H network module, MELSECNET/10 network module

GT SoftGOT1000

Connection cable

4 - 140 4.9 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4.9.2 Network module, interface board

The following shows connectable network modules and interface boards.

Network module

(1) MELSECNET/H

*1 Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET/H network module and CPU.

(2) MELSECNET/10

*1 Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET/H network module and CPU.

Interface board

Refer to the following manual for the settings of the interface board.

MELSECNET/H Interface Board User's Manual (For SW0DNC-MNETH-B)

POINT

When using PC CPU module

A interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.

Item Model name

Optical loop Coaxial bus

QCPU (Q mode)*1

QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1QSCPU

Motion controller CPU (Q Series)

C controller QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1

Item Model name

Optical loop Coaxial bus

QCPU(Q mode)*1 QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1

C controller QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1

QCPU(A mode) AJ71LP21, A1SJ71LP21 AJ71BR11, A1SJ71BR11

QSCPU QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1

QnACPU AJ71QLP21, AJ71QLP21S, A1SJ71QLP21,

A1SJ71QLP21S AJ71QBR11, A1SJ71QBR11

ACPU AJ71LP21, A1SJ71LP21 AJ71BR11, A1SJ71BR11

Motion controller CPU (Q mode) QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1

Motion controller CPU (A mode) AJ71LP21, A1SJ71LP21 AJ71BR11, A1SJ71BR11

Type Model name Bus format Driver

MELSECNET/H

Q80BD-J71LP21-25 (Optical loop), Q80BD-J71LP21G (Optical loop),

Q80BD-J71LP21S-25 (Optical loop, with external power supply

function), Q80BD-J71BR11 (Coaxial loop)

PCI SWODNC-MNETH-B

Q81BD-J71LP21-25 (Coaxial loop) PCI Express

4.9 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 Connection 4 - 141

4.9.3 Connection cable

The cables are the same as the fiber-optic cables and coaxial cables used in the MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 network system. Refer to the following for details of cables.

Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

4.9.4 GT SoftGOT1000 setting

When communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to a PLC in MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 network system, communication setup is required. Refer to the following for performing GT SoftGOT1000 communication setup.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

4.9.5 Controller setting

For the settings of the MELSECNET/H network module and MELSECNET/10 network module, refer to the following.

Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

4 - 142 4.9 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4.10 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection

4.10.1 System configurations and connection conditions

*1 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be

monitored.

*2 Distance between stations for using the fiber-optic cable (core/cladding = 50/125(m)).

The overall distance and distance between stations differs according to the type and the number of total stations for the cable to

be used.

For details on the cable, refer to the following manual.

CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual

*3 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.

*4 The multiple CPU system with the QCPU (Q mode) is mounted on.

4.10.2 Network module, interface board

The following shows connectable network modules and interface boards.

Network module

PLC Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000

Number of connectable

equipmentModel name Network module Communication type

RCPU RJ71GP21-SX

CC-Link IE Controller

Network 550m*2

PC/AT compatible PC

PC CPU 120*3

QCPU QJ71GP21-SX,

QJ71GP21S-SX

C controller

MELSEC iQ-R

series RJ71GP21-SX

Q series QJ71GP21-SX,

QJ71GP21S-SX

QSCPU QJ71GP21-SX,

QJ71GP21S-SX

Motion controller

CPU

MELSEC iQ-R

series RJ71GP21-SX

Q Series*1 QJ71GP21-SX,

QJ71GP21S-SX

CNC C70*4

Same as QCPU (Q mode) CRnQ-700*4

Item Model name

RCPU RJ71GP21-SX

C controller MELSEC iQ-R series

QCPU (Q mode)

QJ71GP21-SX, QJ71GP21S-SX C controller Q Series

QSCPU

Motion controller CPU Q Series

PLC CPU CC-Link IE Controller Network module GT SoftGOT1000

Connection cable

4.10 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection 4 - 143

Interface board

Refer to the following manual for the settings of the interface board.

CC-Link IE Controller Network Interface Board User's Manual (For SW1DNC-MNETG-B)

POINT

When using PC CPU module

An interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.

4.10.3 Connection cable

The cables are the same as the fiber-optic cables used in the CC-Link IE Controller Network. Refer to the following for details of cables.

CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual

4.10.4 GT SoftGOT1000 setting

When communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to a PLC in CC-Link IE Controller Network, communication setup is required. Refer to the following for performing GT SoftGOT1000 communication setup.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

4.10.5 Controller setting

For the settings of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module, refer to the following.

CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual

Type Model name Bus format Driver

CC-Link IE Controller

Q80BD-J71GP21-SX, Q80BD-J71GP21S-SX PCI

SW1DNC-MNETG-BQ81BD-J71GP21-SX (Coaxial loop),

Q81BD-J71GP21S-SX (Optical loop, with external power supply function) PCI Express

4 - 144 4.10 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4.11 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection

4.11.1 System configurations and connection conditions

*1 Compatible with only the universal model QCPU.

*2 The multiple CPU system with the QCPU (Q mode) is mounted on.

*3 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be

monitored.

*4 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.

*5 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.

Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network

system.

Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 1000BASE-T, ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (category 5e) standard.

PLC

connection cable *5 Max. distance GT

SoftGOT1000

Number of

connectable

equipmentModel name Network module Communication

type

RCPU

RJ71GF11-T2,

RJ71EN71,

RD77GF4,

RD77GF8,

RD77GF16

CC-Link IE

Field Network

Ethernet cable that

meets

the 1000BASE-T

standard:

Category 5e or

higher,

(double-shielded,

STP)

straight cable.

100m

(Maximum

segment length)

PC/AT

compatible PC

PC CPU 120*4

QCPU(Q mode) *1 QJ71GF11-T2

C controller

MELSEC iQ-R

series

RJ71GF11-T2,

RJ71EN71,

RD77GF4,

RD77GF8,

RD77GF16

Q series QJ71GF11-T2

QSCPU QS0J71GF11-T2

LCPU LJ71GF11-T2

Motion

controller CPU

MELSEC iQ-R

series

RJ71GF11-T2,

RJ71EN71,

RD77GF4,

RD77GF8,

RD77GF16

Q Series*3 QJ71GF11-T2

CNC C70*2

Same as QCPU (Q mode) CRnQ-700*2

GT SoftGOT1000PLC CPU

Connection cable

CC-Link IE Field Network module

4.11 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection 4 - 145

4.11.2 Network module, interface board

The following shows connectable network modules and interface boards.

Network module

Interface board

Refer to the following manual for the settings of the interface board.

CC-Link IE Field Network Interface Board User's Manual(For SW1DNC-CCIEF-B)

POINT

When using PC CPU module

An interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.

4.11.3 GT SoftGOT1000 setting

When communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to a PLC in the CC-Link IE Field Network system, communication setup is required. Refer to the following for performing GT SoftGOT1000 communication setup.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

4.11.4 Controller setting

For the settings of the CC-Link IE Field Network module, refer to the following.

CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual

Item Model name

RCPU RJ71GF11-T2, RJ71EN71, RD77GF4, RD77GF8,

RD77GF16C controller MELSEC iQ-R series

QCPU (Q mode)

QJ71GF11-T2C controller Q series

Motion controller CPU Q Series

QSCPU QS0J71GF11-T2

LCPU LJ71GF11-T2

Type Model name Bus format Driver

CC-Link IE Field Q81BD-J71GF11-T2 PCI Express SW1DNC-CCIEF-B

4 - 146 4.11 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4.12 CNC Connection

4.12.1 Direct CPU connection

System configurations and connection conditions

*1 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.

Connection cable The user is required to make a conversion cable for connecting to the MELDAS C6/C64. The following describes the connection diagram for each cable and specifications of connectors.

(1) RS-232 1)

(a) Connection diagram

(b) Connector specifications PC side connector

Use the connector compatible with the PC side. MELDAS C6/C64 side connector

Use the connector compatible with MELDAS C6/C64 side. For details, refer to the following manual.

User's Manual for the MELDAS C6/C64

(c) Precautions for creating cables The length of the conversion cable must be 15m or shorter.

GT SoftGOT1000 setting When communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to a MELDAS C6/C64 in CPU direct connection, communication setup is required. Refer to the following for performing GT SoftGOT1000 communication setup.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

PLC Connection cable Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000

Number of connectable

equipmentModel name Communication type

MELDAS C6/C64 RS-232 RS-232 1) 15m PC/AT compatible PC

PC CPU 1*1

GT SoftGOT1000MELDAS C6/C64

Connection cable

GT SoftGOT1000 side

1

6

16

-

11

-

-

18

-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GND

SD

RD(RXD)

-

GND

-

-

ER(DTR)

-

GND

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

-

GND

DR(DSR)

-

CS(CTS)

-

MELDAS C6/C64 side (20 pin half pitch)

*1

4.12 CNC Connection 4 - 147

4.12.2 Ethernet connection

System configurations and connection conditions

*1 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.

*2 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.

Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network

system.

Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.

Connection cable Use a cable applicable to the Ethernet module to be used.

Controller setting The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to the MELDAS C6/C64. This section describes the system configuration to monitor the host station as shown below.

POINT

Setting items

Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the MELDAS C6/ C64 and GT SoftGOT1000.

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

PLC

Connection cable*2 Max. distance GT

SoftGOT1000

Number of

connectable

equipmentModel name Extension unit Communication type

MELDAS C6/C64 FCU6-EX875 Ethernet Twisted pair cable

100m

(max. segment

length)

PC/AT

compatible PC 128*1

Connection cable

GT SoftGOT1000 MELDAS C6/C64

Extension unit

N/W No.

PC No.

:1

:2 :192.168.0.2

:5001

N/W No.

PC No.

:1

:1 :192.168.0.1

:5001

:1

:3 :192.168.0.3

:5001

Other station

Host

Port No.

IP address

IP address Port No.

N/W No.

PC No.

Port No.

IP address

4 - 148 4.12 CNC Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

The following shows the procedure for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to the MELDAS C6/C64.

(1) Before setting

(a) Precautions for monitoring GT SoftGOT1000 cannot monitor CPUs on the other networks.

(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

(2) Compatible models

(3) Network parameter setting Set the network parameters by peripheral devices and write them to the MELDAS C6/C64. The following shows an example of the parameter setting for GX Developer. Set the start I/O No. that corresponds to the extension slot to be connected with the Ethernet unit. When using two extension slots, unit numbers are assigned as shown in the following figures from 1) to 3).

(a) Start I/O No.

Compatible models

FCA C6, FCA C64

Extension

slot

Start I/O

No. Mounting position of extension unit

EXT1 0200

EXT2 0280

EXT3 0300

EXT2

EXT1

Unit2

Unit1

EXT3

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT1

(e)When mounted in EXT2 only (f)When mounted in EXT3 only

EXT2

EXT3

(a)When mounted in EXT1 and EXT2 (b)When mounted in EXT1 and EXT3 (c)When mounted in EXT2 and EXT3

(d)When mounted in EXT1 only

Unit2

Unit2 Unit1 Unit1

Unit1Unit1 Unit1

4.12 CNC Connection 4 - 149

(b) Example of GX Developer setting

For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following.

MELDAS C6/C64 NETWORK MANUAL BNP-B2373

POINT

IP address setting

The IP address setting on GX Developer is invalid. Set the IP address by the 7-segment LED and rotary switch of the MELDAS C6/C64 side, referring to the next page.

4 - 150 4.12 CNC Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(4) MELDAS C6/C64 side parameter setting Set the IP address, gateway address, subnet mask, and port No. for the 7-segment LED and rotary switch of the MELDAS C6/C64 side, and then check the settings. For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following.

MELDAS C6/C64 NETWORK MANUAL BNPB2373 IV Setting the Ethernet IP Address

(5) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.

(6) Communications check

(a) Ping test

When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on the Windows.

When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192. 168. 0. 2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.

When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including

the IP address, for Windows.

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3

7-segment LED

Rotary switch

4.12 CNC Connection 4 - 151

(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64

Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. AJ71QE71

IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5001

Communication Select a communication method. UDP

4 - 152 4.12 CNC Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4.13 Robot Controller Connection

4.13.1 System configurations and connection conditions

*1 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.

*2 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.

Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network

system.

Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.

4.13.2 Connection cable

Use a cable applicable to the robot controller to be used.

4.13.3 Controller setting

For communications between GT SoftGOT1000 and the robot controller, the following setting items and precautions are described below. This section describes the system configuration to monitor to the host as shown below.

POINT

Setting items

Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address, and port No. of the robot controller and GT SoftGOT1000.

(6) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

PLC Connection cable*2 Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000

Number of connectable

equipmentModel name Communication type

CRnD-700, CR750-D,

CR751-D Ethernet Twisted pair cable

100m

(max. segment length)

PC/AT compatible PC

PC CPU 1*1

GT SoftGOT1000 Robot controller

Connection cable

N/W No.

PC No.

IP address

Port No. :5001

:1 :1

:192.168.0.18

N/W No.

PC No.

IP address

Port No. :5001

:1

:2

:192.168.0.19

4.13 Robot Controller Connection 4 - 153

The following shows the procedures for communications with the robot controller.

(1) Before setting

(a) Precautions for monitoring GT SoftGOT1000 cannot monitor other stations. GT SoftGOT1000 cannot monitor CPUs on the other networks.

(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

(2) Compatible models

(3) Parameter settings for robot controller Set the robot controller parameter settings with the R32TB, R56TB, or RT ToolBox2.

POINT

Robot controller

For details of the robot controller, refer to the following manual.

Manual for the robot controller

(a) For RT ToolBox2

: Required : Set if necessary : Not required

Compatible models

CRnD-700, CR750-D, CR751-D

Item Setting Setting

(with GOT connected)

NETIP 192.168.0.19

GOTPORT 5001

4 - 154 4.13 Robot Controller Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(b) For R32TB or R56TB

: Required : Set if necessary : Not required

(4) Setting on personal computer Set the IP address.

(5) Communication check

(a) Ping test When the CNC C70 is ready for communications, execute the Ping command with the command prompt of

Windows.

When the Ping test is verified

C: \>Ping 192. 168. 0. 19

Reply from 192.168.0.19:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When the Ping test is not verified

C: \>Ping 192. 168. 0. 19

Request timed out.

When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and unit, and settings, including the

IP address, for Windows.

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3

Item Setting Setting

(with GOT connected)

NETIP 192.168.0.19

GOTPORT 5001

(For R56TB)

4.13 Robot Controller Connection 4 - 155

(6) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64

Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. CRnD-700

IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5001

Communication Select a communication method. UDP

4 - 156 4.13 Robot Controller Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4.14 Third Party PLC Connections

4.14.1 OMRON PLC

Serial connection

(1) System configurations and connection conditions

*1 For the applicable CPUs, refer to the following.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3

PLC

Connection cable Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000

Number of

connectable

equipmentModel name Communication unit Communication type

SYSMAC CQM1H CQM1-SCB41

RS-232 RS-232 1)

RS-232 2) 15m

PC/AT compatible

PC

PC CPU

1

SYSMAC CJ1

CJ1W-SCU21,

CJ1W-SCU41,

CJ1W-SCU21-V1,

CJ1W-SCU41-V1

SYSMAC CJ2

CP1W-CIF01,

CJ1W-SCU21-V1,

CJ1W-SCU41-V1

SYSMAC CP1

CP1W-CIF01,

CJ1W-SCU21,

CJ1W-SCU41,

CJ1W-SCU21-V1,

CJ1W-SCU41-V1

SYSMAC

C200H-LK201-V1,

C200HW-COM02,

C200HW-COM05,

C200HW-COM06

SYSMAC CS1

CS1W-SCU21,

CS1W-SCU21-V1,

CS1W-SCB21,

CS1W-SCB41,

CS1W-SCB21-V1,

CS1W-SCB41-V1

SYSMAC CVM1/CV (Built-in serial port)*1

CQM1 (Built-in serial port)*1

CPM2A CPM1-CIF01

OMRON PLC GT SoftGOT1000

Connection cable

4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 157

(2) Connection cable

(a) MITSUBISHI SYSTEM & SERVICE product RS-232 1)

(b) Using an RS-232 cable prepared by user The following describes the connection diagram, connector and others for each cable. Connection diagram

RS-232 2)

Connector specifications

Precautions for creating cables The length of the cable must be 15m or less.

(3) GT SoftGOT1000 setting When communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to an OMRON PLC, communication setup is required.

*1 Transmission speed supported by the PLC must be set.

*2 The settings on the PLC and GT SoftGOT1000 must be the same.

Refer to the following for performing GT SoftGOT1000 communication setup.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

(4) Controller setting For the OMRON PLC side setting, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) (For the 9-pin D-sub connector of the PC side)

1) PC side connector Use the connector compatible with the PC side.

2) Omron PLC CPU side connector Use the connector compatible with Omron PLC CPU side. For details, refer to the following manual.

User's Manual for Omron PLC CPU

Item*2 Setting

Transmission speed*1 9600/19200/38400/57600/115200bps

Data length 7bits

Stop bit 2bits

Parity Even

Communication condition format Individual

Host link station No. 00

FG

SD

RD

RS

SG

CS

-

FR

ER

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

1

2

3

4

9

5

6

7

8

OMRON PLC side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GOT side

4 - 158 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Ethernet connection

(1) System configurations and connection conditions

*1 To use GT SoftGOT1000 module together with another GT SoftGOT1000 module or a different application, set the different

number for each port No.

*2 There is no restriction for the number of GOTs. However, if the number of GOTs increases, the communication becomes high-

loaded, and it may affect the communication performance.

*3 The number of connectable personal computers includes the number of total GT SoftGOT 1000 modules started in a personal

computer.

*4 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.

Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network

system.

Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.

*5 The CJ2H-CPU6 -EIP or CJ2M-CPU3 can be connected by using its Ethernet port or an Ethernet module.

*6 This column shows the number of personal computers that can be connected to one PLC.

*7 This column shows the number of PLCs that can be connected to one personal computer.

*8 Available only when CS1D is used.

(2) Ethernet module and Ethernet board/card The following shows connectable Ethernet modules and Ethernet boards/cards.

(a) Ethernet module

(b) Ethernet board/card Use the same Ethernet board and card as those for connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC.

4.8.2 Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card

POINT

When using PC CPU module

A interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.

(3) Connection cable Use a cable applicable to the Ethernet module or the Ethernet board/card to be used.

PLC

Connection cable*4 Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000

Number of connectable

equipment

Model name Ethernet module Communication

type

Personal

computer*6 PLC*7

SYSMAC CJ1 CS1W-ETN21

Ethernet Twisted pair cable

100m

(max. segment

length)

PC/AT compatible

PC

PC CPU

UDP: No

limitation*1*2

TCP: 16*1*3

UDP: 128

TCP: 10

SYSMAC CJ2*5

SYSMAC CS1 CS1W-ETN21,

CS1D-ETN21D*8

Item Model name

CS1H, CS1G CS1W-ETN21

CS1D CS1W-ETN21, CS1D-ETN21D

CJ1H, CJ1M, CJ1G, CJ2H(-EIP), CJ2M CJ1W-ETN21

OMRON PLC Ethernet module GT SoftGOT1000

Connection cable

4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 159

(4) Controller setting

POINT

Precautions for Ethernet connection

(1) OMRON PLC For details of OMRON PLCs, refer to the following manual.

User's manual for OMRON PLC CPU

(2) Precautions for Ethernet connection Specify the N/W No. and the PLC No. of the OMRON PLC connected to the GOT via the Ethernet connection. The specified N/W No. and the PLC No. must be the same as those set on GT Designer3. For the settings of N/W No., PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000, refer to the following.

(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.

(a) Before setting When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

(5) Setting of programmable controller side For settings for each part of programmable controller, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3

(6) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.

(7) Communications check

(a) Ping test

Execute the Ping command with Command Prompt of Windows when the preparations for communication are complete.

When the Ping test is verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192.168.0.2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When the Ping test is not verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.

If the Ping test is not verified, check connections of the cable and unit, Windows side IP address and other settings.

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3

4 - 160 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 127

PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 254

Type Select [OMRON]. OMRON

IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. IP address of programmable

controller side

Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 256 to 65534

Communication Select a communication method. UDP, TCP

4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 161

4.14.2 KEYENCE PLC

Ethernet connection

(1) System configurations and connection conditions

*1 To use GT SoftGOT1000 module together with another GT SoftGOT1000 module or a different application, set the different

number for each port No.

*2 When the number of connected equipment is increased, the load on the communication is increased. This may affect the

communication performance.

*3 The number of connectable personal computers includes the number of total GT SoftGOT1000 modules started in a personal

computer.

*4 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.

Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network

system.

Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.

*5 This column shows the number of personal computers that can be connected to one PLC.

*6 This column shows the number of PLCs that can be connected to one personal computer.

(2) Ethernet module and Ethernet board/card The following shows connectable Ethernet modules and Ethernet boards/cards.

(a) Ethernet module

(b) Ethernet board/card Use the same Ethernet board and card as those for connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC.

4.8.2 Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card

POINT

When using PC CPU module

A interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.

(3) Connection cable Use a cable applicable to the Ethernet module or the Ethernet board/card to be used.

PLC

Connection cable*4 Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000

Number of connectable

equipment

Model name Ethernet module Communication

type

Personal

computer*5 PLC*6

KV-700, KV-1000,

KV-3000, KV-5000,

KV-5500

KV-LE20V,

KV-LE21V Ethernet Twisted pair cable

100m

(max. segment

length)

PC/AT compatible

PC

PC CPU

UDP: 1*1

TCP: 15*1*2*3

UDP: 128

TCP: 128

Item Model name

Ethernet module KV-LE20V, KV-LE21V

Connection cable

GT SoftGOT1000Ethernet moduleKEYENCE PLC

4 - 162 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(4) Controller setting

POINT

Precautions for setting items

(1) KEYENCE PLC For details of KEYENCE PLCs, refer to the following manual.

User's manual for KEYENCE PLC CPU

(2) Precautions for Ethernet connection Specify the N/W No. and the PLC No. of the KEYENCE PLC connected to the GOT via the Ethernet connection. The specified N/W No. and the PLC No. must be the same as those set on GT Designer3. For the settings of N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000, refer to the following.

(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.

(a) Before setting When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

(5) Setting of programmable controller side For settings for each part of programmable controller, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3

(6) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.

(7) Communications check

(a) Ping test

Execute the Ping command with Command Prompt of Windows when the preparations for communication are complete.

When the Ping test is verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192.168.0.2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When the Ping test is not verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.

If the Ping test is not verified, check connections of the cable and unit, Windows side IP address and other settings.

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3

4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 163

(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 64 Ethernet settings can be configured.

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 254

Type Select [KEYENCE]. KEYENCE

IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. IP address of programmable

controller side

Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 1024 to 5010, 5014 to 49152,

49154 to 65534

Communication Displays the communication method. UDP, TCP

4 - 164 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4.14.3 TOSHIBA PLC

Ethernet connection

(1) System configurations and connection conditions

*1 To use GT SoftGOT1000 module together with another GT SoftGOT1000 module or a different application, set the different

number for each port No.

*2 There is no restriction for the number of GOTs. However, if the number of GOTs increases, the communication becomes high-

loaded, and it may affect the communication performance.

*3 The number of connectable personal computers includes the number of total GT SoftGOT 1000 modules started in a personal

computer.

*4 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.

Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network

system.

Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.

*5 This column shows the number of personal computers that can be connected to one PLC.

*6 This column shows the number of PLCs that can be connected to one personal computer.

(2) Ethernet module and Ethernet board/card The following shows connectable Ethernet modules and Ethernet boards/cards.

(a) Ethernet module

(b) Ethernet board/card Use the same Ethernet board and card as those for connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC.

4.8.2 Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card

POINT

When using PC CPU module

A interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.

(3) Connection cable Use a cable applicable to the Ethernet module or the Ethernet board/card to be used.

PLC Connection

cable*4 Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000

Number of connectable

equipment

Model name Ethernet module Communication

type

Personal

computer*5 PLC*6

Unified Controller nv

series EN811 Ethernet Twisted pair cable

100m

(max. segment

length)

PC/AT compatible

PC

PC CPU

No

limitation*1*2*3 32

Item Model name

Unified Controller nv series EN811

TOSHIBA PLC Ethernet module GT SoftGOT1000

Connection cable

4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 165

(4) Controller setting

POINT

Precautions for Ethernet connection

(1) TOSHIBA PLC For the details of TOSHIBA PLCs, refer to the following manual.

User's manual for TOSHIBA PLC

(2) Precautions for Ethernet connection Specify the N/W No. and the PLC No. of the TOSHIBA PLC connected to the GOT via the Ethernet connection. The specified N/W No. and the PLC No. must be the same as those set on GT Designer3. For the settings of N/W No., PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000, refer to the following.

(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.

(a) Before setting When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

(5) Setting of programmable controller side For settings for each part of programmable controller, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3

(6) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.

(7) Communications check

(a) Ping test

Execute the Ping command with Command Prompt of Windows when the preparations for communication are complete.

When the Ping test is verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192.168.0.2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When the Ping test is not verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.

If the Ping test is not verified, check connections of the cable and unit, Windows side IP address and other settings.

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3

4 - 166 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 254

Type Select [TOSHIBA]. TOSHIBA

IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. IP address of programmable

controller side

Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 256 to 65534

Communication Select a communication method. UDP

4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 167

4.14.4 YASKAWA PLC

Serial connection

(1) System configurations and connection conditions

*1 For the applicable CPUs, refer to the following.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3

*2 The maximum transmission speed of 218IF-02 is 115200bps. However, the maximum transmission speed selectable from the

GOT is 57600bps.

PLC Connection

cable

Max.

distance GT SoftGOT1000

Number of

connectable

equipment Model name

MODBUS module

Communication module

Communication

type

GL60S, GL60H, GL70H JAMSC-IF60,

JAMSC-IF61

RS-232

RS-232 1)

RS-232 3)

15m PC/AT compatible PC

PC CPU 1

GL120, GL130 (Built-in serial port)*1 RS-232 1)

RS-232 3)

CP-9300MS

(CP-9300M compatible/

non-compatible) (Built-in serial port)*1

RS-232 2)

RS-232 5)

CP-9200(H) (Built-in serial port)*1 RS-232 1)

RS-232 3)

PROGIC-8

For

connecting

to port 1 (Built-in serial port)*1

RS-232 1)

RS-232 3)

For

connecting

to port 2 (Built-in serial port)*1 RS-232 4)

MP-920

(Built-in serial port)*1 RS-232 1)

RS-232 3)

217IF RS-232 1)

RS-232 3)

MP-930 (Built-in serial port)*1 RS-232 1)

RS-232 3)

MP-940 (Built-in serial port)*1 RS-232 6)

CP-9200SH, CP-317 CP-217IF

For connecting

to CN1

RS-232 1)

RS-232 3)

For connecting

to CN2 RS-232 7)

MP2200, MP2300,

MP2300S

217IF-01,

218IF-01,

218IF-02*2

RS-232 1)

RS-232 3)

YASKAWA PLC GT SoftGOT1000

Connection cable

4 - 168 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(2) MEMOBUS modules and communications modules The following table shows connectable MEMOBUS Modules and Communications Modules. Connection via RS-422 communication cannot be used.

(3) Connection cable

(a) MITSUBISHI SYSTEM & SERVICE product RS-232 1)

RS-232 2)

(b) Using an RS-232 cable prepared by user The following describes the connection diagram, connector and others for each cable. Connection diagram

RS-232 3)

Item Model name

GL-60S, GL-60H, GL-70H JAMSC-IF60 JAMSC-IF61

MP920/NSC40 217IF

CP-9200SH, CP-317 CP-217IF

MP2000

JEPMC-MP2200 217IF-01, 218IF-01, 218-IF02

JEPMC-MP2300 217IF-01, 218IF-01, 218-IF02

JEPMC-MP2300S 217IF-01, 218IF-01, 218-IF02

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R20201-9P (3m) (For the 9-pin D-sub connector of the personal computer side)

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R20203-9P (3m) (For the 9-pin D-sub connector of the personal computer side)

FG

TXD

RXD

DSR

GND

DTR

RTS

CTS

EST

1

2

3

6

7

9

4

5

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

YASKAWA products side GOT side

4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 169

RS-232 4)

RS-232 5)

RS-232 6)

FG

TXD

RXD

DSR

GND

DTR

RTS

CTS

NC

1

2

3

6

7

9

4

5

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

YASKAWA products side GOT side

FG

TXD

RXD

RTS

GND

DSR

OP/CTS

PWR

DTR

1

2

3

4

7

6

5

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

YASKAWA products side GOT side

Clamped on hood

TXD

RXD

RTS

GND

-

CTS

1

3

12

14

2

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

YASKAWA products side GOT side

4 - 170 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

RS-232 7)

Connector specification

Precautions for creating cables The length of the cable must be 15m or less.

(4) GT SoftGOT1000 setting When communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to a YASKAWA PLC, communication setup is required.

*1 The baud rate supported by the programmable controller must be set.

*2 The settings on the programmable controller and GT SoftGOT1000 must be the same.

Refer to the following for performing GT SoftGOT1000 communication setup.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

(5) Controller setting For the programmable controller side setting, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3

POINT

Send delay time

Set the transmission wait time as shown below when connecting to the programmable controller of CP-9200(H) or CP-9300MS.

1) Personal computer side connecter Use the connector compatible with the personal computer side.

2) YASKAWA PLC CPU side connector Use the connector compatible with YASKAWA PLC CPU side. For details, refer to the following manual.

User's manual for YASKAWA PLC CPU

Item*2 Setting

Comm. port COM1 to COM6

Baud Rate*1 9600/19200/38400/57600bps

Host Add. 1 to 31

Wait Time 0 to 300ms

Model name Send delay time

CP-9200(H) 30ms or more

CP-9300MS For connecting to port 0 10ms or more

For connecting to port 1 30ms or more

FG

TXD

RXD

DSR

SG

DTR

RS

CS

CD

1

2

3

6

7

20

4

5

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

YASKAWA products side GOT side

4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 171

Ethernet connection

(1) System configurations and connection conditions

*1 To use GT SoftGOT1000 module together with another GT SoftGOT1000 module or a different application, set the different

number for each port No.

*2 The number of connectable personal computers includes the number of total GT SoftGOT 1000 modules started in a personal

computer.

*3 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.

Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network

system.

Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.

*4 This column shows the number of personal computers that can be connected to one PLC.

*5 This column shows the number of PLCs that can be connected to one personal computer.

(2) Communications Module, Ethernet board/card The following table shows connectable communication modules and Ethernet board/card.

(a) Communications Module

(b) Ethernet board/card Use the same Ethernet board and card as those for connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC.

4.8.2 Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card

POINT

When using PC CPU module

A interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.

(3) Connection cable Use a cable applicable to the Ethernet module or the Ethernet board/card to be used.

PLC

Connection cable*3 Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000

Number of connectable

equipment

Model name Communications

Module

Communication

type

Personal

computer*4 PLC*5

MP920 218IF

Ethernet Twisted pair cable

100m

(max. segment

length)

PC/AT compatible

PC

PC CPU 10*1*2

UDP: 128

TCP: 10

MP2200, MP2300,

MP2300S

218IF-01,

218IF-02

CP-317 218TXB

Item Model name

For MP920 218IF

For MP2200, MP2300, MP2300S 218IF-01, 218IF-02

CP-317 218TXB

YASKAWA PLC Communications Module GT SoftGOT1000

Connection cable

4 - 172 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(4) Controller setting

POINT

Precautions for Ethernet connection

(1) YASKAWA PLC For details on YASKAWA PLC, refer to the following manual.

User's manual for YASKAWA PLC CPU

(2) Precautions for Ethernet connection The N/W No. and PLC No. are specified when connecting to the YASKAWA PLC via the Ethernet connection. In such cases, set the N/W No. and PLC No. arbitrarily on GT Designer3. For how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000, refer to the following.

(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.

(a) Before setting When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

(5) Setting of programmable controller side For settings for each part of programmable controller, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3

(6) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.

(7) Communications check

(a) Ping test

Execute the Ping command with Command Prompt of Windows when the preparations for communication are complete.

When the Ping test is verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192.168.0.2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When the Ping test is not verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.

If the Ping test is not verified, check connections of the cable and unit, Windows side IP address and other settings.

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3

4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 173

(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64

Type Select [YASKAWA]. YASKAWA

IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. IP address of programmable

controller side

Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 256 to 65534

Communication Select a communication method. UDP, TCP

4 - 174 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4.14.5 YOKOGAWA PLC

Ethernet connection

(1) System configurations and connection conditions

*1 To use GT SoftGOT1000 module together with another GT SoftGOT1000 module or a different application, set the different

number for each port No.

*2 The number of connectable personal computers includes the number of total GT SoftGOT 1000 modules started in a personal

computer.

*3 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.

Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network

system.

Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.

*4 This column shows the number of personal computers that can be connected to one PLC.

*5 This column shows the number of PLCs that can be connected to one personal computer.

*6 For the applicable CPUs, refer to the following.

(2) Ethernet Interface Module and Ethernet board/card

(2) Ethernet Interface Module and Ethernet board/card The following table shows connectable Ethernet Interface Modules and Ethernet boards/cards.

(a) Ethernet Interface Module

(b) Ethernet board/card Use the same Ethernet board and card as those for connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC.

4.8.2 Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card

POINT

When using PC CPU module

A interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.

(3) Connection cable Use a cable applicable to the Ethernet module or the Ethernet board/card to be used.

PLC

Connection cable*3 Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000

Number of connectable

equipment

Model name Ethernet Interface

Module

Communication

type

Personal

computer*4 PLC*5

FA-M3, FA-M3V

(Sequence CPU

module with built-in

network functions)*6 Ethernet Twisted pair cable

100m

(max. segment

length)

PC/AT compatible

PC

PC CPU

UDP: 128*1

TCP: 81*2

UDP: 128

TCP: 10F3LE01-5T,

F3LE11-0T,

F3LE12-0T

Item Model name

For FA-M3 F3LE01-5T, F3LE11-0T, F3LE12-0T

Sequence CPU module with built-in network functions F3SP66, F3SP67, F3SP71-4N, F3SP71-4S, F3SP76-7S

YOKOGAWA PLC Ethernet Interface Module

GT SoftGOT1000

Connection cable

4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 175

(4) Controller setting

POINT

Precautions for setting items

(1) YOKOGAWA PLC For details on YOKOGAWA PLC, refer to the following manual.

User's manual for YOKOGAWA PLC CPU

(2) Precautions for Ethernet connection The N/W No. and PLC No. are specified when connecting to the YOKOGAWA PLC via the Ethernet. In such cases, set the N/W No. and PLC No. arbitrarily on GT Designer3. Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000

(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(a) Before setting When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

(5) Setting of programmable controller side For settings for each part of the programmable controller, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3

(6) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.

(7) Communications check

(a) Ping test

Execute the Ping command with Command Prompt of Windows when the preparations for communication are complete.

When the Ping test is verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192.168.0.2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When the Ping test is not verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.

If the Ping test is not verified, check connections of the cable and unit, Windows side IP address and other settings.

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3

4 - 176 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

*1 Set the IP address and the communication method set for the PLC.

*2 Set the port number of the higher-level link service used for the PLC.

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module 1 to 64

Type Select [YOKOGAWA]. YOKOGAWA

IP address*1 Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. IP address of programmable

controller side

Port No.*2 Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 12289, 12291

Communication*1 Select a communication method. UDP, TCP

4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 177

4.14.6 SIEMENS PLC

Ethernet connection

(1) System configurations and connection conditions

*1 To use GT SoftGOT1000 module together with another GT SoftGOT1000 module or a different application, set the different

number for each port No.

*2 If the number of GOTs increases, the communication becomes high-loaded, and it may affect the communication performance.

*3 The number of connectable personal computers includes the number of total GT SoftGOT 1000 modules started in a personal

computer.

*4 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.

Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network

system.

Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.

*5 This column shows the number of personal computers that can be connected to one PLC.

*6 This column shows the number of PLCs that can be connected to one personal computer.

*7 For the applicable CPUs, refer to the following.

(2) Ethernet module and Ethernet board/card

PLC Connection

cable*4 Max. distance

GT

SoftGOT1000

Number of connectable equipment

Model name Ethernet module Communication

type

Personal

computer*5 PLC*6

SIMATIC S7-300

CP343-1 IT,

CP343-1,

CP343-1 Lean,

CP343-1

Advanced

Ethernet

(Controller Type:

FETCH/WRITE)

Twisted pair

cable

100m

(max. segment

length)

PC/AT

compatible PC

PC CPU

32 or less

(recommended to

16 units or

less)*1*2*3

16 or less

SIMATIC S7-400 CP443-1 IT,

CP443-1

SIMATIC S7-200 CP 243-1,

CP 243-1 IT

Ethernet

(Controller Type:

OP

communication)

32 or less

(recommended to

16 units or

less)*1*2*3

128 or less

SIMATIC S7-300

CP 343-1,

CP 343-1 Lean,

CP 343-1

Advanced-IT

SIMATIC S7-400

CP 443-1,

CP 443-1

Advanced-IT

SIMATIC S7-1200 (Built-in Ethernet

port)*7

SIEMENS PLC Ethernet module GT SoftGOT1000

Connection cable

4 - 178 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(2) Ethernet module and Ethernet board/card The following shows connectable Ethernet modules and Ethernet boards/cards.

(a) Ethernet Module Controller Type: FETCH/WRITE

Controller Type: OP communication

(b) Ethernet board/card Use the same Ethernet board and card as those for connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC.

4.8.2 Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card

POINT

When using PC CPU module

A interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.

(3) Connection cable Use a cable applicable to the Ethernet module or the Ethernet board/card to be used.

(4) Controller setting

POINT

Precautions for Ethernet connection

(1) SIEMENS PLC For the details of SIEMENS PLCs, refer to the following manual.

User's manual for SIEMENS PLC

(2) Precautions for Ethernet connection Specify the N/W No. and the PLC No. of the SIEMENS PLC connected to the GOT via the Ethernet connection. The specified N/W No. and the PLC No. must be the same as those set on GT Designer3. For the settings of N/W No., PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000, refer to the following.

(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.

Item Model name

SIMATIC S7-300 CP343-1 IT, CP343-1, CP343-1 Lean, CP343-1 Advanced

SIMATIC S7-400 CP443-1 IT, CP443-1

Item Model name

SIMATIC S7-200 CP 243-1, CP 243-1 IT

SIMATIC S7-300 CP 343-1, CP 343-1 Lean, CP 343-1 Advanced-IT

SIMATIC S7-400 CP 443-1, CP 443-1 Advanced-IT

4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 179

(a) Before setting When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same

segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.

When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.

When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.

(5) Setting of programmable controller side For settings for each part of programmable controller, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3

(6) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.

(7) Communications check

(a) Ping test

Execute the Ping command with Command Prompt of Windows when the preparations for communication are complete.

When the Ping test is verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192.168.0.2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32

When the Ping test is not verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.

If the Ping test is not verified, check connections of the cable and unit, Windows side IP address and other settings.

(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3

4 - 180 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.

(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting (Controller Type: FETCH/WRITE)

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 64 Ethernet settings can be configured.

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 254

Type Select [SIEMENS S7]. SIEMENS S7

IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. IP address of programmable

controller side

FETCH Port No. Set the FETCH port No. of the connected Ethernet module. 1024 to 65534

WRITE Port No. For the WRITE port No. of the connected Ethernet module, the value

that the FETCH port No. is incremented by one is set automatically. 1025 to 65535

Communication Displays the communication method. TCP

4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 181

Ethernet setting (Controller Type: OP communication) Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 64 Ethernet settings can be configured.

*1 The model S7-1200 OP has no setting for the connection No./rack No. or module position/slot No.

(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 254

Type Set a PLC type to be connected.

S7-200 OP

S7-300/400 OP

S7-1200 OP

IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. IP address of programmable

controller side

Port No. Displays the port number of the destination Ethernet module. 102

Connection No./Rack

No.*1 Set the connection No./rack No. which is set in the PLC side. 0 to 7

Module Position/Slot

No.*1 Set the module position/slot No. which is set in the PLC side.

S7-200 OP: 0 to 6

S7-300/400 OP: 0 to 31

Communication Displays the communication method. TCP

4 - 182 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4.15 MODBUS(R)/TCP Connection

4.15.1 System configuration and connection condition

*1 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.

*2 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.

Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network

system.

Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.

*3 For the connectable MODBUS/TCP equipment, refer to the following Technical News.

List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series with MODBUS Connection (GOT-A-0037)

For Technical News, contact your local distributor.

*4 This column shows the number of personal computers that can be connected to one PLC.

*5 This column shows the number of PLCs that can be connected to one personal computer.

*6 For details, refer to the MODBUS/TCP equipment manual.

4.15.2 Ethernet board/card

The Ethernet port built in the personal computer can be used. Use an Ethernet board or an Ethernet card applicable to the MODBUS/TCP equipment to be connected.

POINT

When using PC CPU module

A interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.

4.15.3 Connection cable

Use a cable applicable to the Ethernet module or the MODBUS/TCP equipment to be used.

Model name Communication

type Connection cable*2 Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000

Number of connectable equipment

Personal computer*4 PLC*5

MODBUS/TCP

equipment*3 Ethernet Twisted pair cable

100m

(max. segment length)

PC/AT compatible PC

PC CPU 128*1

Depends on the

MODBUS/TCP

equipment used*6

GT SoftGOT1000

Connection cable

MODBUS/TCP equipment

4.15 MODBUS(R)/TCP Connection 4 - 183

4.15.4 Controller setting

Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000

(1) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting

Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.

(2) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup

Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

MODBUS/TCP equipment settings For the MODBUS/TCP equipment settings, refer to the manual of the MODBUS/TCP equipment used.

Item Description Range

Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -

N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239

PC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module 1 to 64

Type Select [MODBUS/TCP]. MODBUS/TCP

IP address Set the IP address of the target MODBUS/TCP equipment. IP address of the MODBUS/TCP

equipment side

Port No. Displays the port number of the MODBUS/TCP equipment. 1 to 65535

Communication Displays the connection method. TCP

4 - 184 4.15 MODBUS(R)/TCP Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

MODBUS communication control function on the GOT special register (GS device) This function is to prevent the communication response delay that occurs because the devices on the MODBUS network differ from each other in network specification. This function is effective for the MODBUS network conditions as described below:

When only a part of function codes is supported (Example: "0F" is not supported) When the maximum transfer size of function code is small (Example: The maximum number of coil read times

is 1000)

(1) Communication setting The device (GS579.b0) switches between two communication settings. When GS579.b0 is off, the communication setting 1 (GS570 to GS576) is applied. When GS579.b0 is on, the communication setting 2 (GS590 to GS596) is applied. The following shows the communication setting.

GS device

Description Set valueCommunication

setting 1

Communication

setting 2

GS570 GS590 Command selection

Bit0: 0 Using Function Code "0F"

1 Not using Function Code "0F"

Bit1: 0 Using Function Code "10"

1 Not using Function Code "10"

GS571 GS591

Function Code "01"

Specification for the max. number of coil

read times

0:1000

1 to 2000: Specify the maximum number.

Other than above: 2000

GS572 GS592

Function Code "02"

Specification for the max. number of input

relay read times

0:1000

1 to 2000: Specify the maximum number.

Other than above: 2000

GS573 GS593

Function Code "03"

Specification for the max. number of

holding register read times

0:125

1 to 125: Specify the maximum number.

Other than above: 125

GS574 GS594

Function Code "04"

Specification for the max. number of input

register read times

0:125

1 to 125: Specify the maximum number.

Other than above: 125

GS575 GS595

Function Code "0F"

Specification for the max. number of

multiple-coil write times

0:800

1 to 800: Specify the maximum number.

Other than above: 800

When Bit0 of GS570 is "1", the function code "0F" is not used,

and therefore the setting of GS575 will be disabled.

GS576 GS596

Function Code "10"

Specification for the max. number of

multiple-holding register write times

0:100

1 to 100: Specify the maximum number.

Other than above: 100

When Bit1 of GS570 is "1", the function code "10F" is not used,

and therefore the setting of GS576 will be disabled.

4.15 MODBUS(R)/TCP Connection 4 - 185

4.16 Barcode Reader Connection

4.16.1 System configurations and connection conditions

*1 For connectable bar code readers, system equipment, available bar code types and connection cables, refer to the following

Technical News.

List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series (GOT-A-0010)

For Technical News, contact your local distributor.

4.16.2 Controller setting

Barcode function setting on GT Designer3 Before connecting the barcode reader, make the barcode function and system data settings. For details, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Set the [Communication Setup] dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the [Communication Setup] dialog box, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Barcode reader setting For details on the barcode reader setting, refer to the following manual.

Manual of the barcode reader used

4.16.3 Precautions

Using barcode reader connection on multiple started GT SoftGOT1000 modules A barcode reader cannot be used by multiple started GT SoftGOT1000 modules or other applications simultaneously. The barcode reader communicates with the GT SoftGOT1000 which first establishes the connection.

Controller Connection cable GT SoftGOT1000 Number of connectable equipment

Barcode reader*1 Varies according to the specifications of

the barcode reader used.*1 PC/AT compatible PC

PC CPU

1 barcode reader for 1 GT

SoftGOT1000 module

GT SoftGOT1000

Connection cable

Barcode reader

GT SoftGOT1000 module No.1

GT SoftGOT1000 module No.2

Barcode reader 1

Connecting

Barcode reader 1

Connecting

Barcode reader 2

GT SoftGOT1000 module No.1

GT SoftGOT1000 module No.2Connection with the second barcode reader enabled

Connection not enabled

1) Example of connection failure with two modules started

2) Example of succeeded connection with two modules started

4 - 186 4.16 Barcode Reader Connection

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4.17 RFID Connection

4.17.1 System configurations and connection conditions

*1 For connectable RFID controllers, system equipment, and connection cables, refer to the following Technical News.

List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series (GOT-A-0010)

For Technical News, contact your local distributor.

4.17.2 Controller setting

RFID function setting on GT Designer3 Before connecting the RFID controller, make the RFID function and system data settings. For details, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Set the [Communication Setup] dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the [Communication Setup] dialog box, refer to the following manual.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

RFID controller setting For details on the RFID controller setting, refer to the following manual.

Manual of the RFID controller used

4.17.3 Precautions

Using RFID connection on multiple started GT SoftGOT1000 modules An RFID controller cannot be used by multiple started GT SoftGOT1000 modules or other applications simultaneously. The RFID controller communicates with the GT SoftGOT1000 which first establishes the connection.

Controller Connection cable GT SoftGOT1000 Number of connectable equipment

RFID controller*1 Varies according to the specifications of

the RFID controller used.*1 PC/AT compatible PC

PC CPU

1 RFID controller for 1 GT

SoftGOT1000 module

GT SoftGOT1000

Connection cable

RFID controller

RFID controller 1 RFID controller 1

RFID controller 2

1) Example of connection failure with two modules started

2) Example of succeeded connection with two modules started

Connecting

GT SoftGOT1000 module No.1

GT SoftGOT1000 module No.2

Connection with the second RFID controller enabled

GT SoftGOT1000 module No.1

GT SoftGOT1000 module No.2

Connecting

Connection not enabled

4.17 RFID Connection 4 - 187

4 - 188 4.17 RFID Connection

FUNCTIONS OF GT SoftGOT1000

5. FUNCTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5. FUNCTIONS

5.1 Snap Shot

The screen image being monitored is saved into BMP or JPEG format file.

1. Perform the following operation. Select [Project] [Snap Shot...] from the menu.

2. The save as dialog box is displayed. Set the following items and click the button.

Item Description

Save in Selects the area where the file is saved.

File name Selects the file name to be saved.

Save as type

Selects a format of the file.

Bitmap Files (*.bmp) : BMP format

JPEG Files (*.jpg) : JPEG format

Save

5.1 Snap Shot 5 - 1

5.2 Print

The screen image being monitored is output to a printer.

5.2.1 Printing

1. Perform the following operation. Select [Project] [Print...] from the menu.

2. The print dialog box of Windows is displayed. Click the button to start printing.OK

5 - 2 5.2 Print

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5.2.2 Performing print preview

1. Perform the following operation. Select [Project] [Print Preview] from the menu.

2. Print Preview is displayed.

5.2 Print 5 - 3

5.2.3 Performing page setup

1. Perform the following operation. Select [Project] [Page Setup] from the menu.

2. The page setup dialog box is displayed. Set the following items and click the button.

5.2.4 Performing print setup

1. Perform the following operation. Select [Project] [Print Setup...] from the menu.

2. The Print Setup dialog box of Windows is displayed.

3. Configure the settings for the printer (selecting a printer, paper size, direction of printing) and click the button.

Item Description

Margin Set the margins on a page to be printed.

Reverse screen image Select this item to reverse the colors of screen image when printing.

Reverse Mode

Set the reverse mode for screen image.

Color : Reverse all the colors of screen image to be printed.

Black and White : Reverse the black and white colors of screen image to be printed.

Print to printer (Hard Copy Function) Check this item to output data to a printer using the hard copy function.

OK

OK

5 - 4 5.2 Print

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5.3 Property

The project title, project ID and data size of project data being monitored are displayed.

1. Perform the following operation. Select [Project] [Properties...] from the menu.

2. The Properties dialog box is displayed.

HINT

When the properties dialog box is displayed before starting monitoring

When the properties dialog box is displayed before starting monitoring, the project data path, project title, project ID and data size of project data monitored previously are displayed. (If project data has not been loaded, the project data path, project title, project ID and data size are not displayed.)

Item Description

Project Data Path Displays the path of the read project data.

Project Title Displays the project title.

Project ID Displays the project ID.

Data Size Displays the data size of project data.

5.3 Property 5 - 5

5.4 Resource Data

It is possible to reference data of the following object functions stored in the hard disk of the personal computer:

1. Perform the following operation. Select [Tool] [Resouce Data] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Tool] [Resource Data].

2. The Refer to Resource Data dialog box is displayed.

Advanced alarm, Alarm history, Logging, Recipe,

Advanced recipe, Report (Print), Hard copy (File save), Hard copy (Print),

Operation log

Item Description

Look in Selects the location to which the resource data is stored.

File name Specifies the file to be read.

Files of type

Selects the file format of the resource data.

CSV Files (*.csv) : CSV format

Unicode Text Files (*.txt) : Unicode text file format

Bitmap Files (*.bmp) : BMP format

JPEG Files (*.jpg) : JPEG format

5 - 6 5.4 Resource Data

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

POINT

Resource data

Data cannot be updated while being referenced. (The data is held.) (The held data is reflected when the print data is updated after the data reference is over.)

Use the format shown in Example 1 if tables are created in the report function. Tables with the format shown in Example 2 cannot be properly displayed in CSV files.

If the [Fail in the start of application.] message is displayed during data reference, check the application relating setting or hard disk/memory capacity.

A B

X

Y

1 2

3 4

A B

X

Y

1 2

3 4

A B

X

Y

1 2

3 4

A B

X

Y

1 2

3 4

Table created with

GT Designer2 CSV file table

CSV file table

(Example 2) Table created with

GT Designer2

(Example 1)

5.4 Resource Data 5 - 7

5.5 Displaying File Information in PLC (QCPU, QSCPU Only)

GT SoftGOT1000 displays the file information in the connected PLC (QCPU or QSCPU).

POINT

(1) Requirements to display file information The file information is displayed when the host station is set to a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC (QCPU or QSCPU) and GT SoftGOT1000 is in the online mode after monitoring is started.

(2) Displaying the dialog box by using the GOT special register (GS device) Turning on the PLC file display signal (GS500.b2) displays the [File Information in PLC] dialog box.

5.5.1 Setting method

1. Perform either of the following operations. Select [Tool] [File Information in PLC] from the menu. Right-click the mouse and select [Tool] [File Information in PLC] from the menu.

2. The File Information in PLC dialog box is displayed. Set the connection setup by referring to the table on the next page, and then click the button.

3. With successful communication, the PLC CPU model, the default target memory ([Program memory/Device memory]), and the file information in the memory are displayed.

4. To display file information in a memory other than the program memory/device memory, change the target memory.

Connection

5 - 8 5.5 Displaying File Information in PLC (QCPU, QSCPU Only)

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5.5.2 Precautions for use

(1) Communication processing of monitor screen while file information is displayed Displaying file information in the PLC interrupts communication processing of the monitor screen. Therefore, communication processing of the monitor screen takes more time.

(2) When connecting to redundant system Even if system switching occurs, the currently displayed file list is not updated. To display the file information in

the new monitor target, set the connection setup and click the button again.

(3) Updating read information Even if the program and others are updated on the PLC side while the File Information in PLC dialog box is displayed, the currently displayed file list is not updated.

To display the latest file information, click the button again to update the displayed information.

Item Description

Connection Setup Set the connected station to the host station or another station.

(The default is [Host].)

Host Check this item to set the connected station to the host station.

Other Check this item to set the connected station to another station.

NET No.

When the connected station is set to another station, set the network No. of the PLC that has the file information to be

displayed.

[0] to [239] (The default is [1].)

PC No.

When the connected station is set to another station, set the station No. of the PLC that has the file information to be

displayed.

[1] to [255] (The default is [1].)

CPU No. Select the target CPU No.

[0] to [4] (The default is [0].)

PLC Information Displays the file information in the target PLC CPU.

Target

Select the PLC CPU memory that has files to be displayed on the GOT.

[Program memory/Device memory], [Memory card(RAM)], [Memory card(ROM)],

[Standard RAM], [Standard ROM]

(The default is [Program memory/Device memory].)

PLC Type Displays the target PLC CPU model.

Name Displays the names of the files.

Type

Displays the types of the files. (The files are displayed in the order of type priorities starting from the left as shown

below.)

[Program], [Device comment], [Parameter], [Device init], [File register]

Title Displays the titles of the files.

Date Displays the last modified dates of the files.

Time Displays the last modified time of the files.

Size Displays the sizes of the files.

Connection

Connection

5.5 Displaying File Information in PLC (QCPU, QSCPU Only) 5 - 9

5.6 Mail Function

POINT

Before using the mail function

When using the mail function, e-mail is sent from GT SoftGOT1000, so mail software is not required on the sending side. To use the mail function, a contract with a service provider and set up the environment so that e-mail can be sent is required.

5.6.1 Mail function overview

It is possible to send messages from GT SoftGOT1000 to personal computers and mobile phones. The mail function can only be used in the following object functions: Alarm history display function System alarm

(1) Using the alarm history display function It is possible to send error and recovery information at error/recovery of stations using the alarm history display function.

(2) Using system alarms An error definition is sent at system alarm occurrence. The system alarm transmission of GT SoftGOT1000 differs from the alarm list display function (system alarm) of the GOT. It does not require the alarm list display function (system alarm) to be set in the monitor screen data. Turn on/off the checkboxes in the Mail Condition dialog box to select whether this function will be used or not.

Personal computer

Mobile phone

E-mail is sent.

E-mail is sent.

Error occurrence or recovery

Personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000)

Personal computer

Mobile phone

E-mail is sent.

E-mail is sent.

Error occurrence

Personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000)

5 - 10 5.6 Mail Function

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5.6.2 Operation flow when using the mail function

*1: Setting need not be made when system alarm transmission is used.

Start

Create the monitor screen data using GT Designer3

(Define the mail transmission settings by each object function*1).

Set the mail destination.

Test the mail transmission.

Check the mail transmission conditions as necessary.

Read in the monitor screen data and start monitoring.

End

(E-mail is sent to personal computers or mobile phones

when the conditions are met.)

Start up GT SoftGOT1000.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

5.6.3 How to set up the mail function

5.6.3 How to set up the mail function

5.6.3 How to set up the mail function

3.7 Opening the Project

5.6 Mail Function 5 - 11

5.6.3 How to set up the mail function

The following explains how to set up the mail function to send e-mail using GT SoftGOT1000.

Mail setup Used to set the mail send destination and perform a mail transmission test.

1. Perform the following operation.

Click (Mail Setup). Select [Set] [Mail Setup] [Mail Setup] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Set] [Mail Setup] from the menu.

2. The Mail Setup dialog box is displayed.

(Continued to next page)

Item Description

Dial-up Set whether or not to send e-mail via dialup.

(The default is [Manual].)

Auto

Check this radio button to send e-mail via dialup.

If [Auto] is checked, a connection to the mail server is made and e-mail is sent when the mail conditions are

established.

The connection to the server is canceled after e-mail is sent.

It is necessary to set [Entry,] [Retry,] and [Interval.]

Manual

(No Dial-up)

Check this radio button to send e-mail without using dialup.

If [Manual] is set, the connection to the mail server is always active when e-mail is sent.

The connection to the server is not canceled even after e-mail is sent.

Entry Select the dialup connection entry name in Windows.

Refer to the Help function in Windows for how to create a dial up entry.

Retry Set the number of retries made if a dialup fails.

"0" to "10" (The default is "1.")

Interval Set the interval between retries.

"1" to "10" (minutes) (The default is "1.")

5 - 12 5.6 Mail Function

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

*1 If more than one address is entered, they should be separated with a space or a comma.

Up to 32 addresses are applicable to each setting.

Up to 64 characters can be used for one address.

POINT

Mail settings

(1) Precautions for mail settings The setting contents made by selecting [Common] [Gateway] [Mail...] in GT Designer3 are not reflected on GT SoftGOT1000.

(2) Dialup settings

Refer to the manual of the service provider and the Help function in Windows for how to set the dialup network connection.

(3) Setup GT SoftGOT1000 is not compatible with the SSL encrypted communication (SMTP over SSL, TLS) when sending e-mails. For the items to be set, check the server specifications.

Item Description

Mail Header Enter the origin, destination, server name, and title of mail.

FROM Enter the address of the mail origin.

TO*1 Enter the address of the mail destination.

CC*1 Enter the address of the mail destination (copy). (E-mail can be sent even this field is blank.)

BCC*1 Enter the address of the mail destination (blind copy). (E-mail can be sent even this field is blank.)

Subject Enter the title of the mail.

Setup

Enable the check box and enter the necessary information if POP3 authentication is required when

sending e-mail.

(The check box is disabled by default.)

SMTP Port Enter the port No. for SMTP.

SMTP Enter the SMTP server name.

Require SMTP Authentication

Enable the check box and enter the necessary information if SMTP Server authentication is required when

sending e-mail.

(The default is "Use SMTP Authentication")

Use SMTP Authentication Check the SMTP Server circumstances automatically and send according to following precedence.

[SMTP-AUTH CRAM-MD5] [SMTP-AUTH LOGIN] [SMTP-AUTH PLAIN]

Use POP before

SMTP Send by Use POP before SMTP to the POP3 server set.

User Name Enter the user name.

Password Enter the password corresponding to the user name.

POP3 Server Enter the POP3 server name used for [Use POP before SMTP].

Delay time

Specify the send interval between e-mails.

"1" to "10" (seconds) (The default is "0.")

The mail server may restrict you to send many e-mails at once to avoid suspicious e-mails.

With this setting, e-mails are sent at specified intervals.

Create Mail History Enable this check box to create a mail transmission history.

(The check box is disabled by default.)

Mail Test Test e-mail is sent to the destination by clicking the [Send] button.

OK Used to update the settings and close the dialog box.

Cancel Used to cancel the settings and close the dialog box.

Apply Used to update the settings.

5.6 Mail Function 5 - 13

(a) Mail test It is possible to check whether e-mail can be sent properly before starting monitoring by GT SoftGOT1000. In the mail test, the following sample massage of GT SoftGOT1000 is sent to the destination based on the definition set in the Mail Setup dialogue box. GT SoftGOT1000 sample message displayed at the destination.

POINT

Mail history

If [Create mail history] is checked in the Mail Setup dialogue box, the status of the mail test is saved as one of the history data items. Refer to the following for mail history.

5.6.5 Mail history

GT SoftGOT1000 TEST MAIL

This is a test message.

5 - 14 5.6 Mail Function

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Mail Condition Set the mail send conditions. If the mail transmission is set with GT SoftGOT1000, it is possible to set not to send e-mail for certain functions without modifying the monitor screen data. Disable the functions for which e-mail is not to be sent. (Check boxes are enabled by default.)

1. Perform the following operation.

Click (Mail Condition). Select [Set] [Mail Setup] [Mail Condition] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Set] [Mail Condition].

2. The Mail Condition dialog box is displayed.

POINT

Precautions for setting mail conditions

If the mail function is not set by Alarm history display function, this setting is ignored for that function (e-mail is not sent even if the check boxes are checked). Refer to the GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) for how to set objects.

Item Description

Mail Condition Set whether the mail function will be used or not with each function.

Alarm History Turn on this checkbox to use the alarm history display function with the mail function.

System Alarm

Turn on this checkbox to use the system alarm with the mail function.

After turning it on, set the transmission interval (10 to 120 minutes) for the case where the same error occurs two or

more times in a row.

Example: When the error transmission interval is set to 15 minutes

If the same system alarm occurs again within the time set as the transmission interval, e-mail will not be sent at and after the second time.

If a different system alarm occurs within the time set as the transmission interval, e-mail will be sent.

System alarm 1)

In 5 minutes GT SoftGOT1000

System alarm 1)

Personal

computer

System alarm 1)

System alarm 1)

In 5 minutes GT SoftGOT1000

System alarm 2)

Personal

computer

System alarm 1)

System alarm 2)

5.6 Mail Function 5 - 15

5.6.4 Sending e-mail

When e-mail is sent from GT SoftGOT1000 to the target device, the reception header part shown at the destination displays a message that shows that the e-mail is from GT SoftGOT1000. Example of display in the reception header part at the destination

POINT

Precautions for mail sending

The format and contents of the display of e-mail sent vary depending on the mailer specifications used at the destination. When e-mail is sent to a mobile phone, the display may vary depending on the specifications (screen size) of the mobile phone. GT SoftGOT1000 can send up to 64 e-mails at once.

(1) When sending e-mail using the alarm history display function If an alarm occurs in GT SoftGOT1000, the time and information of the alarm are sent to the destination by e- mail. Moreover, if the alarm recovers, the time and information of the alarm recovery are sent to the destination by e- mail. For the details of the alarm history display functions, refer to the GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions).

(a) Example of the header part display in the mail send destination when an alarm occurred

1) The comment entered in the alarm history display function is displayed. 2) The content of detailed display entered in the alarm history display function is displayed. [Detailed Information] is not displayed if the detail display setting of the alarm history display function has not been made or if it has been made to the base screen or window screen. [detail comment nothing] appears under [Detailed Information] Set the details to be displayed in the comment window in order to display the [Detailed Information].

From:****************

To:******************

Cc:******************

Subject:GT SoftGOT1000 Mail.

:

X-Mailer:GT SoftGOT1000(Version3)

[Alarm history: Occurrence Notification]

[Occurrence Data and Time]

2005/10/12 14:23:13

[Alarm Information]

An error occurred in the tank.

[Detailed Information]

The hydraulic pressure of tank is low.

1)

2)

5 - 16 5.6 Mail Function

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(b) Example of display at destination (when an alarm recovered)

(2) When sending e-mail using System Alarm At communication error occurrence, the error occurrence time and error information are sent to the destination by mail.

(a) Destination display example (at error occurrence)

[Alarm History: Restoration Notification]

[Restored Time]

2005/10/12 15:05:47

[Restoration Information]

Alarm of the tank has been restored.

[Detailed Information]

The hydraulic pressure of tank is low.

[System Alarm]

402 Communication timeout. Confirm communication pathway or modules. 2005/11/22 11:24:25

5.6 Mail Function 5 - 17

5.6.5 Mail history

It is possible to reference the operation history data of the e-mail sent from GT SoftGOT1000. It is also possible to reference the errors generated at the time e-mail was sent.

The mail history data can be displayed using Notepad or a similar editor in Windows.

How to reference mail history The following explains how to reference the mail history data.

1. Perform the following operation.

Click (Mail History). Select [Set] [Mail Setup] [Mail History] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Set] [Mail History] from the menu.

2. The mail history information is displayed.

(a) Example of mail history data display

POINT

Mail history

The mail history cannot be referenced if the data does not exist. To create a mail history, enable [Create Mail History] in the Mail Setup dialogue box. For the Mail Setup dialog box, refer to the following.

5.6.3 How to set up the mail function

The mail history data is not deleted even if GT SoftGOT1000 is exited. The unnecessary history data is required to delete by the user.

:

2006/09/25 15:10:52 No.1 POP:##### Searching...

2006/09/25 15:10:52 No.1 POP:##### Connecting...

2006/09/25 15:10:52 No.1 POP:##### Connection is completed.

2006/09/25 15:10:52 No.1 SMTP:##### Searching...

2006/09/25 15:10:52 No.1 SMTP:##### Connecting...

2006/09/25 15:10:52 No.1 SMTP:##### Connection is completed.

2006/09/25 15:10:52 No.1 Mail was sent successfully.

:

5 - 18 5.6 Mail Function

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5.7 Keyboard Input

The following can be operated using the keyboard input function. For the numerical input and the ASCII input, characters and values can be input with a keyboard. Operations, including displaying a ladder with the alarm history, can be operated with function keys of a keyboard.

5.7.1 Keyboard input enabling/disabling procedure

1. When switching the keyboard input enable/disable, perform the following operation.

Click (Keyboard). Select [Set] [Keyboard] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Set] [Keyboard] from the menu.

5.7.2 When operating the numerical input function or the ASCII input function from the keyboard of a PC

When using the numerical input function or the ASCII input function, numeric values/ASCII codes can be entered from the keyboard of a PC. The following lists the operation when each key is pressed.

Type of key Operation when entering a numeric value Operation when entering ASCII code

Erases the least significant digit and shifts the entire content one digit to the right.

Writes to a device, displays the cursor, moves the cursor, and closes the current dialog

box.

Cancels the operation.

Reverses the sign.

Inputs a decimal point.

Numeric key Inputs numeric values (0 to 9). Inputs ASCII code, shift JIS code, and

letters.Alphabetic key Input alphabetic letters (A to F).

Arrow key Moves the cursor.

Kanji conversion

Former candidate

Next candidate

Select/No conversion

Erases a character being input.

+ , + Moves the cursor in the object.

+ Increment

+ Decrement

Back Space

Enter

Esc

-

.

Home

PageUp

PageDown

End

Delete

Ctrl Ctrl

Ctrl

Ctrl

5.7 Keyboard Input 5 - 19

5.7.3 How to use function keys

With assigning key codes to the following function keys, objects, including the alarm history, can be operated with a keyboard. F1 to F8 Shift + F1 to F8 Ctrl + F1 to F8 Ctrl + Shift + F1 to F8 For applicable key codes for objects, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

(1) How to assign key codes Key codes are assigned in the OperationPanel screen on GT Designer3 For settings in the OperationPanel dialog box, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Assign key codes to Shift + Ctrl + F1 to F8.

Assign key codes to Ctrl + F1 to F8.

Assign key codes to Shift + F1 to F8.

Assign key codes to F1 to F8.

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

5 - 20 5.7 Keyboard Input

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5.7.4 Precautions

(1) When displaying a window screen on a base screen When displaying a window screen on a base screen, and the alarm list display function or the alarm history display function has been set up on both the screens, key input is enabled for the alarm list display function or the alarm history display function on the base screen.

(2) When a touch switch to which the simultaneous press disable setting has been made is ON The touch switch will not operate when pressing a key in the case the simultaneous press disable setting has been made to the touch switch and the touch switch is ON.

(3) Precautions on screen saving

(a) When the screen save is set on GT SoftGOT1000, the monitor screen does not turn black as GOT even though the screen save operates. (The monitor screen keeps the same screen as before setting the screen save.) When the monitor screen is clicked for canceling the screen save, clicking the screen is not recognized as input operations, including clicking touch switches. Be sure not to make incorrectly inputs.

(b) When the screen saves for GT SoftGOT1000 and Windows operate, canceling the screen saves must be executed respectively.

(4) Keyboard inputs

(a) The keyboard input function is not compatible with the utility screen. Operate the utility screen with the mouse.

(b) Do not use software keyboards (keyboard applications).

(5) Precautions for function keys

(a) Function keys cannot be used during clicking the mouse.

(b) For an input with a function key, the input is executed when the function key is released. As a result, operations are not correctly executed even though the following are set on GT Designer3. Setting [Operation Timing] of [Action of Go To Screen Switch] in [Screen Switching/Window] of

[Environmental Setting]. Setting [Momentary] for the action of the bit in the Action tab of the Edit Action/Key Code screen for the

operation panel setting Setting [Auto Repeat] in the Trigger tab of the Edit Action/Key Code screen for the operation panel

setting

(c) When input methods, including IME of Windows, are enabled, inputs with function keys cannot be executed.

For inputs with function keys, disable input methods, including IME of Windows.

5.7 Keyboard Input 5 - 21

5.8 Full Screen Mode

The full monitor screen of GT SoftGOT1000 can be displayed on the personal computer screen.

POINT

Precautions on the full screen mode

When using the full screen mode function, such operations as exiting from GT SoftGOT1000 cannot be performed, since the menu bar, toolbar and status bar of GT SoftGOT1000 are hidden. To perform operations of the menu bar and toolbar, use the mouse right-click menu.

5.8.1 Full screen mode types

There are the following types of full screen mode function.

(1) Full screen 1 Only a monitor screen is displayed fully on the screen. Use this function with the personal computer or panel computer where a mouse and keyboard are connected.

The operations performed on the menu bar and toolbar can

be performed by right-clicking a mouse.

Double-click on the monitor screen with holding down the

key to minimize the screen.

Press the key (function key) to exit from GT

SoftGOT1000.

When the full screen mode function is not use

When the full screen mode function is used

When the full screen mode function is used, the part of the frame is hidden and the full monitor screen can be displayed on the personal computer.

When the full screen mode function is not used, the part of the frame is displayed.

Shift

F12

5 - 22 5.8 Full Screen Mode

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(2) Full screen 2 A monitor screen is displayed fully on the screen, and a small dialog is displayed. GT SoftGOT1000 can be minimized/exited in the small dialog. Since GT SoftGOT1000 can be exited on the monitor screen, it can be used for the panel computer where a mouse and keyboard are not connected.

(3) Full screen 3 A monitor screen is displayed fully on the screen, and a small dialog is also displayed. GT SoftGOT1000 can be opened/monitored/minimized/exited in the small dialog. Since GT SoftGOT1000 can be exited on the monitor screen, it can be used for the panel computer where a mouse and keyboard are not connected.

POINT

Exiting the full screen mode

Turning ON the GOT internal device (system information area of GT SoftGOT1000: GS500.b0) exit GT SoftGOT1000. By setting the above device as a touch switch, GT SoftGOT1000 can be exited without using a mouse and keyboard. For details of the GOT internal device, refer to the following manual

GT Designer 3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

The following operations can be performed in the small

dialog.

Min: Minimizes GT SoftGOT1000.

Exit: Exits GT SoftGOT1000.

The operations performed on the menu bar and toolbar can

be performed by right-clicking a mouse.

Double-click on the monitor screen holding down the

key to minimize the screen.

Press the key (function key) to exit from GT

SoftGOT1000.

The following operations can be performed in the small

dialog.

Open: Opens a project.

Online: Starts monitoring. (Cannot be selected during

monitoring.)

Min: Minimizes GT SoftGOT1000.

Exit: Exits GT SoftGOT1000.

The operations performed on the menu bar and toolbar can

be performed by right-clicking the mouse.

Double-click on the monitor screen holding down the

key to minimize the screen.

Press the key (function key) to exit from GT

SoftGOT1000.

Shift

F12

Shift

F12

5.8 Full Screen Mode 5 - 23

5.8.2 Setting method

The full screen mode can be set either before or after starting GT SoftGOT1000.

Setting before starting GT SoftGOT1000

1. Select [Start]*1 [MELSOFT]*2 [GT Works3] from the menu of Windows, right-click [GT SoftGOT1000] , and select [Properties].

*1 Select [All Programs] on the [Start] screen, or select [Start] [All Programs].

*2 [MELSOFT Application] appears for a version of GT Works3 earlier than 1.136S.

2. As the GT SoftGOT1000 properties appear, choose the shortcut tab and add the keyword of the mode to be used to [Target].

*1 A one-byte blank is required to be prefixed to "-".

When displaying the screen in full screen 1

3. After addition, click the button.

4. When GT SoftGOT1000 is started next, GT SoftGOT1000 is started in the full screen mode.

5. When you cancel the full screen mode, delete the keyword added to [Target].

HINT

When starting the GT SoftGOT1000 with the specified module number in the full-screen mode

The specified module of GT SoftGOT1000 can be started in the full-screen by entering the keyword for both full screen mode and module No. in the [Target] of [GT SoftGOT1000 Properties]. (There are no rules for the order of entering keywords.) Ex) When starting module No. 3 in the full-screen 1

Refer to the following for module keyword.

5.10 Starting Up Multiple GT SoftGOT1000 Modules

Keyword Description

-NOFRAME*1 Displays the screen in full screen 1.

-NOFRAMEDLG*1 Displays the screen in full screen 2.

-NOFRAMEDLGMENU*1 Displays the screen in full screen 3.

OK

C:\Program Files\MELSOFT\SGT1000\SGT1000.exe -SGT3 -NOFRAME

A one-byte space is necessary

in front of keyword

5 - 24 5.8 Full Screen Mode

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Setting after starting GT SoftGOT1000

1. Select either of the following. Select [View] [Full Screen Mode] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [View] [Full Screen Mode] from the menu.

2. The GT SoftGOT1000 is displayed in full screen 1 mode.

3. To cancel the full screen mode, right-click the mouse to select [View] [Full Screen Mode] from the menu.

POINT

Enabling and disabling full screen mode with GOT internal device

The full screen mode of GT SoftGOT1000 can be switched between enabled and disabled states by turning on and off the GOT internal device (GS500.b1).

ON: GT SoftGOT1000 is displayed in the full screen mode. OFF: The full screen mode of GT SoftGOT1000 is canceled.

For GOT internal devices, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

5.8.3 Precautions

(1) Small dialog The small dialog is movable but cannot be closed. It is always displayed on the front position.

(2) Switching to the standard screen display When the GT SoftGOT1000 was started with a keyword, the screen cannot be switched to the standard screen display. ([Full Screen Mode] in the menu is displayed in gray.)

(3) Full screen mode setting The full screen mode setting is valid even when exiting the GT SoftGOT1000 and restarting it.

(4) Display position in full screen mode When switching to full screen mode under the environment where the resolution of the PC display and GT SoftGOT1000 are different, the GT SoftGOT1000 window is displayed so that the upper-left corner of the window is on the upper-left of the PC display.

(5) When displaying the screen in full screen mode after starting the GT SoftGOT1000 When displaying the screen in full screen mode after starting the GT SoftGOT1000, the screen is displayed in full screen 1. To display the screen in full screen 2 or 3, set the full screen mode with the procedure shown in 5.8 Full Screen Mode.

5.8 Full Screen Mode 5 - 25

5.9 Popup Menu

The right-click of the mouse can be disabled (the menu can be hidden). When the Popupmenu is set to be disabled, the menu is not displayed if you right-click the mouse. This setting is also enabled when you exit and then restart GT SoftGOT1000.

5.9.1 Popup menu ineffective/effective

1. Perform the following operation. Select [Set] [Popup Menu] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Set] [Popup Menu] from the menu.

2. The right-click of the mouse is disabled.

3. When you want to enable the right-click of the mouse again, choose [Set] - [Popup Menu].

5.9.2 Precautions

When the full screen mode and Popupmenu disable are set, the operations of the menu bar and mouse right-click menu cannot be performed. Therefore, the pop-up menu cannot be enabled until the full screen mode is canceled. When you want to enable the pop-up menu, cancel the full screen mode in the following method.

(a) When the keyword of the full screen mode was added to the property of the GT SoftGOT1000 icon.

After exiting GT SoftGOT1000 (pressing the key or turning ON the GOT internal device GS500.b0), delete the added keyword.

(b) When the full screen mode was executed from the menu.

As the full screen mode is canceled by pressing the + key, enable the Popupmenu from the menu.

F12

Alt F9

5 - 26 5.9 Popup Menu

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5.10 Starting Up Multiple GT SoftGOT1000 Modules

Multiple modules of GT SoftGOT1000 can be started up simultaneously by a single computer. Each module of GT SoftGOT1000 is started up as an "n" module, and can be monitored by different connection types. (Module numbers appear in the title bar. Module numbers can be shown or hidden by the Environment Setup screen.)

5.10.1 Startup procedure

Take one of the following procedures to start up multiple modules of GT SoftGOT1000.

(1) When starting up multiple modules in the order of module numbers If the GT SoftGOT1000 modules are started up by the normal startup procedures, they will start up in the order of module numbers (Module No. 1, No. 2, No. 3...).

(2) When starting up the specified module Take the following procedures to start up the specified GT SoftGOT1000 module (e.g., module No. 3 only).

1. Select [Start]*1 [MELSOFT]*2 [GT Works3] from the menu of Windows, right-click [GT SoftGOT1000] , and select [Properties].

*1 Select [All Programs] on the [Start] screen, or select [Start] [All Programs].

*2 [MELSOFT Application] appears for a version of GT Works3 earlier than 1.136S.

GT SoftGOT1000 module No.1

is direct CPU connection

GT SoftGOT1000 module No.2

is Ethernet connection

GT SoftGOT1000

module No.1

GT SoftGOT1000

module No.2

5.10 Starting Up Multiple GT SoftGOT1000 Modules 5 - 27

2. Enter the keyword for the module to be started up at the end of the character strings in the [Target] field on the Shortcut tab on [GT SoftGOT1000 Properties] that appears.

*1 A single-byte space is required before "_".

When starting up module No. 3

3. Press the button after entering the module number.

4. The specified module of GT SoftGOT1000 will start up at the next startup.

5. Delete the keyword that was entered in the [Target] field when not specifying the module No.

Keyword Description

-SGTn*1 Specifies the number of the module to be started up.

Set the number of the module to be started up to "n". (1 to 32767)

OK

5 - 28 5.10 Starting Up Multiple GT SoftGOT1000 Modules

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

HINT

Starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules

(1) When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules by specifying the module numbers Create a shortcut for each module to start up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules by specifying each module number.

(2) When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are started up in the full screen mode If multiple modules of GT SoftGOT1000 are started up in the full screen mode, only the very front screen is accessible. To access other windows, rearrange the windows so that the window of the module to be operated is at the very front. Refer to the following section for how to move the windows.

5.11 Moving the Window

(3) When starting the GT SoftGOT1000 with the specified module number in the full-screen mode The specified module of GT SoftGOT1000 can be started in the full-screen by entering the keyword for both full screen mode and module No. in the [Target] of [GT SoftGOT1000 Properties]. (There are no rules for the order of entering keywords.) Ex) When starting module No. 3 in the full-screen 1

Refer to the following for the keyword for the full screen mode.

5.8 Full Screen Mode

5.10.2 Precautions for use

(1) Monitoring speed when starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, the monitoring speed may be reduced according to the performance of the personal computer. It is recommended to not activate five or more modules. (The number of modules can be specified between 1 and 32767.)

(2) GOT internal device when multiple modules are started up GOT internal device for each module is controlled separately. GOT internal device cannot be shared by different modules.

(3) Data save location when multiple applications are started up Data save location for each module is controlled separately.

(4) Monitoring a third party PLC when starting up multiple modules When connected to the third party PLC and the same COM port is designated as the monitor target for multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, only the first GT SoftGOT1000 module that starts monitoring is allowed to communicate. Communication of the GT SoftGOT 1000 module that begins monitoring later will time out.

C:\Program Files\MELSOFT\SGT1000\SGT1000.exe -SGT3 -NOFRAME

A one-byte space is necessary

in front of keyword

5.10 Starting Up Multiple GT SoftGOT1000 Modules 5 - 29

5.11 Moving the Window

GT SoftGOT1000 can be moved by operating the mouse. GT SoftGOT1000 can also be moved when the full screen display function, where the title bar is not displayed, is used.

5.11.1 Window movement types

There are the following window movement types.

(1) Cascade Cascades the windows of the active GT SoftGOT1000. (These windows may not necessarily be in the order of

module numbers, depending on the Windows specifications.)

(2) Minimize all windows Minimizes all the windows of the active GT SoftGOT1000 modules.

5 - 30 5.11 Moving the Window

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(3) Window movement A window is moved in either of the following methods. Set the moving method in Environment setup. For details of Environment Setup, refer to the following.

3.5 Environment Setup

5.11.2 Setting method

1. Perform the following operation. Select [Window] [Cascade] / [Mimimize All Windows] / [Move Window] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Window] [Cascade] / [Mimimize All Windows] / [Move Window] from the

menu.

2. Move GT SoftGOT1000 in the selected moving method.

Movement with mouse

Setting the cursor of the mouse to the Move mode and moving

the mouse also moves GT SoftGOT1000 with the motion of the

mouse.

Clicking the mouse cancels the Move mode.

Movement with Move buttons

The UP, DOWN, LEFT or RIGHT button in the [Move window]

dialog box moves GT SoftGOT1000 on a 10-dot every clicking.

A window can also be moved on a panel computer that cannot

use a mouse.

5.11 Moving the Window 5 - 31

5.12 System Alarm

System alarm is displayed. If system alarm is not set to project data, it can be confirmed with this dialog box.

1. Perform the following operation. Select [Tool] [System Alarm] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Tool] [System Alarm] from the menu.

2. The System Alarm dialog box is displayed.

*1 Refer to the following manual for list of system alarm.

Appendix.2.6 GOT error code list

POINT

About system alarm to be displayed

Only the error detected by GOT is displayed on the system alarm dialog box. Set the system alarm display in the project data for checking errors of the PLC CPU and network.

Error messages are displayed in English. To display them in other languages, configure the following setting. Setting the system alarm display in the project data Setting the system language switching device

Error messages cannot be cleared with the GOT error reset signal (system signal 1-1.b13). Error messages can be cleared only with the [Clear] button.

Item Description

System Alarm*1 Error contents are displayed.

Displayed error message is cleared.

However, it is redisplayed when the error keeps occuring. Clear

5 - 32 5.12 System Alarm

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5.13 Script Error

Script error information is displayed.

1. Perform the following operation. Select [Tool] [Script Error] menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Tool] [Script Error] from the menu.

2. The Script Error Info. dialog box is displayed.

*1 Refer to the following manual for script function.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Item Description

Script No. *1 Script No. where error occurs is displayed.

Error No. Error code of occurring error is displayed.

Error Message Error contents are displayed.

Script is executed again.

Displayed error message is cleared.

However, it is redisplayed when the error keeps occuring.

Retry

Clear

5.13 Script Error 5 - 33

5.14 Object Script Error

Object script error information is displayed.

1. Perform the following operation. Select [Tool] [Object Script Error] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Tool] [Object Script Error] from the menu.

2. The Object Script Error Info. dialog box is displayed.

*1 Refer to the following manual for object script function and corrective actions for error messages.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Item Description

Script User ID *1 User ID of the object script where error occurs is displayed.

Error No. Error code of occurring error is displayed.

Error Message Error contents are displayed.

Object script is executed again.

Displayed error message is cleared.

However, it is redisplayed when the error keeps occuring.

Retry

Clear

5 - 34 5.14 Object Script Error

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5.15 Application Start-up

Various applications (such as Microsoft Excel) can be started from GT SoftGOT1000 while GT SoftGOT1000 monitor is running. A file to be started up can be specified. This allows reference to the resource data of each function in CSV or BMP format.

An application can be started up by clicking a touch switch, for example.

POINT

Trigger and setting points of application start-up

For the application start-up, GOT internal devices are used as a trigger to start applications. Set the trigger in the [APP Setup 1]/[APP Setup 2]/[Advanced APP Setup] tabs of the [Application Start-up Setting] dialog box. The following shows the GOT internal devices to be used in each tab and the number of applications whose start- up setting can be set.

For details of GOT internal devices and the method of device settings, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Tub Description Reference

APP Setup 1 Up to 16 applications can be allotted for the device GS501. 5.15.1 APP Setup 1/APP

Setup 2 tabAPP Setup 2 Up to 16 applications can be allotted for the device GS502.

Advanced APP Setup Up to 8160 applications can be allotted for the devices GS505 to GS507. 5.15.1 Advanced APP Setup

tub

5.15 Application Start-up 5 - 35

5.15.1 Setting method

1. Follow the procedure below.

Select [Set] [Application Start-up Setting] from the menu.

Right-click the mouse, and select [Set] [Application Start-up Setting] from the menu.

2. The Application Start-up Setting dialog box is displayed. Make the settings referring to the explanation below.

APP Setup 1/APP Setup 2 tab

Item Description

Application to be allotted to the device

GS501

Application to be allotted to the device

GS502

Specify an application to be allotted to the bit of device GS501 or GS502.Up to 32 applications can

be allotted.

Applications allotted start up when these bits turn ON.

The bits which were turned ON will automatically turn OFF after the application is started up.

File Name

Specify the path to the application to be started up by typing (Up to 1023 characters can be

entered.) or clicking .

Available file extensions are as follows:

* .exe, * .com, * .bat

Option

By specifying a file name, the specified file is opened simultaneously with start-up of the

application.

Also, the mode or processing of the application can be specified by specifying options for the

application.

(Availability of options differs depending on the application.) For options available for each

application, refer to the manual or Help of the application to be used.

Up to 1023 characters can be entered in [Option].

Test

Click this button to check if the set application operates normally.

Before executing monitoring with the GT SoftGOT1000, click this button to confirm the normal

operation of the set application.

5 - 36 5.15 Application Start-up

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

POINT

Using environment variables

Using the environment variables (Path) provided by Windows, paths no longer need to be set each time.

For details of environment variables, refer to the manual or Help of Windows. The following shows an example setting of environment variables.

1. Select [Start] [Control Panel] [Performance and Maintenance] [System].

2. Display the Advanced tab and then select [Environment Variables].

3. Select [Path] from [System variables] and click [Edit].

4. Add the path to an executable file to Variable value. (To set multiple paths, place ; (semi-colon) between paths.) Example) Specifying a file located in C:\Program Files\MyProgram

5.15 Application Start-up 5 - 37

Advanced APP Setup tub

POINT

(1) Creation and storage destination of Advanced APP setup file When GT SoftGOT1000 is started, an Advanced APP setup file (AppStartSet.csv) is created for each module. Example) Path of the Advanced APP setup file when starting the module No.1. C:\Program Files\MELSOFT\SGT1000\Multi\00001\AppStartSet.csv The advanced application setting can be changed by editing the Advanced APP setup file directly.

(2) Setting check The setting check may take few minutes according to the file size of the Advanced APP setup file (AppStartSet.csv). Click [No] in the confirmation dialog box when not executing the setting check. Returns to the Advanced APP Setup tab.

Item Description

Advanced APP Setup

Click this item to open the Advanced APP setup file (AppStartSet.csv).

Use the program for opening CSV files, which is set in the personal computer, to open the Advanced APP setup file.

Allot GOT internal devices and applications in the Advanced APP setup file.

(1) Advanced application settings

(2) Setting method of Advanced APP setup file

(3) Precautions for advanced application settings

Setting check Click this item to check the setting contents of the Advanced APP setup file (AppStartSet.csv).

5 - 38 5.15 Application Start-up

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(1) Advanced application settings In the advanced application settings, use the combination of the following two triggers for the application start- up. Trigger 1: Values of GS505 (1 to 255) Trigger 2: Bit ON of either GS506.b0 to b15 or GS507.b0 to b15

Up to 8160 application start-up settings can be set by the combination of Trigger 1 and Trigger 2.

The application starts when both Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 are approved. After the application starts, 0 is stored to GS505. Bits of Trigger 2 which were turned ON (GS506.b0 to b15 and GS507.b0 to b15) will automatically turn OFF.

(2) Setting method of Advanced APP setup file In the Advanced APP setup file, rows and columns are referred to as Record and Field, respectively. For Record, up to 8160 settings can be set by the combination of Trigger 1 and Trigger 2. The following explains the method of setting the Advanced APP setup file in case of opening the file with

Microsoft Excel.

Item Description

Record One Record is configured with Field 1 to 5.

Field 1

Set whether to enable or disable the setting of record.

0: enable

1: disable

Field 2 Set Trigger 1 to start the application.

Set the value of GS505 as Trigger 1. (1 to 255)

Field 3

Set Trigger 2 to start the application.

Set the bit position of GS506/GS507 as Trigger 2. (0 to 31)

GS506.b0 to b15 :0 to 15

GS507.b0 to b15 :16 to 31

Field 4

Set the path of the application to be started.

The following applications can be started.

* .exe, * .com, * .bat

Up to 1023 characters can be input.

Field 5

By specifying a file name, the specified file is opened simultaneously with start-up of the application.

Also, the mode or processing of the application can be specified by specifying options for the application.

Up to 1023 characters can be entered in [Option].

Availability of options differs depending on the application.

For options available for each application, refer to the manual or Help of the application to be used.

255 patterns

Values of GS505 1 2

255 254 253

GS506

b0 b1 b14 b15 GS507

b0 b1 b14 b15

Trigger 1

32 patterns

= 8160

Trigger 2

Field 1 Field 4Field 2 Field 5Field 3

Record

5.15 Application Start-up 5 - 39

Example) When the following two records are set

In the status that 100 is stored in GS505, the application (EXCEL.EXE) set in Setting 1 starts when GS506.b15 is turned ON. In the status that 200 is stored in GS505, the application (WINWORD.EXE) set in Setting 2 starts when GS506.b15 is turned ON.

(3) Precautions for advanced application settings

(a) Settings of Field 1 to 3 which disable record The record including Field 1 to 3 in the following status is disabled. The value is not set. Invalid characters are included. A value outside of the range is set.

(b) Settings of Field 4 in which an error occurs at the application startup The record including Field 4 in the following status causes an error at the application startup. The path is not set. Invalid characters are included. The specified file does not exist. The specified file cannot be executed.

(c) Settings of Field 5 in which an error occurs at the application startup The record including Field 5 in the following status causes an error at the application startup. A line feed is included.

(d) When multiple records with the same setting exist When multiple records have the same settings of Field 2 and 3, only the top record is valid.

(e) When Field 5 does not exist When the settings are configured correctly for Field 1 to Field 4 in the record, and when Field 5 does not exist, Field 5 is processed with no data. Although Field 5 does not exist, the record is processed.

(f) When the record begins with a semicolon The record is invalid.

Item Description

Setting 1

Trigger 1: 100

Trigger 2: 15 (GS506.b15)

Application to be started: EXCEL.EXE

Setting 2

Trigger 1: 200

Trigger 2: 15 (GS506.b15)

Application to be started: WINWORD.EXE

Setting 1 Setting 2

5 - 40 5.15 Application Start-up

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Auxiliary Setup tab

For details of * 1, refer to the next page.

Item Description

Action of when startup condition satisfied *1

Select how the application that was started up from GT SoftGOT1000 behaves when its start-up

condition is satisfied again.

Activate an application in motion:

Select this item to make an application that is already in motion active.

Separately start another application:

Select this item to start up the same application in addition to the one currently running.

Exit the applications when exiting GT

SoftGOT1000 *1

Check this item to terminate GT SoftGOT1000 together with applications that were started up from

GT SoftGOT1000.

Note that applications that are started up after checking [Separately start another application] in

[Action of when startup condition satisfied] are not terminated.

Create application start-up history *1

Check this item to store a startup status of an application in a history. Data that can be stored in a

history differ by the selection made in [Action of when startup condition satisfied].

For details of data storable in a history, refer to the following.

5.15.2 Application start-up history

Display a dialog when application start-up

error is detected. Check this item to display an error dialog box when an error occurs at application start-up.

5.15 Application Start-up 5 - 41

*1 Action of when startup condition satisfied

When a setting is changed while GT SoftGOT1000 is operating, the setting after change is valid only for applications started up after the change. For this reason, even when [Exit the applications when exiting GT SoftGOT1000.] is enabled, some applications may not be terminated simultaneously with termination of GT SoftGOT1000.

Example) When changed from [Activate an application in motion] to [Separately start another application]

Example) When changed from [Separately start another application] to [Activate an application in motion]

Timing of setting

and starting up

Images of application

starting up

Set to [Activate an application in motion] Set to [Separately start another application]

Start-up Start-up Start-up

Simultaneous

termination with GT

SoftGOT1000

Store information involving

activation processing/

termination processing to the

application start-up history

Start-up Active Active

Available

Available

Not available

The application currently

running must be terminated

before starting the same

application separately.

Set to [Activate an

application in motion] Set to [Separately start

another application]

Start-up

Timing of setting

and starting up

Simultaneous

termination

with GT SoftGOT1000

Images of application

starting up

Not available

Start-up

Not available

Start-up

Start-upStart-upStart-upStart-up

Active

Only (3) can be terminated simultaneously

Available only for (3)

The setting after change is valid only for

applications that are started up after

[Activate an application in motion] is set.

Store information

involving activation

processing/ termination

processing to the application

start-up history

5 - 42 5.15 Application Start-up

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5.15.2 Application start-up history

Information involving application start-ups can be stored in a history.

Information storable in a history The following lists information storable in a history. Successful application start-ups Erroneous application start-ups

Activation processing of applications *1 Termination processing of applications*1

*1 This applies only for applications that are started up after [Activate an application in motion] is selected in [Action of when startup

condition satisfied].

Referring to history data The following explains how to refer to history data.

1. Follow the procedure below.

Select [Set] [Application Start-up History] from the menu.

Right-click the mouse, and select [Set] [Application Start-up History] from the menu.

2. History data are displayed.

POINT

History data

Any application start-up history cannot be referred to when no history data are stored. To create history data, check [Create application start-up history] in the application start-up setting. For details of the application start-up setting, refer to the following section.

5.15.1 Setting method

Historical data are stored for each module as follows. They are not deleted even when GT SoftGOT1000 is closed. Delete unnecessary history data.

2006/09/25 19:56:26 No.1 GS501.b0 : The application has been started.

2006/09/25 20:10:30 No.1 GS501.b0 : The application has been terminated.

2006/09/25 13:51:28 No.10000 GS501.b10 : The application has been started.

2006/09/25 14:00:30 No.10000 GS501.b10 : The application has been terminated.

2006/09/25 16:47:02 No.1 GS501.b0 : The application has been started.

2006/09/25 16:57:07 No.1 GS501.b0 : The application has been activated.

MELSOFT(installation folder)

SGT1000

Multi

00001

Application start-up history data

SoftGOT_AppliLog.txt

5.15 Application Start-up 5 - 43

5.15.3 Precautions

(1) Precautions for setting

With personal computers employing VGA (640 480) resolution, the Application Start-up Setting dialog box cannot entirely seen on the screen.

Move the dialog box with the mouse to make settings, or employ resolutions of SVGA (800 600) or higher to the display.

(2) Precautions for creating application start-up history data If an application fails to start up, the error dialog box is displayed. The application cannot be restarted in this state. Close the error dialog box before starting the application. Choose not to display the error dialog box in the application start-up setting, if necessary.

(3) Precautions for exiting applications when exiting GT SoftGOT1000 Applications started from other than GT SoftGOT1000 are not terminated. Also, some applications may not be terminated with this function.

(4) Precautions for use Applications may not be started up if device ON time is too short. Keep the device ON until applications are started up.

5 - 44 5.15 Application Start-up

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5.16 Close Menu

The Close menu at the upper right of the title bar can be disabled (enabled). The Close menu at the upper right of the title bar is grayed out when it is disabled. Clicking the Close menu in this status does not terminate GT SoftGOT1000. The setting selected here remains valid even after GT SoftGOT1000 is terminated and then restarted.

After making this setting, [Exit] provided in the right-click menu and the Project menu is enabled.

Close menu on the title bar

5.16.1 Disabling/enabling the close menu

1. Follow the procedure below. Select [Set] [Close Menu] from the menu. Right-click the mouse, and select [Set] [Close Menu] from the menu.

2. The Close menu at the upper right of the title bar is disabled.

3. To enable back the Close menu at the upper right of the title bar, select [Set] [Close Menu].

5.16 Close Menu 5 - 45

5.17 Interaction with PX Developer

The monitor tool function of PX Developer can be called on GT SoftGOT1000. In PX Developer, when registering GT SoftGOT1000 as the user graphic screen, the registered GT SoftGOT1000 can be started up. With interaction between GT SoftGOT1000 and PX Developer, their functions can be shared. Thus, the interaction improves the operational performance for combining the functions.

For methods of interaction between GT SoftGOT1000 and PX Developer, refer to the following manual.

PX Developer Version Operating Manual (Monitor Tool)

To call monitor tool functions for PX Developer on GT SoftGOT1000, the setting for the special function switch is required. For details on the setting, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Security level change By changing the mode with the monitor tool of PX Developer, the security level of GT SoftGOT1000 can be changed to the level corresponding to the mode. For how to change the security level when changing the mode, refer to the following.

PX Developer Version Operating Manual (Monitor Tool)

When changing the security level, use PX Developer Version1.31H or later.

Set the PX Developer function call for a special function switch on GT Designer3.

Touch the special function switch, and then the monitor tool function for PX Developer set on GT Designer2 is called.

Screen of the called monitor tool function

5 - 46 5.17 Interaction with PX Developer

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5.17.1 Setting method

Before interaction with PX Developer For interaction with PX Developer, the setting is required respectively for GT SoftGOT1000 and PX Developer. The following describes the settings required for interaction with PX Developer.

(1) Settings on GT SofGOT1000

Set to the online mode at start-up.( 3.12 Automatic Startup)

Check the [Display dialog when starting GT SoftGOT1000, specified with the module that has been

activated.] of the auxiliary setup tab on the environment setup dialog box.( 3.5 Environment Setup)

Do not check [Display dialog when closing GT SoftGOT1000.].( 3.5 Environment Setup)

Call project data on GT SoftGOT1000. ( 3.7 Opening the Project)

POINT

Opening project data

Set the PX Developer function call for the current project data opened on the GT SoftGOT1000. For the following cases, open the project data on GT SoftGOT1000.

When the project data has never been opened on GT SoftGOT1000 When the target project data differs from the last monitored project data

When GT SoftGOT1000 is displayed in the full screen mode for the interaction with PX Developer, set the back screen mode for GT SoftGOT1000, and then monitor tool windows are not behind GT SoftGOT1000.

( 5.18 Back screen mode)

(2) Settings on PX Developer For the settings on PX Developer, refer to the following manual.

PX Developer Version Operating Manual (Monitor Tool)

PX Developer function call setting Set to call monitor tool functions on GT SoftGOT1000. To call monitor tool functions for PX Developer on GT SoftGOT1000, the special function switch to which the [PX Developer function call] is set is required. Set the special function switch with GT Designer3. For details on the setting, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

After setting the PX Developer function call in the special function switch with GT Designer3, the settings can be changed on GT SoftGOT1000. (To change the settings, starting GT Designer3 is not needed.) The following describes the method for changing the settings on GT SoftGOT1000.

1. Operate any of the followings.

Click (PX Developer Function Call Setting).

Select [Set] [PX Developer Function Setting] [PX Developer Function Call Setting] from the menu. Right-click the mouse and select [Set] [PX Developer Function Call Setting] from the menu.

5.17 Interaction with PX Developer 5 - 47

2. The dialog box appears for the PX Developer function call setting. Set the dialog box with reference to the following list.

For details on *1, refer to the next page.

Item Description

Toolbar The functions of the toolbar are shown.

OK Press the button to accept the settings and close the dialog box.

Cancel Press the button to cancel the setting and close the dialog box.

Test

Call the monitor tool function that is checked in the [Call] column.

The name of the function is shown in the [Function] column.

The function is used to check a monitor tool function to be called and the position to be displayed when setting with GT

Designer3.

The display position for the monitor tool is always at the upper left of screen. ([Set to the relative coordinates to GT

SoftGOT1000] checked in [Display Position Setting] are disabled.)

For restrictions for calling monitor tool functions, refer to the following manual.

PX Developer Version Operating Manual (Monitor Tool)

Call Assign the functions that is checked in the [Call] column to the special function switch.

The setting is available only with GT Designer3.

Function

Select monitor tool functions to be called when touching the special function switch.

The following indicates the applicable functions.

Faceplate Control Panel Trend Graph

Alarm List Event List Find

Change Mode Communication Status Stop Buzzer

Show the Monitor toolbar Hide the Monitor toolbar Deactivate the Monitor tool

For details for each function, refer to the following manual.

PX Developer Version Operating Manual (Monitor Tool)

Parameter

Input an argument when calling a monitor tool function.

The following indicates the applicable functions and their settings.

Faceplate : Tag name

Control Panel : Group name

Trend Graph : Group name

Position Set the display position of monitor tool windows to be called.

Click the button to show the setting dialog box for the display position.

Comment Comments can be entered arbitrarily. (Up to 512 characters regardless of whether single-byte or double-byte)

Status bar

The function call number, which is checked in the [Call] column, is indicated.

Double-click the displayed function call number to show the column checked in [Call].

The setting is available with GT Designer3.

5 - 48 5.17 Interaction with PX Developer

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

POINT

Precautions for changing PX Developer function call setting

During changing the PX Developer function call setting on GT SoftGOT1000, do not change the PX developer function call setting of the same project data on other GT SoftGOT1000 or GT Designer3. When the PX Developer function call setting of the same project data is changed on multiple software, the setting saved at the last is enabled. The settings saved before the last one are deleted.

*1 Setting for display position

In the setting dialog box for the display position, the position can be set for displaying monitor tool windows to be called.

(Continued to next page)

Item Description

Set to the relative

coordinates to GT

SoftGOT 1000.

To display monitor tool windows in the fixed position on the display regardless of whether display is GT SoftGOT1000, do not

check the item.

If not checked, the coordinates of the display position can be set with their origin at the upper left on the display of a personal

computer.

Check the item to always display monitor tool windows in the fixed position on GT SoftGOT1000.

If checked, the coordinates of the display position can be set with their origin at the upper left on the display of a personal

computer.

5.17 Interaction with PX Developer 5 - 49

Item Description

Window selection

Set the display position when calling monitor tool functions.

To display monitor tool windows, Set the coordinates in [Top], [Left], [Right] and [Bottom].

The coordinates can be automatically set with the (Aiming mark).

The following describes how to use aiming mark.

1) Set a window at the position of a monitor tool window to be displayed. (Any windows, including monitor tool windows, can

be positioned.)

2) Drag the aiming mark to the set window.

If dragged, the window is surrounded with a black frame.

Release the mouse button on the window surrounded with a black flame.

3) The coordinates of the set window are input in the setting dialog box for the display position.

Do not use (Aiming mark) if [Set to the relative coordinates to GT SoftGOT1000.] is checked.

Directly input the coordinates. (Applicable range: -32768 to 32767)

Top Set X-coordinate on the upper left of the window.

Left Set Y-coordinate on the upper left of the window.

Right Set X-coordinate on the upper right of the window.

Bottom Set Y-coordinate on the upper right of the window.

100

100 300

600

5 - 50 5.17 Interaction with PX Developer

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

PX Developer function call sub-setting

1. Operate any of the followings.

Click (PX Developer Function Call Sub-Setting).

Select [Set] [PX Developer Function Setting] [PX Developer Function Call Sub-Setting] from the menu.

Right-click the mouse and select [Set] [PX Developer Function Call Sub-Setting] from the menu.

2. The dialog box appears for the PX Developer function call sub-setting. Set the dialog box with reference to the following explanation.

Item Description

Create PX Developer

Function call history.

Check the item to register the calling status of monitor tool functions as a history.

For available information as history, refer to the following.

5.17.2 PX Developer function call history

5.17 Interaction with PX Developer 5 - 51

5.17.2 PX Developer function call history

Histories for calling monitor tool functions can be registered.

Available information as history The following information can be registered as a history.

Success of calling monitor tool functions Failure of calling monitor tool functions

Referencing history data The following describes the reference method of the history data.

1. Operate any of the followings.

Click (PX Developer Function Call History).

Select [Set] [PX Developer Function Setting] [PX Developer Function Call History] from the menu.

Right-click the mouse and select [Set] [PX Developer Function Call History] from the menu.

2. The history data appears.

POINT

History data

When history data is not registered, the PX Developer function call history cannot be referenced. To reference the history data, check [Create PX Developer Function call history.] in the PX Developer function call sub-setting. For the PX Developer function call sub-setting, refer to the following.

5.17.1 Setting method

The history data is managed for each module as shown below. The data is not deleted even if GT SoftGOT1000 is exited. The unnecessary data is required to delete by the user.

2007/01/10 10:56:47 No.1 Function Call No.1 : Failed to call PX Developer Function.

2007/01/10 10:57:39 No.1 Function Call No.1 : PX Developer Function has been called.

2007/01/10 10:57:53 No.1 Function Call No.2 : Failed to call PX Developer Function.

2007/01/10 11:07:56 No.1 Function Call No.2 : PX Developer Function has been called.

2007/01/11 17:10:35 No.1 Function Call No.3 : PX Developer Function has been called.

2007/01/12 13:25:11 No.1 Function Call No.4 : PX Developer Function has been called.

PX Developer function call history data

MELSOFT (Installation folder)

SGT1000

Multi

00001

SoftGOT_PXFuncLog.txt

5 - 52 5.17 Interaction with PX Developer

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5.18 Back screen mode

The monitor screen of GT SoftGOT1000 is always displayed behind all the other screens. In this mode, other applications can be used while GT SoftGOT1000 is displayed in full-screen.

5.18.1 Setting method

1. Operate any of the followings.

Select [View] [Back Screen Mode] from the menu.

Right-click the mouse and select [View] [Back Screen Mode] from the menu.

2. GT SoftGOT1000 is displayed behind all other screens.

3. To cancel the settings, operate any of the followings.

Select [View] [Back Screen Mode] from the menu. (Note that the settings cannot be canceled in the menu bar if displayed in full screen.)

Right-click the mouse and select [View] [Back Screen Mode] from the menu.

5.19 Scroll Function

The scroll bars are displayed when GT SoftGOT1000 pane is resized to a smaller size.

5.19.1 Setting method

1. Operate the following.

Select [View] [Scroll Bar] from the menu.

2. The scroll bars are displayed when GT SoftGOT1000 pane is resized to a smaller size. Scroll the monitor screen with the scroll bars, and then the hidden part of the monitor screen is displayed. The scroll bars cannot be operated with keyboards. The scroll bars are not displayed with the full screen mode.

3. For hiding the scroll bars, select [View] [Scroll Bar] from the menu.

5.18 Back screen mode 5 - 53

5.20 Exit Key

GT SoftGOT1000 can be ended with the key on a keyboard.

5.20.1 Disabling/enabling exit key

1. Operate the following.

Select [Set] [Exit Key [F12]] from the menu.

2. The key on the keyboard cannot end GT SoftGOT1000. End GT SoftGOT1000 with the Set menu and others.

3. For ending GT SoftGOT1000 with the key on the keyboard, select [Set] [Exit Key [F12]] from the menu.

F12

F12

F12

5 - 54 5.20 Exit Key

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function

The SoftGOT-GOT link function enables GT SoftGOT1000 to connect the GOT via Ethernet. And then, the function synchronizes GT SoftGOT1000 data with GOT project data and resource data. When input objects (touch switch, numerical input, and ASCII input) are input or other operation is perforvaaaamed, the simultaneous operation between GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT must be prevented. The operation must be allowed by either GT SoftGOT1000 or the GOT. GT SoftGOT1000 can monitor a controller connected to the GOT.

POINT

(1) GT SoftGOT1000 project data GT SoftGOT1000 uses project data read from the GOT. Creating new GT SoftGOT1000 project data is not required.

(2) Number of GOTs that can communicate with GT SoftGOT1000 Only one GT SoftGOT1000 can communicate with one GOT. While GT SoftGOT1000 communicates with the GOT, another GT SoftGOT1000 cannot communicate with the GOT.

(3) Controller monitored by GT SoftGOT1000 while the GOT uses the multi-channel function GT SoftGOT1000 monitors a controller connected to the GOT that assigns the channel number 1 to the controller. A controller other than the channel number 1 assigned cannot be monitored. Therefore, objects with devices of a controller other than the channel number 1 assigned are not displayed on the screen. With a touch switch or others, when devices are written to the controller other than the channel number 1 assigned, a system alarm occurs.

(4) Communication status between the GOT and a controller To monitor a controller connected to the GOT by using GT SoftGOT1000, enable communications between the GOT and the controller. If the GOT cannot communicate with the controller, the SoftGOT-GOT link function is not available. For how to connect the controller to the GOT, refer to the following.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3

Ethernet

GT SoftGOT1000

GOT Controller

ControllerGT SoftGOT1000 monitors the controller connected to the GOT. GT SoftGOT1000 only monitors the controller with the channel number 1 assigned on the GOT. GT SoftGOT1000 cannot communicate with the controller other than the channel number 1 assigned.

GT SoftGOT1000 reads GOT project data from the GOT, and monitors the controller with the same project data as the read GOT project data.

5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 55

Difference between the SoftGOT-GOT link function and the VNC server function To operate the GOT on the personal computer connected via Ethernet, two functions are available: SoftGOT-GOT

link function and VNC server function.

(1) SoftGOT-GOT link function With the SoftGOT-GOT link function, GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT each have a project data and monitor a controller. Since GT SoftGOT1000 displays the GOT screen on the personal computer, the processing load on the GOT is reduced. By using a GOT internal device for the screen switching device, GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT can display different screens.

The GOT and GT SoftGOT1000 each operate independently. Therefore, collecting data, including alarm data and logging data, can make a difference in the collection result between the GOT and the personal computer. The functions unavailable for GT SoftGOT1000, including extended functions and option functions, cannot be used with the SoftGOT-GOT link function.

(2) VNC server function

With the VNC server function, the remote screen of the personal computer displays the GOT screen. You can view the data collected by the GOT, including alarm data and logging data, on the personal computer in real time. Even though an extended function or an option function is used, you can also remotely operate the GOT from the personal computer.

Since the VNC server function increases the processing load on the GOT, the GOT can delay displaying data and collecting data, including alarm data and logging data. The GOT can also delay responding to an operation from the VNC client (personal computer).

Personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000)

A 1254 348B

A 1254 348B

In remote operation (10s)

A 1254 348B

A 1254 348B

In remote operation (10s)

GOT

The personal computer reads project data and

resource data from the GOT.

Ethernet

PLC

Monitoring

The personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000) and the GOT each monitor the PLC independently.

Monitoring

Personal computer (VNC client)

A 1254

348B A 1254

348B

In remote operation (10s)

A 1254

348B A 1254

348B

In remote operation (10s)

GOT (VNC server)

Monitoring Remote operation

GOT screen display

Remotely operating the GOT from the personal computer (VNC client) (The personal computer does not monitor the PLC.)Ethernet

PLC

5 - 56 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5.21.1 Project data synchronization

When the SoftGOT-GOT link function is used, GT SoftGOT1000 reads project data or resource data from the GOT, and synchronizes GT SoftGOT1000 data with the GOT data. When the project data is synchronized, GT SoftGOT1000 can display the same screen as that of the GOT. Because the project data used for GT SoftGOT1000 is read from the GOT, creating new GT SoftGOT1000 project data is not required.

Project data synchronization Project data is synchronized at the following timing.

Synchronization timing Reference

Starting the monitor with GT SoftGOT1000 3.8

Selecting [Tool] [GOT Project Data Acquisition] from the menu 3.3

Changing project data of the GOT that is communicating with GT SoftGOT1000 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 57

The following shows the processes of the project data synchronization.

*1 When [Tool] [GOT Project Data Acquisition] is selected from the menu, GT SoftGOT1000 does not determine whether the time

stamp of the project data is matched or not.

*2 When project data of the GOT that is communicating with GT SoftGOT1000 is changed, the confirmation dialog box for the project

data synchronization does not appear.

Not matched

Not used

Project data synchronization is started.

Is the time stamp of the project data matched between

GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT?

Matched

Without synchronization

Used

With synchronization

Is a password set for the project data?

With password

Without password

Without setting

With setting Is [Project Data Upload Password] set?

Enter a password.

Is the password correct?

Correct

Not correct

The confirmation dialog box for the project data synchronization appears.

Select whether to synchronize the data or not.

*1

Is the SoftGOT-GOT link function used between the connected

GOT and a different GT SoftGOT1000 module?

*2

GT SoftGOT1000 project data is updated.

GT SoftGOT1000 starts monitoring.

How is the condition of GT SoftGOT1000 when the project data is

synchronized?

Before monitoring

During monitoring

The condition of GT SoftGOT1000 does not change.

A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the connected GOT is using the SoftGOT-GOT link function.

Before monitoring

The project data and resource data are read from the GOT.

5 - 58 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

POINT

Precautions during project data synchronization

Do not perform the following operations during the project data synchronization. Turn off the GOT or a controller. Press the reset button of the GOT. Disconnect the communication cable. Turn off the personal computer.

If the operations listed above are performed during the project data synchronization, GT SoftGOT1000 project data and GOT project data may differ.

Select [Tool] [GOT Project Data Acquisition], and synchronize GT SoftGOT1000 project data with GOT project data again.

HINT

Automatic password entry for project data synchronization

To automatically enter a password when project data are synchronized, enter a password in the [GOT Link Setup] dialog box beforehand.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Resource data synchronization When resource data is stored in the GOT, the resource data is synchronized at the same time when project data is synchronized. The resource data is copied from the drive A or B in the GOT to the virtual drive A or B in GT SoftGOT1000.

2.4.1 Precautions for using the GT Soft GOT1000

The resource data of the following functions is synchronized.

For how to collect resource data with each function, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

After the resource data is synchronized, GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT collect each resource data. Therefore, the synchronized resource data may differ between GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT.

POINT

Resource data when the multi-channel function is used for the GOT

Regardless of the number of channels for controllers connected to the GOT, GT SoftGOT1000 data is synchronized with all GOT resource data. After the resource data is synchronized, GT SoftGOT1000 only monitors a controller with the channel number 1 assigned. Therefore, GT SoftGOT1000 only collects resource data for the controller with the channel number 1 assigned. (For controllers other than the channel number 1 assigned, resource data is not collected.)

Function

Advanced user alarms, Alarm history

5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 59

5.21.2 Authorization control

When the SoftGOT-GOT link function is used, and when input objects (touch switch, numerical input, and ASCII input) are input or other operation is performed, the right to input objects (authorization) is required. By enabling the input or other operation only when the authorization is obtained, the simultaneous operation between GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT is prevented.

No authorization is required for the following operation or function.

POINT

Operations not recognized by GT SoftGOT1000/GOT

In the following operations, touching is not recognized as the input operation. Screen save status While Key-in disable signal (system signal 1-1.b9) is ON.

Operation/Function Description

Screen operation Moving windows

Switching the order of windows

Function

Functions controlled by triggers (system information, screen switching device, status observation

function, and others)

GOT internal devices (GS654, 655, and 656)

5 - 60 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

HINT

How to check the authorization status

(1) How to check the status with GT SoftGOT1000 When the SoftGOT-GOT link function is used, the status bar on GT SoftGOT1000 displays the status whether the authorization or the exclusive authorization is obtained or not.

The status is checked by GOT internal devices.

5.21.3 Control or notification with GOT internal devices

(2) How to check the status with the GOT Whether the GOT obtains the authorization or the exclusive authorization can be checked by the GOT internal devices.

5.21.3 Control or notification with GOT internal devices

(3) Operation status popup notification function This function notifies whether the authorization is obtained or not and the operation status at the target side with a popup display. The display position of the operation status popup display is common with the display position set for the advanced alarm popup display, and is displayed in bands either on the bottom, center or bottom of the display. If the base screen is switched when displaying the operation status popup, the popup is displayed at the display position set for the advanced alarm popup display in the base screen after switching. If authorization is obtained, the operation status popup display is cleared. The display is set by using the GOT utility or GOT setup of GT Designer3. For how to set the utility, refer to the following.

User's Manual of GOT used

For how to set GT Designer3, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Obtaining the authorization

(1) Obtaining the authorization by using the GOT When GT SoftGOT1000 starts monitoring, the GOT automatically obtains the authorization. When input objects are input without obtaining the authorization with the GOT, the dialog box for obtaining the authorization appears. In the following cases, the GOT automatically obtains the authorization. The GOT is restarted. The GOT obtains the exclusive authorization. While GT SoftGOT1000 obtains the authorization, the user does not operate GT SoftGOT1000 within the

authorization obtained time set in the GOT utility or GOT setup of GT Designer3. GT SoftGOT1000 stops monitoring. GT SoftGOT1000 is terminated. The communication between GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT is disconnected by a communication cable

disconnection or others.

(2) Obtaining the authorization by using GT SoftGOT1000 When input objects are input without obtaining the authorization with the GT SoftGOT1000, the dialog box for obtaining the authorization appears. When the GOT has the exclusive authorization, GT SoftGOT1000 cannot obtain the authorization.

Item Description

OPE Displays the status whether GT SoftGOT1000 obtains the authorization or not.

Lights in green when GT SoftGOT1000 obtains the authorization.

PRI Displays the status whether the GOT obtains the exclusive authorization or not.

Lights in blue when the GOT obtains the exclusive authorization.

5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 61

Exclusive authorization for the GOT

(1) Exclusive authorization This right allows only the GOT to obtain the authorization. (Exclusive authorization) When the GOT obtains the exclusive authorization, the GOT automatically obtains the authorization.

(2) How to obtain the exclusive authorization The exclusive authorization is obtained by using the GOT internal device (GS447) or the GOT utility. For how to set the GOT internal device, refer to the following.

5.21.3 Control or notification with GOT internal devices

For how to set the utility, refer to the following.

the User's Manual for the GOT used

POINT

(1) Operation that automatically obtains the exclusive authorization When the dedicated screen for the utility, the extended function, or the option function is displayed, the GOT obtains the exclusive authorization regardless of the value of the Exclusive authorization control signal (GS447.b0). When the above dedicated screen is switched to the user-created screen, the exclusive authorization is controlled by the value of GS447.b0.

5.21.3 Control or notification with GOT internal devices

(2) SoftGOT-GOT link function The following settings are set by using the GOT utility or GOT setup of GT Designer3.

Authorization obtained time Authorization guarantee time Operation status popup notification

For how to set the utility, refer to the following.

User's Manual of GOT used

For how to set GT Designer3, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

5 - 62 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5.21.3 Control or notification with GOT internal devices

GOT internal devices enable to check the exclusive authorization control or the communication status between GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT. For details of the GOT internal devices, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

(1) Exclusive authorization control (GS447)

(2) SoftGOT-GOT link status control/notification (GS244)

(3) Authorization guarantee status notification signal (GS984)

Bit number Signal name Description

b0 Exclusive authorization control signal By turning on this signal, the GOT obtains the exclusive authorization.

Not available for GT SoftGOT1000

b1 Authorization guarantee time cancel

signal

By turning on this signal, the GOT cancels the setting of authorization

guarantee time.

b2 to b15 Use prohibited -

Bit number Signal name Description

b0 Communication status notification

signal Turns on while GT SoftGOT1000 communicates with the GOT.

b1 Obtaining authorization notification

signal Turns on when the GOT or GT SoftGOT1000 obtains the authorization.

b2 GT SoftGOT1000/GOT identification

signal

Notifies that SoftGOT1000 or the GOT is in use.

0: GOT

1: GT SoftGOT1000 (Changes to 0 if GT SoftGOT1000 does not

communicate with the GOT.)

b3 Obtaining exclusive authorization

notification signal

Turns on when the GOT obtains the exclusive authorization.

Always off for GT SoftGOT1000

b4 System screen displaying notification

signal

Turns on when the dedicated screen for the utility, the extended function, or

the option function is displayed.

Always off for GT SoftGOT1000

b5 to b15 Use prohibited -

Signal name Description

Authorization guarantee status notification signal When the authorization guarantee time is set in GT SoftGOT1000 or GOT,

the remaining authorization guarantee time (seconds) is stored.

5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 63

HINT

How to utilize GOT internal devices

Objects or others displayed only on the GOT can be set by using the GT SoftGOT1000/GOT identification signal (GS244.b2). Example) Bit switch displayed only on the GOT

1. Register a shape to a part to display the shape when the bit switch turns on or off. For how to register the part, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

2. Create the following objects.

For how to set objects, refer to the following. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

3. Arrange the bit switch on the created parts display.

Object Setting item

Bit switch

Set [Device] on the [Device] tab.

Select [None] in [Shape] on the [Style] tab.

Set [OFF] in [Trigger Type], or set GS244.b2 in [Trigger Device] on the [Trigger] tab.

Parts display (Bit parts)

Set the same device as that of the bit switch in [Parts Switching Device] on the [Device/Style] tab.

Set the part registered in the step 1. to the part for [ON] or [OFF] on the [Device/Style] tab.

Set [OFF] in [Trigger Type], or set GS244.b2 in [Trigger Device] on the [Trigger] tab.

5 - 64 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5.21.4 Setting method

This section explains the system configuration and setting method to use the SoftGOT-GOT link function. The SoftGOT-GOT link function in the following system configuration is used as an example to explain the procedures.

Operation flow before using the SoftGOT-GOT link function

Connect the GOT with controllers GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric

Products) for GT Works3

Connect the GOT with the personal computer on which GT

SoftGOT1000 is installed. GOTs, controllers, and others available with the SoftGOT-GOT

link function

Create project data on GT Designer3. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Write the project data and install the extended function OS to the GOT. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Configure the communication setting and environmental setting on GT

SoftGOT1000. Operation and setting on GT SoftGOT1000

Monitoring by GT SoftGOT1000 starts. Operation and setting on GT SoftGOT1000

Ethernet Ethernet (Network No.1)

GT1675M-V

GT SoftGOT1000

Controller

IP address PC No.

Port No.

: 192.168. 3.1 : 1 : 5001

IP address PC No.

Ethernet Download Port GOT Communication Port No.

: 192.168. 3.18 : 3 : 5014 : 5001

Ethernet connection

PC No. : 2

5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 65

GOTs, controllers, and others available with the SoftGOT-GOT link function

(1) GOTs available with the SoftGOT-GOT link function

(2) Controllers and connection types monitorable by GT SoftGOT1000 when using the SoftGOT-GOT link function

(3) Units connecting a personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000) with the GOT

(4) Cables connecting a personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000) with the GOT Use the cables applicable to an interface of the GOT to be used.

Item Type

GOT GT16 GT15

Controller monitored Bus connection CPU direct

connection

Computer link

connection

Ethernet

connection

RCPU

QCPU (Q mode)

Other than redundant system

Redundant system

(Main base unit)

Redundant system

(Extension base unit)

QCPU (A mode)

QSCPU

LCPU

QnACPU

ACPU Other than A1FXCPU

A1FXCPU

FXCPU

Motion controller CPU (Q series)

Motion controller CPU (A series)

MELSECNET/H remote I/O station

CC-Link IE Field Network head module

OMRON PLC

TOSHIBA PLC

YASKAWA PLC

YOKOGAWA PLC

SIEMENS PLC

KEYENCE PLC

CNC CNC C70

MELDAS C6/C64

Robot controlle CRnQ-700/CR750-Q/CR751-Q

CRnD-700/CR750-D/CR751-D

Item Type

GT16 - (Built-in interface)

GT15 GT15-J71E71-100

5 - 66 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(5) Connection conditions for GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT

Operation and setting on GT Designer3

(1) Communication setting between the GOT and the controller Configure the communication setting between the GOT and the controller.

For details of the communication setting, refer to the following.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3

(2) Ethernet download setting Configure the Ethernet download setting between the GOT and GT SoftGOT1000. Set the Ethernet download port.

The following is the example of setting with the [PC (Data Transfer)] dialog box.

1. Select [Common] [Peripheral Setting] [PC (Data Transfer)] from the menu to display the [PC (Data Transfer)] dialog box.

2. Set an interface for [Destination I/F ] in [Ethernet Download].

3. Click the [Detail] button to display the [Detail Setting] dialog box.

Connection type Connection conditions

Distance between controller and PC Number of connectable PCs

GOT Ethernet connection 100m (max. segment length) 1

Item Description

GOT NET No. 1

GOT PC No. 3

GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

GOT Communication Port No. 5001

Item Description

Ethernet download port Set on GT Designer3 (Default: 5014)

5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 67

4. Set the following items, and click the [OK] button. For setting items of the [Detail Setting] dialog box, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 8. COMMUNICATION WITH GOT

5. Click the [OK] button in the [PC (Data Transfer)] dialog box.

POINT

(1) Setting the firewall When the port for the Ethernet communication is blocked by the firewall, a communication error occurs. Disable the firewall or configure the setting to open the port.

(2) Setting when the GOT and the controller are connected by a connection type other than the Ethernet connection To use the SoftGOT-GOT link function, configure the setting for [GOT IP Address] and [Ethernet Download Port No.] by either of the following method. Set [Destination I/F] in [Ethernet Download] in the [PC (Data Transfer)] dialog box. Set a driver for Ethernet in [Driver] in the [Controller Setting] dialog box. Select [Communication Setting] of [Gateway] in the [Controller Setting] dialog box, and then select [Use the

function of Gateway].

(3) Unusable port Nos. (Port No. 49154, 49158) The following GOT port numbers are used as command communication ports. Do not use them for the communication or others between the GOT and the controller. TCP communication: Port No. 49154 UDP communication: Port No. 49158

(3) Writing project data and install the extended function OS to the GOT Write the created project data and install the extended function OS (SoftGOT-GOT Link Function) to the GOT. For writing project data and OS to the GOT, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 8. COMMUNICATION WITH GOT

Item Description

GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Ethernet Download Port No. 5014

5 - 68 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Operation and setting on GT SoftGOT1000

(1) Environmental setting For setting items of the [Environment Setup] dialog box, refer to the following.

3.5.1 Environment setup dialog box

1. Perform either of the following operations to display the [Environment Setup] dialog box.

Clicking (Environment Setup) Selecting [Set] [Environment Setup] from the menu Right-clicking the mouse to select [Environment Setup] from the menu

2. Select [640 480] for [Resolution] in the [Action Setup] tab. (Select [Resolution] according to the resolution of the GOT to be used.)

HINT When the resolutions of GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT differ The resolution of GT SoftGOT1000 is automatically changed according to the resolution of the GOT when GT SoftGOT1000 starts monitoring.

5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 69

(2) Communication setting For setting items of the [Communication Setup] dialog box, refer to the following.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

1. Perform either of the following operations to display the [Communication Setup] dialog box.

Clicking (Communication Setup) Select [Online] [Communication Setup] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Communication Setup] from the menu.

2. Set the following items.

POINT

Connection types of the GOT/controllers and communication settings of GT SoftGOT1000 Configure the communication setting for GT SoftGOT1000 as follows according to the connection type of the GOT

and controllers.

3. Click the [GOT Link] button to display the [GOT Link Setup] dialog box.

Item Description

Connection [Ethernet]-[MELSEC]

Ethernet

NET No. 1

PC No. 1

Port No. 5001

Wait Time Transmission wait time

Connection type of the GOT and controller Communication setting of GT SoftGOT1000

Bus connection, Direct CPU connection, Computer

link connection [Ethernet]-[GOT]

Ethernet connection [Ethernet]-[MELSEC]

5 - 70 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

4. Select [Use GOT Link], and then set the following items.

5. Click the [Communication Test] button to execute the communication test between GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT.

(3) Starting the monitor

1. GT SoftGOT1000 starts monitoring when either of the following operations is executed.

Click (Monitor Start) Select [Online] [Monitor Start] from the menu. Right-click the mouse and select [Monitor Start] from the menu.

2. The project data of GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT are synchronized when monitoring starts. When a password is set for a GOT project data, enter the password.

HINT

(1) When using the SoftGOT-GOT link function, the project data saved in a personal computer cannot be opened on GT SoftGOT1000. To open project data on GT SoftGOT1000, clear [Use GOT Link] in the [GOT Link Setup] dialog box.

(2) To automatically enter a password when project data are synchronized, enter a password in the [GOT Link Setup] dialog box beforehand.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Item Description

Destination GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

Destination GOT Port No. 5014

Communication method TCP

5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 71

5.21.5 Management of GT SoftGOT1000 modules with the SoftGOT-GOT link function (GT SoftGOT1000 Commander)

GT SoftGOT1000 Commander is the tool to manage the multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules with the SoftGOT-GOT link function. The monitor status check of GT SoftGOT1000 modules and the operation to start or stop monitoring are available by GT SoftGOT1000 Commander.

Operating environment The operating environment is the same as that of GT SoftGOT1000. For details of the operating environment of GT SoftGOT1000, refer to the following.

2.1 Operating Environment

How to install or uninstall the tool SoftGOT1000 Commander is installed or uninstalled automatically when GT SoftGOT1000 is installed or uninstalled. However, if comments are set by GT SoftGOT1000 Commander, the comments are not deleted even if GT SoftGOT1000 Commander is unstalled.

How to start the tool

Select [Start]*1 [MELSOFT]*2 [GT Works3] [GT SoftGOT1000 Commander] from the menu of Windows to start GT SoftGOT1000 Commander.

*1 Select [All Programs] on the [Start] screen, or select [Start] [All Programs].

*2 [MELSOFT Application] appears for a version of GT Works3 earlier than 1.136S.

Ethernet

GOT (station No.2) Controller Controller

GOT (station No.1)

GT SoftGOT1000 Commander

GT SoftGOT1000 (module No.2) : Communicating with the GOT (station No.2)

Management Management

Monitoring the controller connected to the GOT (station No.2) by GT SoftGOT1000 (module No.2)

Monitoring the controller connected to the GOT (station No.1) by GT SoftGOT1000 (module No.1)

GT SoftGOT1000 (module No.1) : Communicating with the GOT (station No.1)

5 - 72 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Operating procedure GT SoftGOT1000 Commander manages target GT SoftGOT1000 modules with the SoftGOT-GOT link function. GT SoftGOT1000 Commander can start the target GT SoftGOT1000 modules and make the target GT SoftGOT1000 modules start or stop monitoring controllers. The status of the target GT SoftGOT1000 modules is displayed in the monitor status list on the [Monitor Status] tab.

Setting item (1) Monitor Status tab

Menu item

(1) Menu

(2) Help

Item Description

GT SoftGOT1000 Activation Default Setting

[Environment Setup]

[Environment Setup] of GT SoftGOT1000 can be registered as default.

The default value registered can be reflected as set value when starting

GT SoftGOT1000 from GT SoftGOT1000 Commander.

[Communication Setup]

[Communication Setup] of GT SoftGOT1000 can be registered as default.

The default value registered can be reflected as set value when starting

GT SoftGOT1000 from GT SoftGOT1000 Commander.

[Reset]

Restores the setting of [Environment Setup] and [Communication Setup]

to the initial value.

Exit Exits GT SoftGOT1000 Commander.

Item Description

About GT SoftGOT1000 Commander The version information of GT SoftGOT1000 Commander can be checked.

5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 73

Setting item

Item Description

Always display GT SoftGOT1000

Commander in front Select this item to display the GT SoftGOT1000 Commander window on the top front.

Checks the version information of GT SoftGOT1000 Commander.

Monitor Status Checks the monitor status of GT SoftGOT1000 modules with the SoftGOT-GOT link function.

(1) Monitor Status tab

GOT Search Searches GOTs connected to the Network.

(2) GOT Search tab

Exits GT SoftGOT1000 Commander.

5 - 74 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(1) Monitor Status tab

(Continued to next page)

Item Description

Monitor status list

Displays GT SoftGOT1000 modules with the SoftGOT-GOT link function.

When any of rows are clicked, the clicked row is highlighted and selected.

The display contents of the monitor status list displayed in icon display by the display switching button differs

from the same in detail display.

Point (1) Display switching button

No. Displays the GT SoftGOT1000 module number.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the GOT which communicates with the GT

SoftGOT1000 module.

N/W No.

Displays the network number of the GOT which communicates with the GT

SoftGOT1000 module.

When the connection type between the GOT and the controller is the bus

connection or the direct CPU connection, [-] is displayed.

PC No.

Displays the GOT station number of the GOT which communicates with GT

SoftGOT1000 module.

When the connection type between the GOT and the controller is the bus

connection or the direct CPU connection, [-] is displayed.

Project Title Displays the project title of the project data read by the GOT.

Status

Displays the GT SoftGOT1000 module status.

Online: During monitoring

Offline: Stopped monitoring

Uploading: During reading project data from the GOT

Not Started: The target GT SoftGOT1000 module is not activated.

Comment Displays the comment entered in the [No. n Property] dialog box.

Display switching button

Clicking the button displays the monitor status list in detail.

Clicking the button displays the monitor status list with icons.

Point (1) Display switching button

Monitor status list

Display switching button

5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 75

Item Description

Select any rows in the monitor status list, and then click the [Front Display] button to display the GT

SoftGOT1000 module window of the selected row on the top front.

The window can also be displayed on the top front when [No.], [IP Address], [N/W No.], [PC No.], or [Project

Title] in each row of the monitor status list is double-clicked.

However, when the back screen mode is enabled by the GT SoftGOT1000 module, the GT SoftGOT1000

module window is not displayed on the top front even if the [Front Display] button is clicked.

When the GT SoftGOT1000 module window on the top front and the GT SoftGOT1000 Commander window

are overlapped, the GT SoftGOT1000 Commander window is displayed on the top front.

Select a row (a GT SoftGOT1000 module) in the monitor status list and click the [Status Switching] button to

switch the status of the selected GT SoftGOT1000 module ([Online] or [Offline], [Not Started] to [Online]/

[Offline]).

The monitor statuses can also be switched when [Status] in each row of the monitor status list is double-

clicked.

However, the monitor statuses cannot be switched while [Uploading] is displayed on [Status].

When starting GT SoftGOT1000 newly, clicking the [Start SoftGOT1000] button displays the [Start

SoftGOT1000] dialog box.

(a) Start SoftGOT1000

Selecting GT SoftGOT1000 in the monitor status list and clicking the [Stop] button exits the selected GT

SoftGOT1000.

Select any rows in the monitor status list, and then click the [Comment Edit] button to display the [No. n

Property] dialog box.

The [No. n Property] dialog box can also be displayed when [Comment] in each row of the monitor status list

is double-clicked.

(b) n module number property

Select an inactivated GT SoftGOT1000 module in the monitor status list and click the [Erase Machine Info]

button to delete the information of the selected GT SoftGOT1000 module.

The information of the GT SoftGOT1000 module being activated cannot be deleted.

5 - 76 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

POINT

(1) Display switching button The display switching button switches the monitor status list between detail display and icon display. When in icon display, [No.] and [IP Address] are displayed in the monitor status list.

(2) Context menu Select a row in the detail display or an icon in the icon display of the monitor status list and right-click to display the context menu. In the context menu, [Front Display], [Status Switching], [Stop] and [Comment Edit] can be selected.

Detail display button

Icon display button

5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 77

(a) Start SoftGOT1000

(b) n module number property

Item Description

No. Specify the machine No. of GT SoftGOT1000 to be started.

Environmental Setup

Configure the environmental settings of GT SoftGOT1000 to be started.

The settings are identical to [Environment Setup] in GT SoftGOT1000.

3.5.1 Environment setup dialog box

Communication Setup

Configure the communication settings of GT SoftGOT1000 to be started.

The settings are identical to [Communication Setup] in GT SoftGOT1000.

3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box

Default Setting Reflection

Reflect default values of Environment Setup/Communication Setup of GT SoftGOT1000 to be started in a

batch.

If the Environment Setup/Communication Setup already exists in the specified machine, the default value

setting is overwritten.

Activate GT SoftGOT1000

and start monitoring Select this item to start the monitoring after starting GT SoftGOT1000.

Activate in the monitor-only

mode Select this item to start GT SoftGOT1000 in the monitor-only mode.

Item Description

Comment

Up to 255 characters can be entered.

One line feed is counted as two characters.

The comments are saved with the IP address of the GOT linked.

Therefore, even if the GT SoftGOT1000 module number to be communicated to the GOT is changed to a

new module number, the displayed comment is the same as that of the old module number.

5 - 78 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(2) GOT Search tab

*1 When no [No.] checkbox is selected, selecting [Display the checked GOT only] will display nothing in the GOT Search list.

Item Description

Display the checked GOT

only

The GOT Search list displays only the GOTs corresponding to the [No.] checkboxes selected.*1

Once this item is selected, the displayed GOTs will remain the same even when GT SoftGOT1000

Commander is started again or the [Auto Acquisition] button is clicked.

GOT Search list

Displays found GOTs.

Click the row to select and highlight it.

No. Displays the number of found GOTs.

GOT type Displays the type of found GOTs.

IP address Displays the IP address of found GOTs.

Port No. Displays the port No. used for uploading the project data of found GOTs.

Clicking the [Auto Acquisition] button displays the [GOT Type], [IP Address] and [Port No.] of the searched

GOT.

For linking GT SoftGOT1000 newly started to the found GOT, select the row of the found GOT in the GOT

Search list and click the [Start SoftGOT1000] button to display the [Start SoftGOT1000] dialog box.

The [Start SoftGOT1000] dialog box can be also displayed by double-clicking the GOT row selected in the

GOT Search list.

The settings are identical to the [Start SoftGOT1000] dialog box in the monitor status list tab.

(1) Monitor Status tab (a) Start SoftGOT1000

GOT Search list

5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 79

POINT

(1) Search target GOT Auto acquisition searches only GT16 GOTs.

(2) IP Address duplication If a duplicated [IP Address] is found, GTSoftGOT1000 can not be started from the GOT Search list. Also, the duplication of [IP Address] may not be found, even if existing. Therefore, make sure to check the whole system before searching again.

(3) Resolution, IP Address, and Destination GOT Port No. settings Click [Communication Setup], [Environment Setup], or [OK] in the [Start SoftGOT1000] dialog box to display the following dialog box.

(a) Select [Yes]. [Resolution] in the environmental Setting is changed to [GOT Type] of the row selected in the GOT

Search list. [Destination GOT IP Address] and [Destination GOT Port No.] in the GOT Link Setup dialog box is

changed to [IP Address] and [Port No.] of the row selected in the GOT Search list.

(b) Select [No]. GT SoftGOT1000 is started with the values set in the [Communication Setup] or [Environment Setup] dialog box.

5 - 80 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

5.21.6 Precautions

Settings and OS required for the GOT

(1) Ethernet setting Set [GOT IP Address] and [Ethernet Download Port No.] for project data.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 7. COMMUNICATION WITH GOT

(2) Extended function OS Install the extended function OS (SoftGOT-GOT Link Function) on the GOT.

5.21.4 Ethernet download setting (2) Ethernet download setting

Setting devices which affect the control of GOT/GT SoftGOT1000 It is recommended to set a GOT internal device for a control device of the function which affects the control of the GOT/GT SoftGOT1000 (including the system signal, screen switching device, or security level device). When a controller device is set for the device which affects the control of the GOT/GT SoftGOT1000, due to an operation of either GT SoftGOT1000 or the GOT, an unexpected behavior may be caused to the other. The following shows the setting example of how to enable the function which affects the control of the GOT/GT SoftGOT1000 only when the authorization is obtained by using a GOT internal device and the script function.

Example: When the authorization is obtained, the screens of GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT are switched according

to the value (screen number) of a controller device (D1000)

For the screen switching device, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

For the script function, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Function not available with the SoftGOT-GOT link function When using the SoftGOT-GOT link function, the PX developer function call is not available.

Operation without the authorization Clicking and touching an input object are not recognized as input operations if the authorization is not obtained. The dialog box for obtaining the authorization appears. (When the GOT has the exclusive authorization, GT SoftGOT1000 cannot obtain the authorization.)

Timing of which the project data synchronization is not executed During the following operations, project data are not synchronized. The project data synchronization is executed when the operation ends.

While displaying the print preview While displaying the dialog box which disables operation of other screens if the dialog box is displayed

Using the SoftGOT-GOT link function in the system that requires the quick communication response When the SoftGOT-GOT link function is used in the system that requires the quick communication response, the Ethernet connection is recommended between the GOT and the monitor PLC. If the GOT monitors the PLC connected by the direct CPU connection by using the SoftGOT-GOT link function, the communication response speed of GT SoftGOT1000 will decrease.

Function Setting

Screen switching device Set a GOT internal device (GD1000).

Script function

Set the following project script in which the trigger type is set to [Ordinary].

if([b:GS244.b1] == ON){

[w:GD1000] = [w:D1000];

}

5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 81

5.22 Monitor-only Mode

The monitor operation of GT SoftGOT1000 by a mouse and keyboard is disabled in this mode. It is useful when using GT SoftGOT1000 only for monitoring.

5.22.1 Setting method

After starting GT SoftGOT1000

1. Enable the monitor-only mode by either of the following operations. Select [Set] [Monitor-only Mode] from the menu. Right-click the mouse, and select [Set] [Monitor-only Mode] from the menu.

2. Start monitoring. 3.8 Starting Monitoring

Before starting GT SoftGOT1000

1. Select [Start]*1 [MELSOFT]*2 [GT Works3] from the menu of Windows, right-click [GT SoftGOT1000] , and select [Properties].

*1 Select [All Programs] on the [Start] screen, or select [Start] [All Programs].

*2 [MELSOFT Application] appears for a version of GT Works3 earlier than 1.136S.

2. The [GT SoftGOT1000 Properties] dialog box appears. Select the [Shortcut] tab, and then add [/MNTONLY] to the end of the character strings in [Target]. (A one-byte space is required before /.)

3. After adding [/MNTONLY], click the [OK] button.

4. At the next GT SoftGOT1000 startup, GT SoftGOT1000 starts with the monitor-only mode enabled.

5 - 82 5.22 Monitor-only Mode

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

POINT

Precautions for the monitor-only mode

(1) Once monitoring starts, the monitor-only mode cannot be switched between enabled and disabled.

(2) When the monitor-only mode is enabled, the keyboard input function cannot be set.

(3) When the monitor-only mode is enabled, and when the mouse cursor is moved on the monitor screen, the mouse cursor is disabled. (The mouse cursor appearance is the same as the appearance set on the personal computer.) Even if the mouse cursor is disabled, the menu can be displayed by clicking the right mouse button.

HINT

Confirmation dialog box displayed at monitor startup in the monitor-only mode

The confirmation dialog box appears when monitoring starts with the monitor-only mode enabled. Whether to display the confirmation dialog box or not can be set by selecting the following item in the [Environment Setup] dialog box.

[Display dialog at the start of monitoring in the monitor-only mode.] in the [Auxiliary Setup] tab

3.5.1 Auxiliary Setup tab

5.22 Monitor-only Mode 5 - 83

5 - 84 5.22 Monitor-only Mode

APPENDICES

Appendix1 Internal Device Interface Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 1

Appendix2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 12

Appendix3 Applicable Project Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 20

Appendix4 Unsupported Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 20

Appendix5 Open Source Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 21

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Appendix1 Internal Device Interface Function

The internal device interface function is a function that can be used with Microsoft Visual C++, Microsoft Visual C#,

Microsoft Visual Basic, and Embarcadero C++ Builder. By using the internal device interface function, the GOT internal device can be read/written from a user-created application.

Appendix.1.1 Development environment

The following shows development environment for an application using the internal device interface function.

Appendix.1.2 Accessible devices

For the GOT internal devices that can be read/written from a user-created application, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

POINT

Access to internal devices

Internal devices can be accessed only while GT SoftGOT1000 is running. Internal devices hold their values while GT SoftGOT1000 is running.

Internal devices can be accessed irrespective of the connection type of GT SoftGOT1000.

Development environment

Language Software

C++

Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0, Microsoft Visual C++ .NET(2002),

Microsoft Visual C++ .NET 2003, Microsoft Visual C++ 2005,

Microsoft Visual C++ 2008, Embarcadero C++ Builder XE

C# Microsoft Visual C# .NET(2002), Microsoft Visual C# .NET 2003,

Microsoft Visual C# .NET 2005, Microsoft Visual C# .NET 2008

BASIC

Microsoft Visual Basic 6.0, Microsoft Visual Basic .NET(2002),

Microsoft Visual Basic .NET 2003, Microsoft Visual Basic .NET 2005,

Microsoft Visual Basic .NET 2008

App - 1

Appendix.1.3 Internal device interface function

The internal device interface function is used to operate internal devices from a created program.

The following describes the internal device interface function.

The following files are required when using the internal device interface function.

The above files are stored in the Disk4 folder in the DVD-ROM of GT Works3. When using an application that uses the internal device interface function, store GDevlib_GT16.dll in the same folder as the application or in a folder with a path specified. The folder storing the above files is shown below.

Internal device interface function Description Reference

unsigned long GDev_OpenMapping() Opens and maps the shared memory of the GOT internal device. Appendix.1.4

long GDev_Read() Reads from the GOT internal device. Appendix.1.5

long GDev_Write() Writes to the GOT internal device. Appendix.1.6

void GDev_CloseUnMapping() Unmaps and closes the shared memory of the GOT internal device. Appendix.1.7

File name Description

GDevlib_GT16.dll DLL for the internal device interface

GDevlib_GT16.lib LIB for the internal device interface

GDevlib_GT16.h Header file for the internal device interface

DVD-ROM drive

GDevlib

Module

GDevlib_GT16.dll

GDevlib_GT16.lib

DLL for internal device interface

LIB for internal device interface

GDevlib_GT16.h Header file for internal device interface

App - 2

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

POINT

Before using the internal device interface function

Use the GDevlib_GT16.dll, GDevlib_GT16.lib, or GDevlib_GT16.h that is stored in the same DVD-ROM as GT SoftGOT1000 to be used. If using any file that is copied from another DVD-ROM, an error such as application error may occur.

HINT

Processing flow when the internal device interface function is used

The following shows the processing flow when the internal device interface function is used in a program.

Open and map the shared memory of internal device

GDev_OpenMapping function

Read/write to internal device

GDev_Read function

GDev_Write function

Unmap and close the shared memory of internal device

GDev_CloseUnMapping function

App - 3

Appendix.1.4 GDev_OpenMapping (Opening and mapping the internal device shared memory)

The following shows details of the GDev_OpenMapping function.

(1) Function Opens and maps the shared memory of the GOT internal device.

(2) Format

(a) For Visual C++and C++ Builder

ulMapPointer = GDev_OpenMapping(*lphMapFile, sGotNo)

(b) For Visual C#

ulMapPointer = GDev_OpenMapping(*lphMapFile, sGotNo)

(c) For Visual Basic ulMapPointer = GDev_OpenMapping(hMapFile, sGotNo)

(3) Explanation The shared memory handle for the internal device of GT SoftGOT1000 that is specified by sGotNo is obtained, and map processing is performed with the handle. The obtained shared memory handle is stored to lphMapFile or hMapFile, and the obtained shared memory address is stored to ulMapPointer.

(4) Return value Normal termination: A number other than "0" (shared memory address) is returned. Abnormal termination: "0" is returned.

(5) Precautions for using the GDev_OpenMapping function After the GDev_OpenMapping function is called and required processings are performed, the GDev_CloseUnMapping function must always be called. If it is not called, a memory leak may result and an error such as application error may occur.

Variable name Variable type Description I/O

ulMapPointer unsigned long Return value (shared memory address) Output

*lphMapFile HANDLE Shared memory handle Output

sGotNo short Module No. of GT SoftGOT1000 (1 to 32767) Input

Variable name Variable type Description I/O

ulMapPointer uint32 Return value (shared memory address) Output

*lphMapFile intPtr Shared memory handle Output

sGotNo int16 Module No. of GT SoftGOT1000 (1 to 32767) Input

Variable name Variable type Description I/O

ulMapPointer unsigned long Return value (shared memory address) Output

hMapFile HANDLE Shared memory handle Output

sGotNo short Module No. of GT SoftGOT1000 (1 to 32767) Input

App - 4

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Appendix.1.5 GDev_Read (Reading from the internal device)

The following shows details of the GDev_Read function.

(1) Function Reads from the GOT internal device.

(2) Format

(a) For Visual C++and C++ Builder

lReturn = GDev_Read(ulMapPointer, sDevNameID, lDevNum, *lpsDataTable, lDataSize)

(b) For Visual C#

lReturn = GDev_Read(ulMapPointer, sDevNameID, lDevNum, *lpsDataTable, lDataSize)

(c) For Visual Basic lReturn = GDev_Read(ulMapPointer, sDevNameID, lDevNum, sDataTable(0), lDataSize)

(3) Explanation The device values in the area starting from the device specified by sDevNameID and lDevNum are batch read for the number specified by IDataSize to the shared memory address specified by ulMapPointer. The read device values are stored to lpsDataTable or sDataTable. Specify the shared memory address that has been obtained by the GDev_OpenMapping function.

(4) Return value Normal termination: "0" is returned. Abnormal termination: A number other than "0" is returned.

Variable name Variable type Description I/O

lReturn long Return value Output

ulMapPointer unsigned long Shared memory address Input

sDevNameID short Device name ID (GB:0/GD:1/GS:2) Input

lDevNum long Device number Input

*lpsDataTable short Device value read Output

lDataSize long Number of data points to be read Input

Variable name Variable type Description I/O

lReturn int32 Return value Output

ulMapPointer uint32 Shared memory address Input

sDevNameID int16 Device name ID (GB:0/GD:1/GS:2) Input

lDevNum int32 Device number Input

*lpsDataTable int16 Device value read Output

lDataSize int32 Number of data points to be read Input

Variable name Variable type Description I/O

lReturn long Return value Output

ulMapPointer unsigned long Shared memory address Input

sDevNameID short Device name ID (GB:0/GD:1/GS:2) Input

lDevNum long Device number Input

sDataTable(n) short Device value read Output

lDataSize long Number of data points to be read Input

App - 5

(5) Precautions for using the GDev_Read function The maximum number of data points to be read, that is set for IDataSize, must be specified in the following range. For bit device (GB) specification

Device number + (Number of data points to be read 16)-1 Terminal device number For word device (GD/GS) specification

Device number + Number of data points to be read-1 Terminal device number In the case of bit device (GB) specification, specify a multiple of 16 for the device number. Secure the area for lpsDataTable with the same size as lDataSize or more. If the area is insufficient, an error such as application error may occur.

(6) Device specifying method For bit device (GB) specification

Example) Reading 1-point data from GB64 (sDevNameID=0, lDevNum=64, lDataSize=1)

Example) Reading 3-point data from GB80 (sDevNameID=0, lDevNum=80, lDataSize=3)

For word device (GD/GS) specification

Example) Reading 3-point data from GD5 (sDevNameID=1, lDevNum=5, lDataSize=3)

Example) Reading 1-point data from GS500 (sDevNameID=2, lDevNum=500, lDataSize=1)

Variable name Storage device

lpsDataTable[0] GB64 to GB79

Variable name Storage device

lpsDataTable[0] GB80 to GB95

lpsDataTable[1] GB96 to GB111

lpsDataTable[2] GB112 to GB127

Variable name Storage device

lpsDataTable[0] GD5

lpsDataTable[1] GD6

lpsDataTable[2] GD7

Variable name Storage device

lpsDataTable[0] GS500

App - 6

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Appendix.1.6 GDev_Write (Writing to the internal device)

The following shows details of the GDev_Write function.

(1) Function Writes to the GOT internal device.

(2) Format

(a) For Visual C++and C++ Builder

lReturn = GDev_Write(ulMapPointer, sDevNameID, lDevNum, *lpsDataTable, lDataSize)

(b) For Visual C#

lReturn = GDev_Write(ulMapPointer, sDevNameID, lDevNum, *lpsDataTable, lDataSize)

(c) For Visual Basic lReturn = GDev_Read(ulMapPointer, sDevNameID, lDevNum, sDataTable(0), lDataSize)

(3) Explanation The device values are batch written to the devices specified by sDevNameID and lDevNum for the shared memory address specified by ulMapPointer for the number specified by lDataSize. The device values to be written are stored to lpsDataTable or sDataTable. Specify the shared memory address that has been obtained by the GDev_OpenMapping function.

(4) Return value Normal termination: "0" is returned. Abnormal termination: A number other than "0" is returned.

Variable name Variable type Description I/O

lReturn long Return value Output

ulMapPointer unsigned long Shared memory address Input

sDevNameID short Device name ID (GB:0/GD:1/GS:2) Input

lDevNum long Device number Input

*lpsDataTable short Device value to be written Input

lDataSize long Number of data points to be written Input

Variable name Variable type Description I/O

lReturn int32 Return value Output

ulMapPointer uint32 Shared memory address Input

sDevNameID int16 Device name ID (GB:0/GD:1/GS:2) Input

lDevNum int32 Device number Input

*lpsDataTable int16 Device value to be written Input

lDataSize int32 Number of data points to be written Input

Variable name Variable type Description I/O

lReturn long Return value Output

ulMapPointer unsigned long Shared memory address Input

sDevNameID short Device name ID (GB:0/GD:1/GS:2) Input

lDevNum long Device number Input

sDataTable(n) short Device value to be written Input

lDataSize long Number of data points to be written Input

App - 7

(5) Precautions for using the GDev_Write function The maximum number of data points to be written, that is set for lDataSize, must be specified in the following range. For bit device (GB) specification

Device number + (Number of data points to be written 16)-1 Terminal device number For word device (GD/GS) specification

Device number + Number of data points to be written-1 Terminal device number In the case of bit device (GB) specification, specify a multiple of 16 for the device number. Secure the area for lpsDataTable with the same size as lDataSize or more. If the area is insufficient, an error such as application error may occur.

(6) Device specifying method For bit device (GB) specification

Example) Writing 1-point data from GB64 (sDevNameID=0, lDevNum=64, lDataSize=1)

Example) Writing 3-point data from GB80 (sDevNameID=0, lDevNum=80, lDataSize=3)

For word device (GD/GS) specification

Example) Writing 3-point data from GD5 (sDevNameID=1, lDevNum=5, lDataSize=3)

Example) Writing 1-point data from GS500 (sDevNameID=2, lDevNum=500, lDataSize=1)

Variable name Storage device

lpsDataTable[0] GB64 to GB79

Variable name Storage device

lpsDataTable[0] GB80 to GB95

lpsDataTable[1] GB96 to GB111

lpsDataTable[2] GB112 to GB127

Variable name Storage device

lpsDataTable[0] GD5

lpsDataTable[1] GD6

lpsDataTable[2] GD7

Variable name Storage device

lpsDataTable[0] GS500

App - 8

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Appendix.1.7 GDev_CloseUnMapping (Unmapping and closing the internal device shared memory)

The following shows details of the GDev_CloseUnMapping function.

(1) Function Unmaps and closes the shared memory of the GOT internal device.

(2) Format

(a) For Visual C++and C++ Builder

GDev_CloseUnMapping(hMapFile, ulMapPointer)

(b) For Visual C#

GDev_CloseUnMapping(hMapFile, ulMapPointer)

(c) For Visual Basic

GDev_CloseUnMapping(hMapFile, ulMapPointer)

(3) Explanation The unmap processing is performed for the shared memory address specified by ulMapPointer and the shared memory handle specified by hMapFile is released. Specify the shared memory address and shared memory handle that have been obtained by the GDev_OpenMapping function.

(4) Return value None

(5) Precautions for using the GDev_CloseUnMapping function After the GDev_OpenMapping function is called and required processings are performed, the GDev_CloseUnMapping function must always be called. If it is not called, a memory leak may result and an error such as application error may occur.

Appendix.1.8 Precautions for the internal device interface function

The following shows precautions for using an application that uses the internal device interface function.

(1) When the GDev_OpenMapping function is called The GDev_OpenMapping function must be called after GT SoftGOT1000 is started.

(2) When the GDev_Read function or the GDev_Write function is called The GDev_Read function and the GDev_Write function must be called while GT SoftGOT1000 is running.

(3) When exiting GT SoftGOT1000 If GT SoftGOT1000 has been exited in a status the GDev_OpenMapping function is called, the GDev_CloseUnMapping function must be called immediately. If GT SoftGOT1000 is started again without the GDev_CloseUnMapping function called, after GT SoftGOT1000 is exited, GT SoftGOT1000 may not operate normally. If GT SoftGOT1000 does not operate normally, the GDev_CloseUnMapping function should be called before GT SoftGOT1000 is exited.

Variable name Variable type Description I/O

hMapFile HANDLE Shared memory handle Input

ulMapPointer unsigned long Shared memory address Input

Variable name Variable type Description I/O

hMapFile intPtr Shared memory handle Input

ulMapPointer uint32 Shared memory address Input

Variable name Variable type Description I/O

hMapFile HANDLE Shared memory handle Input

ulMapPointer unsigned long Shared memory address Input

App - 9

Appendix.1.9 Sample program

A sample program using the internal device interface function is stored in the Disk4 folder in the DVD-ROM of GT Works3. Use the sample program as a reference when creating an application using the internal device interface function. The following shows folders storing the sample programs.

DVD-ROM drive

GDevlib

Sample

VB

VC

Sample program storing folder for Visual Basic 6.0

Sample program storing folder for Visual C++ 6.0

VC# Sample program storing folder for Visual C# .NET(2002)

App - 10

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

This sample program is used to read/write data from/to the internal device of GT SoftGOT1000 that is running.

Example) Sample program for Visual C++

Setting item Description

GB Device GB device monitor area

Device No. Input a device range (GB0 to GB65535).

Write Value

Turns ON the device specified for Device No.

Turns OFF the device specified for Device No.

Read Value

Displays the reading result of the specified device.

The value is updated only while monitoring is performed.

Bit device status

"1" : ON

"0" : OFF

GD Device GD device monitor area

Device No. Input a device range (GD0 to GD65535).

Write Value

Write value input area

(GD)

Set a value to be written to the device specified for Device No.

Input format: Signed decimal number (-32768 to 32767)

Writes the value input for the write value input area to the specified device.

Read Value

Displays the reading result of the specified device. (Updates only while monitoring

is performed.)

Display format: Signed decimal number (-32768 to 32767)

The value of the internal device specified for Device No. is read.

GS Device GS device monitor area

Device No. A device range (GS0 to GS2047) can be input.

Write Value

Write value input area

(GS)

Set a value to be written to the device specified for Device No.

Input format: Signed decimal number (-32768 to 32767)

Writes the value input for the write value input area to the specified device.

Read Value

Displays the reading result of the specified device. (Updates only while monitoring

is performed.)

Display format: Signed decimal number (-32768 to 32767)

The value of the internal device specified for Device No. is read.

Starts monitoring. (Displayed only while monitoring is stopped.)

Stops monitoring.(Displayed only while monitoring is performed.)

Write value input area (GD)

Write value input area (GS)

Monitor execution status

ON

OFF

Write

Write

Start monitor

Stop monitor

App - 11

Appendix2 Troubleshooting

Appendix.2.1 Error message

The following table indicates the error messages occurred in [GT SoftGOT1000] themselves, the Descriptions and resolutions.

Error messages displayed when GT SoftGOT1000 is used.

(Continued to next page)

Error message Definition and cause Corrective action

Adobe Reader is not installed properly.

Install Adobe Reader included with the product.

Adobe Reader is not installed.

Adobe Reader is not installed correctly. After uninstalling Adobe Reader, reinstall it.

Easysocket is not installed. Perhaps GT SoftGOT1000 is not installed

correctly. After uninstalling GT SoftGOT1000, reinstall it.

GS###.b##: The .exe file is invalid (not .exe or

error in .exe image).

Access to the specified file (application) was

not made.

The specified file (application) is corrupted.

The specified file (application) is not an

executable file.

Check the settings of the application start-up

setting.

Check the access right of the specified file

(application).

Specify an operable file (application).

Specify an executable file (application).

GS###.b##: Failed to start the application.

The specified file (application) is corrupted.

Relevant applications are not installed

properly.

There is not sufficient space left in memory/

hard disk.

GT SoftGOT1000 was terminated illegally last

time.

Check the settings of the application start-up

setting.

Specify an operable file (application).

Install relevant applications again.

Terminate unnecessary applications.

Increase free space in the hard disk.

Restart GT SoftGOT1000.

Restart the personal computer.

GS###.b##: The operating system denied

access to the specified file.

Access to the specified file (application) was

not made.

The specified file (application) is corrupted.

Relevant applications are not installed

properly.

Check the settings of the application start-up

setting.

Check the access right of the specified file

(application).

Specify an operable file (application).

Install relevant applications again.

GS###.b##: The specified file was not found.

The specified file (application) does not exist.

Check the settings of the application start-up

setting.

Specify an existing file (application).

Install relevant applications again. GS###.b##: The specified path was not found.

GS###.b##: There was not enough memory to

complete the operation.

There is not sufficient space left in memory/

hard disk.

GT SoftGOT1000 was terminated illegally last

time.

Terminate unnecessary applications.

Increase free space in the hard disk.

Restart GT SoftGOT1000.

Restart the personal computer.

The GT SoftGOT1000 is not installed correctly. Can not find the Windows sregistry for GT

SoftGOT1000. After uninstalling GT SoftGOT1000, reinstall it.

Please do logoff/the termination of Windows after

ending 'GT SoftGOT1000'.

Close 'GT SoftGOT1000' before log out or shut

down the Windows.

Close 'GT SoftGOT1000' before log out or shut

down the Windows.

Advanced APP setup file was not found. The Advanced APP setup file does not exist.

Create the Advanced APP setup file

[ \SGT1000\Multi\*****\AppStartSet.c

sv].

There is no application associated with the

extension of Advanced APP setup file (.csv).

The application associated with the extension

(.csv) of the Advanced APP setup file does not

exist.

The application associated with the file

extension is not installed correctly.

Set the application associated with the extension

(.csv) of the Advanced APP setup file.

Install the application associated with the file

extension again.

App - 12

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(Continued to next page)

Error message Definition and cause Corrective action

Failed to start the application.

Access to the Advanced APP setup file is

disabled.

The Advanced APP setup file is corrupted.

The application associated with the file

extension is not installed correctly.

Not enough free memory or hard disk space.

GT SoftGOT1000 was exited illegally last time.

Illegal process is running.

Check the access right of the Advanced APP

setup file.

Create the Advanced APP setup file again.

Install the application associated with the file

extension again.

Exit unnecessary applications.

Increase the free space of the hard disk.

Restart GT SoftGOT1000.

After restarting the personal computer, restart

GT SoftGOT1000.

The check result cannot be displayed.

Access to the Advanced APP check file is

disabled.

The Advanced APP setup check file is corrupted.

The application associated with the file extension

is not installed correctly.

Check the access right of the Advanced APP

setup check file.

Install the application associated with the file

extension again.

Access to the Advanced APP Setup file is

denied.

Access to the Advanced APP setup file is

disabled.

Check the access right of the Advanced APP

setup file.

Failed to open the Advanced APP Setup check

file.

Access to the Advanced APP setup check file is

disabled.

The Advanced APP setup check file is corrupted.

Check the access right of the Advanced APP

setup check file.

Failed to check Advanced APP Setup. The operating environment is not supported. Install GT SoftGOT1000 again.

History file was not found. The application start-up history file cannot be

started up. Check the application start-up history file.

Easysocket has an invalid version. GT SoftGOT1000 may be not installed correctly. After uninstalling GT SoftGOT1000, reinstall it.

The specified project data was created by using a

previous version of the GT Designer3.

Some functions may not operate properly.

Do you want to proceed?

The version of the GT Designer3 on which the

project data is created is later than the GT

SoftGOT1000.

Select a button on the displayed dialog box.

Yes: Execute reading and perform monitoring

with operable functions.

No: Install GT SoftGOT1000 of the same version

as GT Designer3 and execute reading again.

The major versions of the specified project data

and GT SoftGOT1000 Standard monitor OS do

not match.

Project data : Ver. ##.##

GT SoftGOT1000 Standard monitor OS

: Ver. ##.##

Specify the project data of the same version.

The following OS major versions are not

matched.

The major version of OS in GT Designer3 that

stores the created project data to be read.

The standard monitor OS in GT SoftGOT1000

Install GT SoftGOT1000 with the same version

as GT Designer3 that stores the created

project data, and read the data again.

Create the project data for GT Designer3 that

version is same as the version of GT

SoftGOT1000, and read the data again.

Failed to take a snap shot.

GT SoftGOT1000 was closed illegally last

time.

Illegal process is running.

Restart GT SoftGOT1000.

After restarting the personal computer, restart

GT SoftGOT1000.

Vertical project data is not supported. The project data for vertical display type has

been read. Read project data for horizontal display.

A Communication error occurred.

Retry : Executes communication again.

Cancel : Cancels all communication.

To retry communication, restart the GT

SoftGOT1000.

Cable was disconnected.

Cable was broken.

After checking for the left causes, select the

button in the displayed dialog box.

[Retry]

Restarts communication.

[Cancel]

After Cancel is selected, all communications will

not be made.

When performing monitoring, restart GT

SoftGOT1000.

Transmission speed (Baud rate) is incorrect.

The PLC CPU type is different from that of the

project setting.

Cannot set up the operating environment.

Insufficient disk space or memory may be the

cause.

Not enough free disk space.

GT SoftGOT1000 was exited illegally last time.

Illegal process is running.

Exit unnecessary applications.

Increase the free space of hard disk to 250MB

or more.

Restart GT SoftGOT1000.

After restarting the personal computer, restart

GT SoftGOT1000.

App - 13

(Continued to next page)

Error message Definition and cause Corrective action

Failed to set up an operating environment.

Check the followings and retry the operation.

Free disk space.

Access privileges to the environment file.

Validity of environment files (invalid files or

files not found).

Effect of antivirus software's real-time

surveillance.

Not enough free disk space. Increase the free space of hard disk to more than

250M bytes.

Can not access the necessary file for GT

SoftGOT1000s operation.

Check whether GT SoftGOT1000 has been

operated already.

GT SoftGOT1000 may be not installed correctly. After uninstalling GT SoftGOT1000, reinstall it.

Real-time protection in antivirus software gets in

the way of accessing the file.

Stop real-time protection in antivirus software, or

set the following multiple paths from exception

settings in anti-virus software and put aside real-

time protection in anti-virus software.

C:\Program Files\MELSOFT\SGT1000

Path name is too long. Save the GT Designer3 under too many directory

levels.

In Option setting, set the project of GT Designer3

again.

GOT type of the project is different from the one

specified in the GT SoftGOT1000.

[Project data setting]

GOT type : #####(###x###)

PLC type : #####

[GT SoftGOT1000 setting]

Resolution : ###x###

Connection : #####(#####)

The GOT type set in the project is different from

the GOT type specified in GT SoftGOT1000.

Make correction so that the GOT type of the

project created on GT Designer3 is the same as

the GOT type of GT SoftGOT1000.

GOT type (Resolution) of the project is different

from the one specified in the GT SoftGOT1000.

[Project data setting]

GOT type : #####(###x###)

PLC type : #####

[GT SoftGOT1000 setting]

Resolution : ###x###

Connection : #####(#####)

The GOT type (Resolution) set in the project is

different from the GOT type (Resolution)

specified in GT SoftGOT1000.

Make correction so that the GOT type

(Resolution) of the project created on GT

Designer3 is the same as the GOT type

(Resolution) of GT SoftGOT1000.

PLC type of the project is different from the one

specified in the GT SoftGOT1000.

[Project data setting]

GOT type : #####(###x###)

PLC type : #####

[GT SoftGOT1000 setting]

Resolution : ###x###

Connection : #####(#####)

The PLC type set in the project is different from

that in GT SoftGOT1000.

Make correction so that the PLC type of the

project created on GT Designer3 is the same as

the CPU type of GT SoftGOT1000.

Manual file cannot be found.

Please install manuals.

GT Manual 1000 is not installed.

GT Manual 1000 is not installed correctly. After uninstalling GT Manual, reinstall it.

Cannot stop monitoring.

Close the dialog on monitor screen and retry.

Since the message such as "This function cannot

be used now" was displayed on the screen, GT

SoftGOT1000 could not be exit correctly.

After selecting in the dialog box to erase the

on-screen message, exit from GT SoftGOT1000

again.

There was the other internal cause than the

above that did not allow to exit from the software. After selecting in the dialog box, wait for

some time and exit from GT SoftGOT1000 again.

Fail in the delete of resource data.

Please close resource data if it is opened.

Check the file access privilege.

Failed in erasing resource data after loading

screen data.

If there is resource data opened by another

software, close that file.

Check the file access privilege.

Initialization for reading failed.

Execute one of the following operations.

Close the dialog if it is displayed.

Switching to offline mode may have been

failed.

Wait for several seconds and retry the

operation.

Since the message such as "This function cannot

be used now" was displayed on the screen, this

funciton can not be loaded.

After selecting in the dialog box to erase the

on-screen message, re-load the function.

Waiting for completion of internal process. re-load the function after a few minutes.

OK

OK

OK

App - 14

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Error message Definition and cause Corrective action

Failed to read a project data.

Check the following items and retry the

operation.

Data size and number of the data.

Free disk space.

Access privileges to the environment file.

Validity of project data (invalid file or file not

found).

Screen data size was too large. Decrease the screen data size to 57MB or less.

Not enough free disk space. Increase the free space of hard disk to more than

250M bytes.

Can not access the project data. Check the access privilege of the project data.

Not compatible with the project setting. Check whether setting is correct on GT

Designer3.

This data is not for GT SoftGOT1000 project.

The project data does not exist.

Use a correct project data or normal project data.

Check that the project data exists.

App - 15

Appendix.2.2 Troubleshooting for license key

The troubleshooting and error messages related to license key, the error definition and cause, and corrective actions are described below.

Troubleshooting for license key

(1) Troubleshooting for USB license key When attaching a USB license key to the personal computer and it is not recognized, check the following.

POINT

If the system driver is not installed or uninstalled properly even if the above corrective actions are taken, use the installer of the following system driver. (GT SoftGOT1000 installation folder)\SGT1000\SystemDriver\SPI_768.exe*

*When using a PC CPU module, use SPI_710.exe.

Problem Definition and cause Corrective action

The dialog for starting a wizard to search an

added hardware is displayed.

The license key was attached to the PC before

the installation of system driver.

Exit the GT SoftGOT1000 without any installation

and then remove the license key.

When attaching the GT15-SGTKEY-U after

installing the system driver, it is recognized as

license key.

The GT15-SGTKEY-U is not recognized as

license key by the OS when attached to the PC.

The GT15-SGTKEY-U was attached to the PC

before the installation of system driver, and an

illegal driver was installed.

Install the system driver after removing the GT15-

SGTKEY-U.

When attaching the GT15-SGTKEY-U after

installation, it is recognized as license key.

The GT SoftGOT1000 displays an error message

involving license key despite System Driver is

installed/license key is installed/the port is ready

for use.

System Driver has an error.

Remove the GT15-SGTKEY-U and uninstall

System Driver once (In Windows, select [Add or

Remove Programs] and delete [Sentinel

Protection Installer #.#.#].)

Install System Driver again.

Install the GT15-SGTKEY-U after installing

System Driver.

Then it is recognized as license key.

When the license key is attached, the dialog box

asking you to specify the storage location of the

system file is displayed.

The automatic detection of the system file failed.

Specify the system file in the following location.

C:\Program Files\Common Files\SafeNet

Sentinel\Sentinel System Driver\sntnlusb.sys

App - 16

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

(2) Troubleshooting Related to the License Key Check the following items if the license key is not recognized even if it has been installed on the DOS/V personal computer or the printer does not operate properly after being connected on the external side of the license key.

POINT

If the system driver is not installed or uninstalled properly even if the above corrective actions are taken, use the installer of the following system driver. (GT SoftGOT1000 installation folder)\SGT1000\SystemDriver\SPI_768.exe*

*When using a PC CPU module, use SPI_710.exe.

Problem Definition and cause Corrective action

The license key cannot be recognized

The license key is connected to the personal

computer's serial port. Connect the license key to the printer port

The license key is installed on the DOS/V

personal computer via the printer switch (the

devices are installed in the order from the DOS/V

personal computer, then the printer switch, and

then the license key).

Install the license key closer to the DOS/V

personal computer than the printer switch (i.e.,

install the devices in the order from the DOS/V

personal computer, then the license key, and

then the printer switch.)

It is possible that the power supply to the printer

port is shut off via setting of the DOS/V personal

computer.

Change the settings so that the printer port can

be used.

The system driver is not installed. Install the system driver.

The parallel port is unusable. Set the personal computer, Windows, etc. to

make the parallel port usable.

In the case of a Fujitsu-made FM/V Series

computer

Install the system driver and restart the

DOS/V personal computer.

Cannot print

If a printer cable that is 5 m or longer is used, the

printing may be disturbed by noise from the

surroundings.

Check the cable length.

(Check the overall cable length when a switch is

used.)

App - 17

Appendix.2.3 Troubleshooting related to mail transmission

(1) Troubleshooting

(2) Error code No dialogue boxes are displayed by GT SoftGOT1000 for errors related to mail transmission and dialup. Refer to the mail history data for error codes and error messages. For how to check the mail history data, refer to the following.

5.6.5 Mail history

The following table lists the error codes related to mail transmission and dialup, their definitions and causes, and the corrective actions to take:

POINT

Error notifications from the mail server

When an error is notified from the mail server, the error message will be displayed in the mail history data. The following shows an example. (Example) Error message displayed when an error is notified from the SMTP server

When an error as shown above occurs, consult the server administrator.

Appendix.2.4 Troubleshooting for print

Problem Definition and cause Corrective action

Mail is not sent.

The mail send setting of GT SoftGOT1000

has not been made. Make the mail send setting of GT SoftGOT1000.

Mail send setting has been made on GT

Designer3.

The mail send setting method is wrong. Reexamine the mail send setting of GT SoftGOT1000.

Error code Definition and cause Corrective action

600 to 750s Setting errors of personal computers and

peripheral devices (e.g., modem) Refer to the Help function in Windows.

Error message

SMTP Error Report : #####.

Problem Definition and cause Corrective action

GT SoftGOT1000 does not

output data to a printer even

when the hard copy is

executed from a monitor

screen with [Print to printer

(Hard Copy Function)]

enabled.

Printing is disabled due to a problem in the

printer.

Select [Project] [Print Setup] on GT SoftGOT1000 to

check the settings of the printer.

Print a test page from Windows to check the settings of the

printer.

Check if the printer is powered on and online.

Install the printer driver again.

The output target in the hard copy setting of

the project data is set to [File].

Open the project data with GT Designer3, and select [Printer]

for [Target] in the hard copy setting.

App - 18

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Appendix.2.5 Troubleshooting for file save problems

Appendix.2.6 GOT error code list

For the system alarm detected with GOT, refer to the following manual.

GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)

Appendix.2.7 Error code list when using the internal device interface function

The following shows lists of error codes that occur when the internal device interface function is used.

GDev_OpenMapping function

GDev_Read function/GDev_Write function

Problem Definition and Cause Corrective action

No files are output when the

hard copy command is

executed from the monitor

screen of the GT

SoftGOT1000.

The file cannot be saved due to problems

with the output destination disk.

Confirm that the folder that is designated as a virtual drive

does exist.

Check the access right for the folder that is designated as a

virtual drive.

Confirm that there is enough free space in the folder that is

designated as a virtual drive.

The file cannot be saved, since file number

external control device value is set to a

value outside of the range 1 to 9999.

Confirm that the file number external control device value is

set to a value in the range 1 to 9999.

Error code Definition and cause Corrective action

0 Opening or mapping of the shared memory was failed.

(Access to internal devices disabled)

Start GT SoftGOT1000.

Specify the module No. (1 to 32767) of the existing GT

SoftGOT1000.

Exit unnecessary applications to secure memory space.

Restart the personal computer.

Error code Definition and cause Corrective action

-1 The specified device is illegal. Specify the ID of an existing device name.

-2 The specified head device is outside the range. Specify an existing device number.

-3 The specified terminal device is outside the range. Specify device points of the existing device range.

-9 The specified shared address is illegal. Specify the shared memory address obtained by the

GDev_OpenMapping function.

App - 19

Appendix3 Applicable Project Data

Use GT SoftGOT1000 of the same version as the GT Designer3. When the versions of GT SoftGOT1000 and GT Designer3 are different, install the same version of GT SoftGOT1000/GT Designer3.

HINT

When using the project data created on the GT Designer3 version older than the GT SoftGOT1000 version

Open the project data on the GT Desinger3 of the same version as the GT SoftGOT1000, and save the project data.

Appendix4 Unsupported Functions

Compared to GT SoftGOT2, the GT SoftGOT1000 does not support the following functions.

Function Description

Remote device monitoring Monitoring a device monitored by GT SoftGOT1000 with a PC or mobile phone using the mail function

GT Designer3 versionGT SoftGOT1000 version

App - 20

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

Appendix5 Open Source Software

Appendix.5.1 OpenSSL toolkit

This product uses OpenSSL toolkit licensed under the OpenSSL License and the Original SSLeay License. The permission notice of the OppenSSL License and Original SSLeay License is described below.

LICENSE ISSUES ==============

The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a double license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts.

OpenSSL License ---------------

/* ==================================================================== * Copyright (c) 1998-2018 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in * the documentation and/or other materials provided with the * distribution. * * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this * software must display the following acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" * * 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to * endorse or promote products derived from this software without * prior written permission. For written permission, please contact * openssl-core@openssl.org. * * 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" * nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written * permission of the OpenSSL Project. * * 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following * acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY * EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR * PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR * ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT * NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; * LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, * STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) * ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED * OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. * ==================================================================== * * This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young * (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim * Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). * */

App - 21

Original SSLeay License -----------------------

/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) * All rights reserved. * * This package is an SSL implementation written * by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). * The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. * * This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as * the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions * apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, * lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation * included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms * except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). * * Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in * the code are not to be removed. * If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution * as the author of the parts of the library used. * This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or * in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software * must display the following acknowledgement: * "This product includes cryptographic software written by * Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" * The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library * being used are not cryptographic related :-). * 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from * the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: * "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * SUCH DAMAGE. * * The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or * derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be * copied and put under another distribution licence * [including the GNU Public Licence.] */

App - 22

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

O F

G T

S of

tG O

T 10

00

3

O P

E R

A T

IO N

O F

G T

S

of tG

O T

10 00

4

C O

N N

E C

T IO

N

5

F U

N C

T IO

N S

A P

P E

N D

IC E

S IN

D E

X

INDEX

[A]

Applicable project data .................................... App-20 Application Start-up ............................................. 5-35 Authorization control............................................ 5-60 Automatic Startup ................................................ 3-28

[B]

Back screen mode............................................... 5-53 Settings ............................................................ 5-53

Barcode Reader Connection ............................. 4-186 Bus Connection ................................................... 4-64

[C]

CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection ................................................................. 4-143,4-145 Close Menu ......................................................... 5-45 CNC Connection

Direct CPU connection................................... 4-147 Ethernet Connection ...................................... 4-148

Communication Setup ......................................... 3-14 Communication setup dialog box..................... 3-15

Computer Link Connection .................................. 4-73 Connectable modules ........................................................................... 4-141

Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card ......................................... 4-85 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection ............................................................. 4-143,4-146 Computer Link Connection .............................. 4-74 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET10 Connection ....................................................................... 4-141 MODBUS(R)/TCP Connection....................... 4-183 OMRON PLC Connection .............................. 4-159 TOSHIBA PLC Connection .................. 4-165,4-179 YASKAWA PLC Connection ................ 4-169,4-172 YOKOGAWA PLC Connection ...................... 4-175

Connection cable CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection.... 4-144 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection ........... 4-146 CNC Connection .................................. 4-147,4-148 Computer Link Connection .............................. 4-75 Direct CPU Connection.................................... 4-66 Ethernet Connection ........................................ 4-86 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET10 Connection ....................................................................... 4-142 MODBUS(R)/TCP Connection....................... 4-183 OMRON PLC Connection .................... 4-158,4-159 Robot Controller Connection.......................... 4-153 TOSHIBA PLC Connection ........ 4-162,4-165,4-179 YASKAWA PLC Connection ................ 4-169,4-172 YOKOGAWA PLC Connection ...................... 4-175

Controller that allows monitoring ........................... 4-1

[D]

Direct CPU Connection ....................................... 4-65 Displaying File Information in PLC ........................ 5-8

[E]

Environment Setup ................................................ 3-8 Environment setup dialog box............................ 3-8

Ethernet Connection When using Built-in Ethernet port LCPU........ 4-109 When using Built-in Ethernet port MELSEC iQ-F (one-to-one connection, multiple connection) ......................................... 4-96 When using Built-in Ethernet port QCPU ......... 4-99 When using Built-in Ethernet port RCPU ......... 4-86 When using C Controller module ................... 4-113 When using CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module................................ 4-135 When using CNC C70 (Q17nNCCPU)........... 4-132 When using Ethernet module (A series) ........ 4-123 When using Ethernet module (FX series) ...... 4-127 When using Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R series) ..................................... 4-91 When using Ethernet module (Q series, L series)......................................... 4-104 When using Ethernet module (QnA series).... 4-117

Exit Key................................................................ 5-54 Exiting from GT SoftGOT1000............................. 3-27

[F]

Full Screen Mode................................................. 5-22 Full screen mode types .................................... 5-22 Precautions ...................................................... 5-25 Setting method ................................................. 5-24

Functions that Cannot Be Used............................. 2-6

[G]

GDev_CloseUnMapping function ......................App-9 GDev_OpenMapping function ...........................App-4 GDev_Read function .........................................App-5 GDev_Write function..........................................App-7 GT SoftGOT1000 Commander............................ 5-72

[H]

Help ..................................................................... 3-30

[I]

Interaction with PX Developer ............................. 5-46 PX Developer function call history ................... 5-52 PX Developer function call setting ................... 5-47 PX Developer function call sub-setting ............ 5-51

Internal device interface function .......................App-1

[K]

Keyboard Input .................................................... 5-19 Keyboard input enabling/disabling procedure ......................................................... 5-19 Precautions ...................................................... 5-21

Index-1

When operating the numerical input function or the ASCII input function from the keyboard of a PC ............................................. 5-19

[M]

Mail Function ....................................................... 5-10 How to set up the mail function........................ 5-12 Mail function overview...................................... 5-10 Mail history ....................................................... 5-18 Operation flow when using the mail function.... 5-11 Sending e-mail ................................................. 5-16

MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET10 Connection ........................................................ 4-140 Menu Bar ............................................................... 3-5 MODBUS(R)/TCP Connection .......................... 4-183 Monitor Stop ........................................................ 3-26 Monitoring Operation ........................................... 3-26 Monitor-only Mode............................................... 5-82 Moving the Window ............................................. 5-30

Cascade........................................................... 5-30 Minimize all windows........................................ 5-30 Setting method................................................. 5-31 Window movement........................................... 5-31 Window movement types................................. 5-30

[O]

Object Script Error ............................................... 5-34 OMRON PLC Connection.................................. 4-157 Opening the Project ............................................. 3-21 Operation Environment.......................................... 2-1 Operation of GT SoftGOT1000.............................. 3-1

[P]

Popup Menu ........................................................ 5-26 Popup menu ineffective/effective ..................... 5-26 Precautions ...................................................... 5-26

Precautions............................................................ 2-8 Precautions for using the GT Soft GOT1000 ..... 2-8 Precautions on license key .............................. 2-10

Print ....................................................................... 5-2 Performing page setup....................................... 5-4 Performing print preview .................................... 5-3 Performing print setup........................................ 5-4 Printing ............................................................... 5-2

Property ................................................................. 5-5

[R]

Resource Data....................................................... 5-6 RFID Connection ............................................... 4-187 Robot Controller Connection ............................. 4-153

[S]

Screen Configuration of GT SoftGOT1000............ 3-4 Script Error .......................................................... 5-33 Scroll Function ..................................................... 5-53

Setting method................................................. 5-53 SIEMENS PLC Connection ............................... 4-178 Snap Shot .............................................................. 5-1 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function ............................... 5-55

Specifications......................................................... 2-3 License key specifications.................................. 2-5 Specifications of the GT SoftGOT1000.............. 2-3

Starting Monitoring............................................... 3-25 Starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules ............................................................... 5-27

Precautions for use .......................................... 5-29 Startup procedure ............................................ 5-27

System Alarm ...................................................... 5-32 System Configuration ............................................ 2-1

[T]

Tool bar.................................................................. 3-7 TOSHIBA PLC Connection................................ 4-165 Troubleshooting ...............................................App-12

Error Message..............................................App-12 Troubleshooting for License Key..................App-16 Troubleshooting Related to Mail Transmission .....................................................................App-18

[U]

Unsupported Functions....................................App-20

[Y]

YASKAWA PLC Connection.............................. 4-168 YOKOGAWA PLC Connection .......................... 4-175

Index-2

REVISIONS

* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

(Continued to next page)

Print Date * Manual Number Revision

Oct., 2009 SH(NA)-080860ENG-A First printing: Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.01B

Jan., 2010 SH(NA)-080860ENG-B Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.10L

FXCPU (compatible with the Ethernet connection)

OMRON PLC (compatible with SYSMAC CJ2, CP1E and Ethernet connection)

Compatible with the GT Designer3 compressed file (*.GTW)

Connection with LCPUs supported

SoftGOT-GOT link function supported

May, 2010 SH(NA)-080860ENG-C Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.14Q

Windows 7 supported

Connection with Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU supported

Management of GT SoftGOT1000 modules with the SoftGOT-GOT link function by GT

SoftGOT1000 Commander enabled

Monitor-only mode supported

Jun., 2010 SH(NA)-080860ENG-D Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.17T

Connection with LJ72GF15-T2 supported

Oct., 2010 SH(NA)-080860ENG-E Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.19V

OMRON PLC (SYSMAC CJ2M compatible)

Advanced setting of the application startup is supported.

Extension of module No. (1 to 32767) at multiple startups is supported.

OMROM PLC (Ethernet connection) supports connection types which can be

monitored by SoftGOT-GOT link function.

Jan., 2011 SH(NA)-080860ENG-F Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.23Z

FXCPU (compatible with the USB connection)

Connection with C Controller module supported

Connection with the CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter unit supported

Advanced setting of the application startup is supported

MODBUS/TCP connection supported

Displaying the [File Information in PLC] dialog box by using the GOT special register

(GS device) supported

The internal device interface function supports the C# language.

Apr., 2011 SH(NA)-080860ENG-G Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.28E

Barcode reader connection supported

RFID connection supported

The internal device interface function supports Embarcadero C++ Builder EX

Jul., 2011 SH(NA)-080860ENG-H Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.31H

Windows 7 64-bit OS supported

Connection with L02CPU-P and L26CPU-PBT supported

CC-Link IE Field Network connection supported

Oct., 2011 SH(NA)-080860ENG-I Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.37P

Displaying the comment set with GT SoftGOT1000 Commander on the title bar supported

Connection with TOSHIBA PLC (Unified Controller nv series) supported

Changing the security level in the interaction with PX Developer supported

Jan., 2012 SH(NA)-080860ENG-J Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.40S

Connection with SIEMENS PLC (ISMATIC S7-300/400 series) supported

GT SoftGOT1000 Commander supports displaying only the selected GOTs.

The troubleshooting for the licence key has been updated.

Apr., 2012 SH(NA)-080860ENG-K Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.45X

Connection with OMRON PLC (CJ2H-CPU6 -EIP) supported

Connection with YASKAWA PLC (MP2300S) supported

Connection with FX3GC supported

REVISIONS - 1

* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

(Continued to next page)

Print Date * Manual Number Revision

Jun., 2012 SH(NA)-080860ENG-L Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.54G

In the communication setting, the setting range of the timeout time is changed.

Sep., 2012 SH(NA)-080860ENG-M Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.58L

Connection with YOKOGAWA PLC (F3SP71-4N) supported

The information site on the Internet is changed to the Mitsubishi Electric Factory Automation

Global Website.

Nov., 2012 SH(NA)-080860ENG-N Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.63R

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed

Connection with Q24DHCCPU-V supported

Connection with YASKAWA PLC (CP-317) supported

Feb., 2013 SH(NA)-080860ENG-O Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.67V

Connection with Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU,

L02SCPU, L26CPU, LJ71E71-100 supported

The connection setting of giving priority to communication processing is supported.

Communiction effective mode with PLC supported

SIEMENS S7 Ethernet OP communication supported

SoftGOT-GOT link function supports the UDP/IP communication

May, 2013 SH(NA)-080860ENG-P Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.70Y

Connection with YOKOGAWA PLC (F3SP76-7S) supported

Connection with L06CPU and Q170MSCPU supported

Jun., 2013 SH(NA)-080860ENG-Q Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.74C

Windows 8 supported

Connection with L02SCPU-P, L06CPU-P, L26CPU-P, Q24DHCCPU-LS, CR750-Q, CR750-D,

CR751-Q, CR751-D, FX3S supported

Ethernet connection with KEYENCE PLC (KV series) supported

Sep., 2013 SH(NA)-080860ENG-R Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.100E

Changed the error message displayed when GT softGOT1000 is used.

Nov., 2013 SH(NA)-080860ENG-S Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.104J

FX3U-232-ADP-MB compatible

Jan., 2014 SH(NA)-080860ENG-T Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.108N

Windows 8.1 supported

Jun., 2014 SH(NA)-080860ENG-U Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.117X

Connection with R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU, RJ71C24,

RJ71C24-R2, RJ71EN71, Q24DHCCPU-VG, F3SP71-4S supported

Jul., 2014 SH(NA)-080860ENG-V Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.118Y

Partial corrections

Oct., 2014 SH(NA)-080860ENG-W Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.122C

GT Works3 Version1 is no longer compatible with Windows XP Service Pack2 and

Windows 2000.

Jan., 2015 SH(NA)-080860ENG-X Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.126G

Connection with the motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) supported

Connection with the MELSEC iQ-F supported

Apr., 2015 SH(NA)-080860ENG-Y Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.130L

R08PCPU, R16PCPU, R32PCPU, and R120PCPU are supported.

R12CCPU-V is supported.

Jul., 2015 SH(NA)-080860ENG-Z Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.136S

R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, and R120ENCPU are supported.

The folder name [MELSOFT Application] displayed in the Windows start menu has been

changed to [MELSOFT].

REVISIONS - 2

* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

Print Date * Manual Number Revision

Oct., 2015 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AA Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.144A

R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, and R120SFCPU are supported.

Dec., 2015 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AB Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.150G

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed.

Q26DHCCPU-LS is supported.

Access to an LCPU or a QCPU via an RCPU by the Ethernet connection is supported.

May, 2016 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AC Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.155M

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed.

GT SoftGOT1000 is compatible with Windows 10.

Aug., 2016 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AD Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.160S

Partial corrections

Oct., 2016 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AE Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.165X

[Delay time] has been added to the mail setup.

Jun., 2017 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AF Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.180N

Partial corrections

Oct., 2017 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AG Partial corrections

Apr., 2018 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AH Partial corrections

Oct., 2018 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AI Partial corrections

Apr., 2019 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AJ A description of OpenSSL toolkit has been added.

Oct., 2019 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AK Partial corrections

Jan., 2020 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AL Partial corrections

Oct., 2020 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AM Partial corrections

Apr., 2022 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AN Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.275M

GT SoftGOT1000 is compatible with Windows 11.

GT SoftGOT1000 has ended support for Windows XP and Windows Vista.

Jul., 2022 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AP Compatible with GT SoftGOT2000 Version1.280S

FX3U-ENET and FX Configurator-EN are supported.

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric

Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the

contents noted in this manual.

REVISIONS - 3

SH(NA)-080860ENG-AP

Intellectual Property Rights

Trademarks GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Microsoft, Microsoft Access, Excel, SQL Server, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Visual C#, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, and Windows Vista are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Intel, Intel Core, Pentium, and Celeron are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries. MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA. VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries. Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Copyrights The screens (screenshots) are used in accordance with the Microsoft Corporation guideline. VS-FlexGrid Pro Copyright 2003 ComponentOne LLC. SPREAD Copyright 1999 FarPoint Techonologies, Inc.

GT SoftGOT1000 Version3

MODEL

MODEL CODE

SW3-SOFTGOT-O-E

1D7MA9

SH(NA)-080860ENG-AP(2207)MEE

Operating Manual for GT Works3

Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan, July 2022.

When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.

HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN NAGOYA W

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the GT SoftGOT1000 Mitsubishi works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 Software Operating Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operating Manual for Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 as well as other Mitsubishi manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operating Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 Software Operating Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 Software Operating Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 Software Operating Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 Software Operating Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 Software Operating Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.